Motorola Mobility T6EY1 GSM Transceiver with WLAN and Bluetooth User Manual Exhibit 8D Users Manual

Motorola Mobility LLC GSM Transceiver with WLAN and Bluetooth Exhibit 8D Users Manual

Exhibit 8D Users Manual

Download: Motorola Mobility T6EY1 GSM Transceiver with WLAN and Bluetooth User Manual Exhibit 8D Users Manual
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Motorola Mobility T6EY1 GSM Transceiver with WLAN and Bluetooth User Manual Exhibit 8D Users Manual
Document ID498894
Application IDInFZ3xegZbg5+DYZp50NrQ==
Document DescriptionExhibit 8D Users Manual
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize247.14kB (3089305 bits)
Date Submitted2004-12-21 00:00:00
Date Available2005-05-02 00:00:00
Creation Date2004-12-17 14:06:49
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod2004-12-17 14:33:10
Document TitleThe following is a draft copy of the instruction manual
Document CreatorAcrobat PDFMaker 6.0 for Word
Document Author: Rob Bero

APPLICANT: MOTOROLA, INC.
FCC ID: IHDT6EY1
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A preliminary draft copy of the Users Manual follows in four parts (Exhibit 8A through Exhibit 8D):
EXHIBIT 8D
00M1000EN.book
389 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Using Data Communication
Data Communication from FOMA Handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Using Data Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing for Data Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Connection Setup File (Drivers) for M1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Connection Setup Files (Drivers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninstalling M1000 Connection Setup Files (Drivers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing for Bluetooth Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOMA PC Setup Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing FOMA PC Setup Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Data Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple Setting "Packet Data Communication Setting Using Other ISP's" .
Executing the Set Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninstalling FOMA PC Setup Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W-TCP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up APN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning COM Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Dial-up Networking Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Dial-up Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Dial-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Dial-up Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
390
391
393
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
402
406
407
408
410
412
412
413
419
428
389
00M1000EN.book
390 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Data Communication from
FOMA Handsets
You can perform three types of data
communication with your FOMA handset and
your PC; namely, packet communication, 64K
data communication and data transfer PC.
Available Data Communication Types
2Packet communication
Communication charges are based on the
volume of exchanged data.
Suitable when you wish to stay connected to
the network and exchange data on an as
needed basis.
Data can be transmitted with maximum
download speed of 384Kbps, maximum
upload speed of 64Kbps via network
supporting FOMA Packet communication
such as "mopera" (DoCoMo's Internet
provider service). The M1000 can also be
used for data communications overseas by
accessing GPRS access points.
• Performing large volumes of data
communication may result in high
charges.
Using Data Communication
390
264K data communication
Communication charges are based on the
duration of time being connected to the
network.
Stable 64K bps data transmission can be
performed via network supporting FOMA
64K data communication such as "mopera"
(DoCoMo's Internet provider service) or
synchronized ISDN 64K access points.
The M1000 can also be used overseas by
accessing CSD data communication
supported access points.
2Data transfer
Data can be transferred free of charge
between a PC and FOMA handset. The
FOMA handset can be connected directly
using the accompanying USB cable or by
connecting the desktop holder to a PC using
the USB cable. To transfer data, install the
Desktop Suite to the PC. 3P527
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Connecting the FOMA Handset and PC
To connect your FOMA handset to a PC or
PDA either of the following methods can be
used.
USB Connection
2Connect with the accompanying-USB cable
3P414
• Separately sold FOMA USB cables can
also be used.
2Connect with USB cable for PC via
Desktop holder 3P415
Bluetooth Connection
2Connect via Bluetooth 3P419
• Device registration is required prior to
use. 3P382
Cautions
Internet Service Provider Charges
You will be charged by your Internet Service
Provider (ISP, hereafter) to connect to the
Internet. FOMA Service does not include the
ISP fee and it must be paid to the ISP directly.
Contact your ISP for further details.
"mopera", is DoCoMo's free Internet provider
service that does not require you to register.
Setting up ISP Connection
ISP settings differ between Packet
communication and 64K data communication.
Select appropriate access points for Packet
communication. For 64K data communication,
select an access point which supports FOMA
64K data communication or synchronized
ISDN 64K.
• Connection to DoPa is not supported
• Connection to PHS64K/32K Data Communication
such as PIAFS is not supported.
00M1000EN.book
391 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
QoS
Stands for Quality of Service and indicates
quality of network service. Data
transmission speed can be specified on a
FOMA handset.* 3P461
User Authentication when Accessing the Network
Connection may require authentication (ID
and password). Enter the user ID and
password in Dial-up Network when prompted.
Contact the network administrator or the ISP
to obtain the ID and password, and further
details.
*:
W-TCP
TCP parameters that optimize TCP/IP
transmission capability during Packet
communication over FOMA network.
Optimization of TCP parameters is
necessary in order to generate the
maximum FOMA communication
capabilities.
Prerequisites to Packet Connection and
64K Data Communication
Communication using FOMA handsets
requires meeting the following conditions. The
service, however, may be unavailable even if
required conditions are met due to traffic
conditions at base stations or radio wave
conditions.
Administrator rights on PC
Full access rights to Windows XP and
Windows 2000 systems. All other users do
not have rights to install drivers (connection
setup files).
• PC must support USB cables
• For Bluetooth connection, devices such as PC has
must comply with Bluetooth Ver1.1 Dial-up
Networking Profile standards.
The actual data speed may vary by
depending on network conditions.
• To be within the FOMA service area
• For Packet communication, the access point must
support FOMA Packet communication
• For 64K data communication, the access point
(the designated network) must support FOMA
64K data communication or 64K synchronized
ISDN.
1Data communication terminologies
Bluetooth ON 3P382
Bluetooth device registration 3P382
cid
Stands for Context Identifier. APN
registration number is registered in FOMA
made up of digits 1 to 10. Up to ten APN's
can be registered.
DNS
Stands for Domain Name System
The system converts an address made up
of digits identified by computers to a 'name'
such as "mopera.ne.jp" for easier
recognition by human.
PC System Requirements
PC System requirements for data
communication are as follows:
Item
Requirement
PC main unit • PC-AT compatible machine with
a CD-ROM drive
• USB Port (Universal Serial Bus
Specification Rev1.1/2.0
compliant)
• Display Resolutions 800 × 600
dots, High Color(65,536Colors)
or higher recommended
OS
• Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000, Windows XP
(Japanese Version)
Memory
• Windows 98, Windows Me:32MB
or more*
• Windows 2000:64MB or more*
• Windows XP:128MB or more*
HDD space
• 5MB of available space or more*
*:
Using Data Communication
APN
Stands for Access Point Name. Identifies
the network to log in (ISP or LAN) for Packet
communication. DoCoMo's Internet
connection service mopera's APN is
"mopera.ne.jp".
Before Using Data
Communication
Required memory and HDD space may depend
on PC system specifications.
391
00M1000EN.book
392 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
NOTE
• Data communication may not be enabled
subject to system properties. DoCoMo does not
guarantee proper operations nor respond to
inquiries when used with system requirements
that are not mentioned above.
• Use the accompanying FOMA USB cable or a
FOMA USB cable sold separately. Do not use
general PC USB cables as the connector
interface does not match the shape of FOMA
external interface.
• Do not apply force to the connector when
inserting. The connectors can only be inserted
in the correct direction and at the correct angle.
When inserted correctly, the connectors can be
inserted smoothly. In case of difficulty in
inserting confirm the orientation of the
connectors.
Connecting PC and FOMA Handsets
Setting up connection with a USB cable is
described in this section.
The FOMA handset can be connected directly
using the accompanying FOMA USB cable or
by connecting the desktop holder using the
PC USB cable.
To Connect Using the Accompanying
FOMA USB Cable
1Removing the USB cable
a Pull the USB cable out straight while
holding down the release button on
the external connector.
Screen
Screen
b Pull out the USB cable from PC
Using Data Communication
Remove the cap covering the
external connection interface of the
FOMA handset
Connect the accompanying USB
connector to a USB port on the PC
Match the direction of the external
connector of the accompanying
USB cable with the external
connection interface on the FOMA
handset and insert the connector
straight
Once the connection is established, the
FOMA handset displays "USB cable
connected".
392
Connecting a General PC USB Cable to a
Desktop Holder
The desktop holder enables data
communication by connecting the FOMA
handset to both the PC and the AC adapter.
• Use a general USB cable with connectors that
support USB Rev1.1/2.0 Series A compliant.
00M1000EN.book
393 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Connect Desktop holder to a PC by
using the PC USB cable
午前７時５６分
1About Connection setup file (drivers)
and FOMA PC setup software
Connection setup file (drivers) and FOMA
PC setup software are included in the
FOMA M1000 CD-ROM.
• M1000 setup file is the driver software for
Packet communication, 64K data
communication or data transfer used for
connecting the FOMA handset with the
accompanying FOMA USB cable to a PC.
M1000 setup file installs necessary drivers to
Windows.
Screen
水曜日
Attach the FOMA handset to the
desktop holder
• FOMA PC setup software enables easy setup
of Packet communication, 64K data
communication or Dial up networking.
See P54 on how to attach/remove.
NOTE
Preparing for Data
Communication
Preparations for packet communication/64K
data communication by connecting the FOMA
handset with the PC is described in this
section.
Via Bluetooth
connection*
Install connection setup
file (drivers) 3P416
Connect the FOMA
handset with PC
3P419
Install connection setup
file (drivers)*3P416
Set up connection details
To set up using the
FOMA PC setup
software 3P419
To set up without using the
FOMA PC setup software
3P436
Installing Connection Setup
File (Drivers) for M1000
• Install all drivers in one attempt when installing the
M1000 setup file. Installation may be unsuccessful
if the accompanying FOMA USB cable is pulled
out, or if [Cancel] is clicked during installation. If
installation is unsuccessful, use uninstall
procedures to delete the M1000 setup file by
following uninstall procedures (3P418), and try
installing again.
• Log in as a user with administrator rights when
installing the M1000 communication set up file to
Windows 2000 or Windows XP. Contact the PC
manufacturer or Microsoft regarding operations
related to administrator rights settings.
Using Data Communication
Via USB connection
• If "FOMA M1000 USB" is not displayed in
"Uninstall M1000 setup file (drivers) "( 3P418),
the installation has failed. Run uninstallation
(3P418) and try installation again.
• Uninstall driver if PC does not recognize the
FOMA handset for some reason and install it
again.
Connect 3P429, P451
Disconnect 3P430, P452
*:
Connection setup file (drivers) installation is not
necessary if a Bluetooth modem other than that
of FOMA handsets has already been installed.
Go on to set up connection details. See P417 to
check for an installed Bluetooth modem.
393
00M1000EN.book
394 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Checking Connection
Setup Files (Drivers)
【仕様未定につき、記載省略します。
】
Checking whether the M1000 setup file is
installed properly.
Launch the “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel) in Windows
1Windows XP
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ コントロール
パネル ” (Control Panel)
1Windows 2000, Windows Me or
Windows 98
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ 設定 ”
(Settings) y “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel)
Launch the “システム” (Systems) in
“ コントロールパネル ” (Control
Panel)
1Windows XP
Click “ システム ” (Systems) in “ パフォー
マンスとメンテナンス ” (Performance
and Maintenance)
Using Data Communication
1Windows Me
Click “ すべてのコントロールパネルのオ
プションを表示する ” (Show all options
in Control Panel) if “システム” (Systems)
icon is not displayed in the “ コントロー
ルパネル ” (Control Panel).
Launch the Device Manager
1Windows XP or Windows 2000
Click “ ハードウェア” (Hardware) tab
then click “ デバイスマネージャ” (Device
Manager).
1Windows Me or Windows 98
Click “ デバイスマネージャ ” (Device
Manager) tab
Check installed driver names by
clicking each device
Check whether all drivers are listed under
“ ポート（COM と LPT)” (Port(COM and
LPT), “ ユニバーサルシリアルバス ”(USB)
“ コントローラ ” (USB Controller) and “ モデ
ム ” (Modem).
394
00M1000EN.book
395 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Go to "Using FOMA PC Setup Software"
(3P419) if all driver names are found.
Connecting with USB
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Device name
Driver name
Universal Serial Bus
(USB) Controller or USB
(Universal Serial Bus)
Controller
• FOMA M1000
• FOMA M1000
Command*
• FOMA M1000
Modem*
• FOMA M1000 OBEX*
(Windows XP)
*:
only for Windows Me/98
Connecting with Bluetooth
Screen
(Windows XP)
Screen
(Windows 2000)
Screen
Device name
Driver name
Modem
To be decided
NOTE
(Windows Me, Windows 98)
• Upon verifying above, if the list of driver names
is incomplete, delete the M1000 setup file by
following uninstall procedures, and try installing
again.
Uninstalling M1000 Connection
Setup Files (Drivers)
Device name
Driver name
Port (COM/LPT)
• FOMA M1000
Command Port
• FOMA M1000 OBEX
Port
Modem
• FOMA M1000
Follow the procedures below when
uninstalling of drivers is necessary. The
uninstall instructions below are for Windows
XP.
Using Data Communication
Screen
395
00M1000EN.book
396 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Connecting with USB
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Preparing for Bluetooth
Connection
【仕様未定につき、記載省略します。
】
【仕様未定につき、記載省略します。
】
Connecting with Bluetooth
Using Data Communication
396
【仕様未定につき、記載省略します。
】
00M1000EN.book
397 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
FOMA PC Setup Software
Packet communication or 64K data
communication from FOMA handset to PC
requires various settings. FOMA PC setup
software enables easy configuration simple
operations.
• Packet communication or 64K data
communication can be set up without using FOMA
PC setup software. 3P436
• See P414 for connection between FOMA
handsets and PC
Simple settings
Follow the guidance to set up "Create
FOMA data communication Dial-up
Network" while configuring "W-TCP
settings" etc. automatically.
W-TCP settings
The communication settings in PC are
optimized before using "FOMA Packet
communication".
Optimizing W-TCP settings is required in
order to maximize connection
performance.
NOTE
• If W-TCP setup software or FOMA data
communication setup software not included in
the bundled FOMA M1000 CD-ROM have
already been installed, uninstall them prior to
installing the FOMA PC setup software.
午前７時５６分
Procedures from Installation of FOMA PC
Setup Software to Internet Connection
Step1: Install software
FOMA PC setup software is installed
• Uninstall "old W-TCP setup software",
"old APN setup software" or older
versions of "FOMA PC setup software"
before installing "FOMA PC setup
software".
"FOMA PC setup software" cannot be
installed if "old W-TCP setup software"
or "old APN setup Software" is installed.
Step2: Prepare before setting up
Preparations are conducted prior to
setting up
• Check that FOMA handset is connected
to the PC and is acknowledged by the
PC.
• See P414 for connecting FOMA handset
with PC.
• If FOMA handset is not properly
acknowledged by PC, various setup and
data communication cannot be done. If
the FOMA handset is not acknowledged
then see P416 to install the connection
setup file.
Step3: Perform various settings
Setup is done according to the
desired type of data communication
• Configuring simple settings
- Packet communication setting using
"mopera" 3P423
- Packet communication setting using
other Internet Service Providers
3P424
- 64K data communication setting using
"mopera" 3P427
- 64K data communication using other
Internet Service Providers 3P428
- See P436 onwards for all other
settings.
Using Data Communication
Setting up Access Point Names (APN)
Access Point Names for Packet
communication need to be setup.
Unlike 64K data communication, FOMA
Packet communication does not require
use of a telephone number. Register
Access Point Names in FOMA handset
and connect to the network by
designating its registered number (cid) in
the access telephone number field.
"mopera" is pre-registered as
mopera.ne.jp, the first in the cid list by
default. Set up APNs to connect to other
ISP's or LAN's.
水曜日
Setup 4: Connect
Connection to the Internet is made
• See P429 for connection procedures.
397
00M1000EN.book
398 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Before Installing
• Use the FOMA PC setup software under the
following system requirements.
Item
Requirement
• PC-AT Compatible
OS
• Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000, Windows XP
(Japanese Version)
Memory
• Windows 98 or Windows Me:
32MB or more*
• Windows 2000: 64MB or more*
• Windows XP: 128MB or more*
HDD Space
5MB or more*
*:
* You are unable to select if “ タスクトレイに常
駐する ” (Remain in task tray) has been
selected.
Required memory and HDD space may vary
depending on the system configuration of the
PC.
Installing FOMA PC Setup
Software
• Log in with the user account with Administrator
rights to install ("FOMA PC setup software") on
Windows XP or Windows 2000. Contact the PC
manufacturer or Microsoft regarding administrator
rights setting.
Using Data Communication
記載省略します。】
b 【仕様未定につき、
If displayed screens show that old “W-TCP
Verify the installation folder and
click [ 次へ ](Next)
Click [ 参照 ] (Browse) to make changes,
specify desired installation folder, and click
[ 次へ ] (Next).
If HDD lacks space, you can install to a
different driver. Otherwise, proceed
accordingly.
Verify the folder name and click [ 次
へ ] (Next)
Name the new folder and click [次へ] (Next)
if necessary.
設定ソフト ” (W-TCP Setup Software) or
old “APN 設定ソフト ” (APN Setup
Software) are installed, refer to P421.
Click [ はい ] (Yes/agree) to agree to
the End User License Agreement
after reading
Installation will be canceled if [いいえ ] (No/
disagree)is clicked.
398
Displays icon in the task tray on the bottom
right (normally) of the PC screen.
• Check that no resident program or application is in
use before installation. If any program is in use,
click [ キャンセル ] (Cancel) to end the program
and start installation again.
【仕様未定につき、
記載省略します。】
Click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Select whether "W-TCP Setup Software"
stays in Task tray or not after setting up.
Selecting the checkbox (Remain in Task
tray) is recommended for the program to
set/release the optimization of "W-TCP
communication".
Select “タスクトレイに常駐する” (Remain
in Task tray) $$ and continue the installation
unless you have any particular problem.
Settings can be changed by clicking on “ メ
ニュー ” (Menu) in FOMA PC setup
software and selecting “W-TCP 設定をタス
クトレイに常駐させる ” (Set W-TCP
Software in task tray) even if “ タスクトレイ
に常駐する ” (Stay in task tray) has been
deselected.
Check the system requirements.
PC main body
午前７時５６分
Screen
00M1000EN.book
399 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Click [ 完了 ] (Done)
"FOMA PC setup software" operation
screen is launched when setup is complete.
Proceed to each setup.
水曜日
1If "FOMA PC setup software" is already
installed
The Following message is displayed.
Screen
Precautions during Installation of
FOMA PC Setup Software
1If "old W-TCP setup software" is
installed
The following message is displayed.
Screen
Delete “ 旧 W-TCP 設定ソフト ” (Older
version of W-TCP Setup Software) from
Add/Delete Programs in the Control Panel
Click [ はい ] (Yes) to automatically uninstall
the previously installed software followed
by the installation of FOMA PC setup
software.
1When [ キャンセル ] (Cancel) is clicked
during installation
When [ キャンセル ] (Cancel) or [いいえ ]
(No) is clicked during installation, and
when selected to not proceed further,
the following screen is displayed.
1If "Older version of Access Point Name
Setup Software" is installed, the
following message is displayed.
Screen
Click [ 継続 ] (Continue) to proceed with the
installation, and [ 中止 ] (Cancel) to
terminate.
Screen
1If old versions of "FOMA PC setup
software" is installed
The following message is displayed.
Screen
Setting up Data
Communication
Settings for Packet communication or 64K
data communication is made.
• Check that FOMA handset is properly connected
to PC before setting up. 3P414
Launch FOMA PC Setup Software
Click [ はい ] (Yes) to automatically uninstall
the old software followed by the installation
of FOMA PC setup software.
Using Data Communication
Click [ はい ] (Yes) to automatically
uninstall the old software followed by
the installation of FOMA PC setup
software.
午前７時５６分
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ プログラ
ム ” (Programs) y “FOMA PC 設定ソ
フト ” (FOMA PC Setup Software) y
FOMA PC 設定ソフト (FOMA PC
FOMA PC setup software)
399
00M1000EN.book
400 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
1Windows XP
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “すべてのプロ
グラム ” (All Programs) y “FOMA PC 設定
ソフト ” (FOMA PC setup software) y
“FOMA PC設定ソフト ” (FOMA PC setup
software)
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Be cautioned that large volume data exchanges
such as browsing web sites with images and
downloading large files using Packet
communication may result in high charges.
Click [ かんたん設定 ] (Simple
Settings)
Select “ パケット通信 ” (Packet
communication) then Click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
Screen
FOMA PC setup software is launched and
the operation screen is displayed.
Screen
Screen
Select “mopera 接続 ” (mopera
connection) then Click [ 次へ ] (Next)
See P424 if you wish to use other ISP than
"mopera".
Using Data Communication
400
Packet data communication using "mopera"
3P423
Packet data communication using other
Internet Service Providers 3P424
64K data communication setting using
"mopera" 3P427
64K data communication using other
Internet Service Providers 3P428
Screen
Simple Setting "Packet Data
Communication with mopera"
High speed packet data communication with
maximum speed of 384kbps via DoCoMo's
ISP service called "mopera" is set up.
• High speed packet data communication :
Maximum downlink speed 384kbps, Maximum
uplink speed 64kbps (excluding some models).
The charge is based on the volume of exchanged
data. You do not need not to worry about the
duration of connecting time. This service is based
on a best-effort connection where transmission
speed is affected by network traffic and
communication infrastructure.
Click [OK]
Please wait while the FOMA handset
connected to the PC obtains APN setup.
Screen
00M1000EN.book
401 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Enter the connection name then
Click [ 次へ ] (Next)
(Windows Me, Windows 98)
Specify the desired connection name.
Enter a recognizable name in “ 接続名”
(Connection Name) field.
This field is case sensitive. Enter name
accurately.
Invalid characters: ¥ / : * ? ! | " (single byte
only) cannot be accepted.
Screen
Select user when using Windows XP or
Windows 2000.
Enter the username and password
provided by the ISP. Enter accurately. The
fields are case sensitive.
Screen
午前７時５６分
Check “ 最適化を行う ” (Optimize)
then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
"W-TCP Settings" necessary for Packet
communication is optimized. This message
will not be displayed if it is already
optimized.
Reboot PC to validate the change.
Input username/password then
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
When “mopera接続” (mopera connection) is
selected, username/password are entry
can be omitted.
(Windows XP, Windows 2000)
Screen
Confirm settings and Click [ 完了 ]
(Done)
A list of all setting information is displayed.
Check that all settings are properly
configured.
A shortcut is created automatically if “ デス
クトップにダイヤルアップのショート
カットを作成する ” (Create Dial-up
Networking shortcut on desktop) is
selected.
Click [ 戻る ] (Back) to modify setting
information.
Using Data Communication
Screen
401
00M1000EN.book
402 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
After acquiring handset settings, “ パケット
通信設定” (Packet communication settings)
screen is displayed.
Specify a name in the APN input field
The field is case sensitive. Enter accurately.
Invalid characters: ¥ / : * ? !<> | " (single
byte only) cannot be accepted
If “ 発信者番号通知を行う ” (display ID
number) is selected, Phone number. will be
notified to the receiver while making a call.
mopera.ne.jp is set by default in the “ 接続先
(APN)の選択 ” (Select APN) field.
Screen
午前７時５６分
Click [OK]
Reboot PC to validate the changes. Click
[はい] (Yes) if prompted by reboot selection
screen.
Execute the connection 3P429
Screen
Simple Setting "Packet Data
Communication Setting Using Other ISP's"
High speed packet data communication with
maximum speed of 384kbps is set up.
Using Data Communication
• High speed packet data communication :
Maximum downlink speed 384kbps,
Maximum uplink speed 64kbps (excluding some
models). The charge is based on the volume of
exchanged data. You do not need not to worry
about the duration of connecting time. This service
is based on a best-effort connection where
transmission speed is affected by network traffic
and communication infrastructure.
• Be cautioned that large volume data exchanges
such as browsing web sites with images and
downloading large files using Packet
communication may result in high charges.
Click [ かんたん設定 ] (Simple
setting)
Select “ パケット通信 ” (Packet
communication) then Click [ 次へ ]
(Next).
Select “その他” (Others) then Click [
次へ ] (Next)
Click [OK]
Please wait while the FOMA handset
connected to the PC obtains APN setup.
402
Set up Packet communication
Set up APN
mopera.ne.jp is pre-registered by default as
the first cid.
Click [ 追加 ] (Add) to display “ 接続先 (APN)
の追加 ” (Add APN) to specify the desired
APN in the field. The APN must support
FOMA Packet communication. Click [OK].
You are reverted to the “接続先(APN)設定 ”
(set up APN) screen.
Only single byte alphanumerical
characters, (-) dash, and (.) full stop, can be
entered in the APN field.
Up to 10 cid can be registered.
• Select “PDP-PPP 方式 ” (PDP-PPP
connection) or “PDP-IP 方式 ” (PDP-IP
connection) from “ ダイヤルアップ種別 ”
(Dial-up Networking types) if field “ ダイ
ヤルアップの表示 ” (Display Dial-up
Networking) is set to “ 全表示 ” (Display
all) 3P435
00M1000EN.book
403 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Configure Advanced Settings (TCP/
IP)
Click [詳細情報の設定] (Advanced settings)
in “ パケット通信設定 ” (Packet
communication settings) to display “IP アド
レス ” (IP Address) and “ ネームサーバー ”
(Name Server) setting screen. Input
necessary information related to ISP and
LAN Dial-up Networking where required.
水曜日
午前７時５６分
username and password provided by ISP
must be entered correctly. Note that fields
are case sensitive.
Select “ 最適化を行う ” (Optimize)
then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
“W-TCP 設定 ” (W-TCP setting) necessary
for Packet communication is optimized.
This screen is not displayed if already
optimized. (Proceed to step12)
Select APN then click [OK]
Back to Step 5.
The APN list set in Step 6 is displayed in the
“ 接続先 (APN) の選択 ” (Select APN) dialog.
Verify connection with designation
(APN) in “ 接続先 (APN) の選択 ”
(Select APN) menu then click
[ 次へ ] (Next)
username and password then
j Set
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select
user.
(Windows XP, Windows 2000)
setting information then click
l Verify
[ 完了 ] (Done)
All configured settings are listed. Verify that
there are no errors in the setup information.
A shortcut on desktop will be created
automatically if “ デスクトップにダイヤル
アップのショートカットを作成する ”
(Create Dial-up Networking shortcut on
desktop) is selected.
Click [ 戻る ] (Back) to change settings
Screen
(Windows Me, Windows 98)
Screen
Using Data Communication
Screen
Screen
m Click [OK]
Reboot PC to validate changes. Click
[ はい ] (Yes) if prompted by the reboot
selection screen.
Execute the connection 3P429
403
00M1000EN.book
404 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Invalid characters: ¥ / : * ? ! < > | " (single
byte only) are not accepted.
Select "FOMA M1000" for modem name.
Simple Settings "64K Data
Communication Setting Using mopera"
64Kbps data communication is set up.
DoCoMo's ISP "mopera" is used.
• Charges are based on the duration of connecting
time
Click [ かんたん設定 ] (Simple
setting)
Select “64K データ通信 ” (64K data
communication) then click [ 次へ ]
(Next).
Screen
Set username and password then
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
User may ignore this step if mopera
connection is selected.
Screen
(Windows XP, Windows 2000)
Screen
Select “mopera 接続 ” (mopera
connection) then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Using Data Communication
See P428 to use ISP connection other than
"mopera"
(Windows Me, Windows 98)
Screen
Screen
Enter APN and select modem then
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
“64K データ通信設定 ” (64K Data
communication) dialog is displayed.
Specify a name as you wish in “ 接続名”
(Connection) field.
This field is case sensitive. Enter name
accurately.
404
In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select a
user.
Setup information provided by ISP must be
entered correctly. Note that fields are case
sensitive.
00M1000EN.book
405 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Verify setup information then click
[ 完了 ] (Done)
Connection name must be entered. The
field is case sensitive. Enter accurately.
Note that fields are case sensitive.
Invalid characters: ¥ / : * ? ! < > | " (single
byte only)
All configured settings are listed. Verify that
there are no errors in the setting
information.
A shortcut on desktop is created
automatically if “ デスクトップにダイヤル
アップのショートカットを作成する ”
(Create Dial-up Networking shortcut on
desktop) is selected.
Click [ 戻る ] (Back) to change settings.
Screen
Screen
When using the accompanying FOMA-USB
cable, select "FOMA M1000" (FOMA
M1000) as modem.
Enter the information provided by ISP
correctly. The fields are case sensitive and
accept only single byte characters. The
phone number is notified once connected if
“発信者番号通知を行う” (Display caller ID)
is selected.
Click [OK]
Execute the connection 3P429
Simple Setting "64K Data
Communication with Other ISP"
Select “64K データ通信 ” (64K data
communication) then click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
Select “ その他 ” (Other) then click [
次へ ] (Next)
Enter Dial-up Networking
information then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Set up username and password
then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select a
user.
Using Data Communication
• Charges are based on duration of time connected.
Click [ かんたん設定 ] (Simple
setting)
Configuring Advanced setting
(TCP/IP setting)
Click “ 詳細情報の設定 ” (Advanced setting)
to display “IP アドレス ” (IP Address) and
“ ネームサーバー ” (Name Server) setting
dialog. Input necessary information related
to ISP or LAN Dial-up Networking where
required.
Setting is performed for 64K data
communication at 64Kbps.
午前７時５６分
If connecting to another ISP that possesses
synchronized ISDN 64K access points, the
following information need to be registered.
- Connection name (optional)
- Modem selection (FOMA M1000)
- Dial-up phone number
405
00M1000EN.book
406 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
(Windows XP, Windows 2000)
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Click [OK]
Execute the connection 3See right
Screen
Executing the Set
Connection
Connection and disconnection using the
settings configured with the FOMA PC Setup
software is described in this section.
(Windows Me, Windows 98)
• Connection from dial-up icon is valid only for the
FOMA handset used to configure with the icon.
Install connection setup file again if connecting
with another FOMA handset.
Click connection icon
on the PC
Click [ ダイヤル ] (Dial) and connect
Screen
Click “ ダイヤル ” (Dial) without entering the
“ ユーザ名 ” (Username)and “ パスワード ”
(Password) if mopera is selected. Enter
“ ユーザ名 ” (Username)and “ パスワード ”
(Password) and click “ ダイヤル ” (dial) if
another ISP or dial up connection is
selected.
No need to enter password again if “ パス
ワードを保存する ” (Save password) is
selected.
Set username and password information
accurately according to the information
provided by the ISP. The fields are case
sensitive.
Using Data Communication
Verify setup information then click
[ 完了 ] (Done)
A list of all settings is displayed. Check that
all settings are properly configured.
A shortcut is created automatically if “デス
クトップにダイヤルアップのショート
カットを作成する ” (Create Dial-up
Networking shortcut on desktop) is
selected.
Click [ 戻る ] (Back) to change settings.
Screen
Screen
Click [OK] upon verifying
connection
The Following screen is displayed when
connecting the dial up normally.
• The message is not displayed if “ 接続 ”
(connection) has been set to hide the
message previously.
406
00M1000EN.book
407 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Right click on the “W-TCPアイコン ” (WTCP icon) in the task tray, and click “ 常駐さ
せない ” (terminate in task tray).
Disconnecting
Closing the web browser does not always
guarantee disconnection from the network.
Disconnect the connection by following the
steps below.
Click dial up icon
in task tray on PC
screen
Right click
Dial up icon
Click
The connection screen is displayed.
Click [ 切断 ] (Disconnect)
Terminating active programs
The following messages will be displayed if
uninstallation is attempted while “FOMA PC
設定ソフト ” (FOMA PC Setup software) or
“W-TCP 設定 ” (W-TCP setting) is running.
Stop uninstalling and close all active
programs.
Screen
Screen
Screen
NOTE
• The displayed data speed on the PC may be
different from the actual speed.
Uninstalling FOMA PC
Setup Software
Before Uninstallation
Undo all changes made for the FOMA
handset settings before uninstalling the
FOMA PC setup software.
Disable “W-TCP 設定 ” (W-TCP
setting) in task tray
Launch “ アプリケーションの追加と
削除 ” (Add/Remove Programs) in
Windows
1Windows XP
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ コントロール
パネル ” (Control Panel) y “ プログラムの
追加と削除 ” (Add/Remove Programs)
Using Data Communication
Uninstalling
1Windows Me, Windows 98 or Windows
2000
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ 設定 ”
(Settings) y “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel) y “ プログラムの追加と削
除 ” (Add/Remove Programs)
"アプリケーションの追加と削除のプロパ
ティ ” (Add/Remove Applications
properties) will be displayed in Windows Me
or Windows 98.
407
00M1000EN.book
408 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Select “FOMA PC 設定ソフト ”
(FOMA PC Setup software) y click [
変更と削除 ] (Change/Delete)
午前７時５６分
Optimization of W-TCP is disabled after
PC is rebooted.
Screen
Select “NTT DoCoMo FOMA PC設定ソフト ”
(NTT FOMA PC Setup software)
Screen
Click here
Verify the program to delete y click
[ はい ] (Yes)
Uninstallation begins.
Screen
Click [OK] Installation of FOMA PC
setup software is completed.
W-TCP Setting
W-TCP Roles
“W-TCP 設定 ” (W-TCP Setting) is a "TCP
Parameters setting tool" to optimize TCP/IP
performance for Packet communication in
FOMA network.
Setting this software is required to fully utilize
FOMA handset communication performance.
Setting/Disabling the Optimization.
Windows XP
Each Dial-up Networking can be optimized
separately in Windows XP.
Screen
Launch the program
Using Data Communication
1To operate from FOMA PC Setup software
Click [W-TCP 設定 ] (W-TCP setting) in “マ
ニュアル設定 ” (Manual setting) after
launching the program
Screen
1Disabling “W-TCP最適化 ” (Optimizing
W-TCP)
Displays following message if “W-TCP 最
適化 ” (Optimizing W-TCP) is performed.
Click [ はい ] (Yes) to uninstall
1To operate from task tray
Click W-TCP icon in task tray.
Left Click
Screen
408
00M1000EN.book
409 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Conduct the following operations
1When system setting is not optimized
Click [ 最適化を行う ] (Optimize)
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1When disabling optimization
a Click [ システム設定 ] (System setting)
in “W-TCP設定 ” (W-TCP setting)
b Click [ 最適化を解除する ] (Disable
optimization)
Screen
Screen
"(W-TCP (Dial-up Networking) setting)" is
displayed. Select the desired Dial-up
Networking and click [ 実行 ] (Execute) to
optimize system setting or Dial-up
Networking.
System setting is optimized after PC is
rebooted by following the instructions
displayed.
1When system setting is already
optimized
Screen
Optimization is disabled after PC is
rebooted by following the instructions
displayed.
Windows Me, Windows 2000 or Windows
98
Launch program
1When operating from FOMA “PC 設定ソ
フト ” (FOMA PC Setup software)
Click [W-TCP設定] (W-TCP setting) in “マ
ニュアル設定 ” (Manual setting) after
launching program
Left Click
“W-TCP(ダイヤルアップ )設定 ” (W-TCP
(Dial-up Networking) setting) is displayed.
Perform necessary settings to make
changes.
System setting is optimized after PC is
rebooted by following the instructions
displayed.
Conduct the following operations
1If it is not optimized
Click [ 最適化を行う ] (Optimize)
Using Data Communication
1When operating from Task tray
Click (W-TCP icon) in task tray.
409
00M1000EN.book
410 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Setting up APN
APN for Packet communication is set up.
Screen
Up to 10 APN numbers can be set up.
Numbers from 1 to 10 can be assigned to the
cid's.
The cid is used to specify connection for
Packet communication.
Optimization is enabled after PC is
rebooted by following the instructions
displayed.
1If it is already optimized
“ 現在、最適化されています。” (Already
optimized) message is displayed in “W-TCP
設定 ” (W-TCP Setting)
"mopera" is pre-registered as 1 in the cid list
by default. Other APNs must be assigned a
number from in 2 to 10.
• Check that FOMA handset is properly connected
to PC before setting up 3P414
Click [ 接続先 (APN) 設定 ] (APN
Setting) after launching “FOMA PC
設定ソフト ” (FOMA PC Setup
software)
Screen
Screen
Using Data Communication
410
Click [ 最適化を解除する ] (Disable
optimization) to disable settings resulting
from transmission with devices other than
the FOMA handset.
Optimization is disabled after PC is
rebooted by following the instructions
displayed.
Click [OK] in FOMA handset setting
screen.
Load registered APN information by
accessing connected FOMA handset
automatically.
• Launching is disabled if FOMA handset
is not connected
Setting up APN
Screen
00M1000EN.book
411 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Adding/Editing/Deleting APN
Loading APN Setting in FOMA Handset
1When Adding an APN
Click [ 追加 ] (Add) in “ 接続先 (APN) 設定 ”
(APN Setting)
APN setting can be retrieved by manually
accessing the FOMA handset
1When Editing registered APN
Select desired APN from list in “ 接続先
(APN) 設定 ” (APN Setting) yClick [ 編集 ]
(Edit)
• You can select from “PDP-PPP 方式 ”
(PDP-PPP connection)or “PDP-IP 方式 ”
(PDP-IP connection) to add/edit an APN
if “ ダイヤルアップの表示 ” (Display
Dial-up Networking) is set to “ 全表示”
(Display all) 3P435
1When Deleting registered APN
Select desired APN from list in “ 接続先
(APN) 設定 ” (APN Setting) yClick [ 削除 ]
(Delete)
• APN Registered in cid 1 cannot be
deleted.
Creating Dial-up Networking
Dial-up Networking for Packet communication
can be created from an added/edited APN in
“ 接続先 (APN) 設定 ” (APN setting), and be
saved in FOMA handset.
“ パケット通信用ダイヤルアップの作成 ”
(Create Dial-up Networking for Packet
communication) is displayed
• Perform Step 5 if mopera is selected as
the APN.
Enter desired APN name and click
“ アカウント・パスワードの設定 ”
(Setting up account /password)
Enter username and password then
click [OK]
Loading APN Setting Information from File
APN setting saved in PC can be re-edited and
written to FOMA handset.
Click “ ファイル ” (File) y “ 開く ”
(Open)in “ 接続先 (APN) 設定 ” (APN
setting)
Writing APN Setting Information to FOMA
Handset
Displayed APN setting can be written to
FOMA handset
Click [ はい ] (Yes)
• In Windows XP or Windows 2000, a user
is selected.
• Click [ 詳細情報の設定 ] (Advanced
setting) in “パケット通信用ダイヤルアッ
プの作成 ” (Create Dial-up Networking
for Packet communication) if IP address
and DNS setting are provided by your
ISP. Then click [OK] after registering
required information.
Using Data Communication
Click ファイル (File) y “ 名前を付け
て保存 ” (Save as)/“ 上書き保存 ”
(Save) in “ 接続先 (APN) 設定 ” (APN
Setting)
Select an added/edited APN in “接続
先 (APN) 設定 ” (APN Setting), and
click [ ダイヤルアップ作成 ] (Create
Dial-up Networking)
Write to FOMA handset confirmation
screen is displayed.
Saving Setting Information info a file
APN setting information registered in FOMA
handset can be backed up, and APN setting
information in edit mode can be saved.
Click “ファイル” (File) y “FOMA端末
からの設定を取得 ” (Retrieve setting
from FOMA handset) in “ 接続先
(APN) 設定 ” (APN setting)
Click FOMA“端末へ設定を書き込む”
(Save in FOMA handset) in “ 接続先
”(APN) 設定 (APN setting)
411
00M1000EN.book
412 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Click [FOMA 端末へ設定を書き込む ]
(Write settings to FOMA handset)
and perform writing
水曜日
Displaying Dial-up
Networking Type
Select from “PDP-PPP 方式 ” (PDP-PPP
connection)or “PDP-IP 方式 ” (PDP-IP
connection)* from Dial-up Networking type if
“ ダイヤルアップの表示 ” (Display Dial-up
Networking) is set to “ 全表示 ” (Display all).
Select “PPPのみ表示 (PDP-IP方式のみ表示／
設定可 )” (Display only PPP (Display/Set up
only PDP-IP connection)) normally.
*:
Assigning COM Port
The COM port of the PC is assigned to the
FOMA handset to manually perform
connection setting. This COM port can be
changed. Normally, however, set it to “自動設
定 (推奨 )” (Auto setting (recommended)) .
Click “ メニュー” (Menu) y “ 通信設
定 ” (Connection setting) after
launching program
“PDP-PPP方式 ” (PDP-PPP connection) is
Packet communication using Point-to-Point
protocol. “PDP-PPP方式 ” (PDP-PPP
connection) is used to connect to mopera
(mopera)etc. Contact your ISP or network
administrator to check connection protocol of
APN.
Click “ メニュー” (Menu) y “ 通信設
定 ” (Connection setting) after
launching program
Set up screen is displayed.
Using Data Communication
Set up screen is displayed.
Screen
Screen
Select “PPP のみ表示 ”(Display only
PPP)/“ 全表示 (Display All)” in “ ダイ
ヤルアップの表示 ” (Display Dial-up
Networking)
Click [OK]
Select “COM ポート指定 ” (Assign
COM port) , and assign COM Port
COM Port number is displayed in COM.
412
Click [OK]
Assigned COM Port is set up.
• Use “ ハイパーターミナル ” (Hyper
terminal) which is accompanied with
Windows to check COM port 3P440
NOTE
• APN information are stored in FOMA handset.
To connect another FOMA handset set up APN
again.
• If you wish to continue to use the same APN as
that registered in the PC, register the APN to the
same number (cid) in the FOMA handset.
• If the COM port connecting the FOMA handset
is recognized by the PC as greater than COM20
then loading and writing of APN information is
disabled. In these cases, use “ハイパーターミ
ナル” (Hyper Handset) which is accompanied
with Windows. 3P440
午前７時５６分
00M1000EN.book
413 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Setting up Dial-up Networking
You can set up Dial-up Networking for Packet
communication/64K data connection without
using FOMA PC setup software. The flow is
explained below.
Set up Packet
communication
Set up 64K data
connection
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1AT Commands
AT Commands consist of commands for
controlling modems.
The FOMA handset supports standard AT
commands, some extended commands
and proprietary AT commands.
• Detailed settings of “ データ通信” (data
connection) or FOMA handset can be
checked with AT Command entries.
How to attach 3P414
Install connection setup file (driver). 3P416
NOTE
Check COM port
Check COM port.
3P437
Set up APN
Set up APN 3P440
• Set *9601 as connection number when using
DoCoMo's ISP "mopera" for 64K data
connection.
• Set “ 発信者番号の通知／非通知 ” (Caller ID
display ON/OFF) as required. Set to 通知 (ON)
to use "mopera".
• Set “その他の設定” (Other settings) as required.
FOMA is operational with default settings.
• Contact your ISP or network administrator for
further setup details.
• Set up is not required
with "mopera".
Checking COM Port
Set up caller ID
Set up to display/hide caller ID. 3P442
Other settings
This section explains about procedures to
verify COM Port number.
The verified COM port is used for APN setting
(3P440).
Set up Dial-up Networking
• Contact your ISP or network administrator for
further setup details.
• Windows XP users
Set up APN 3P438
• Windows 2000 users
Set up APN 3P439
• Windows Me users
Set up APN. 3P439
• Windows 98 users
Set up APN. 3P439
Connect Dial-up Networking 3P451
• There is no need to check modem when if using
DoCoMo's ISP "mopera" APN setup is not
necessary, then. Proceed to “ 発信者番号の通知／
非通知を設定します ” (Display/hide caller ID)
(3P442)
1About APN and cid
Unlike 64K data connection, a regular
telephone number is not used for Packet
communication. APN is used instead.
Using Data Communication
Perform other settings. (AT Command) 3P453
You are required to specify COM port number
assigned to "FOMA M1000" (modem)
embedded after installation of connection
setup file when setting up the APN.
• The (cid) registration number 1 to 10 are
registered in FOMA handsets as part of the
APN when APN numbers are set up.
• APN is managed by cid (registration number
from 1 to 10). Entering (*99***#)
connects to the corresponding APN.
• "mopera" is pre-registered to 1 in the cid list
by default as ("mopera.ne.jp"). "mopera" can
413
00M1000EN.book
414 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
easily be used by entering the number
(*99***1#). Use cid 2 to 10 to register other
APNs.
• APNs can be registered like registering
contact information to a mobile phone. The
table below summarizes differences and
similarities when compared to a contact list in
a mobile phone.
Item to compare
Registration data
APN
Setting
Phone
number
cid
Memory
number in
contact list
Registration Registrati
process
on via PC
Registrati
on via
mobile
phone
How to use
○ (Using
FOMA PC
Setup
software)
Name of
intended
party
Using Data Communication
–
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ コント
ロールパネル ” (Control Panel)
Screen
○ (Using
dedicated
software)
× (Unable ○
to
confirmed)
Specify cid
and
connect
午前７時５６分
Checking COM Port in Windows XP
Contact
list in
handset
APN
–
水曜日
Search
contact list
and call
Click “ プリンタとその他のハード
ウェア ” (Printer and other
hardware) in “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel) y “ 電話とモデムのオ
プション ” (Telephone and modem
options)
Screen
Enter
phone
number
and dial
from
FOMA
handset
Enter “ 市外局番／エリアコード ”
(Area code) if “ 所在地情報 ”
(Location information) is displayed,
and click [OK]
Click “ モデム ” (Modem) tab.
Checking COM port in “ 接続先 ”
(Connection) list of FOMA M1000,
and click [OK]
The verified COM port is used for APN
setup.
414
00M1000EN.book
415 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
• Displayed messages and COM port
numbers may vary depending on your
PC.
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Enter “ 市外局番 ” (Area code) then
click [OK] if “ 所在地情報 ” (Location
information) is displayed
Click “ モデム ” (Modem) tab and
check COM port in “ 接続先 ”
(Connection) list of FOMA M1000
(FOMA M1000). Click [OK]
Screen
The verified COM port number is used for
APN Setup.
• Displayed message and COM port
number may vary depending on your PC.
Checking COM Port in Windows 2000
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ 設定 ”
(Settings) y “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel)
Screen
Screen
Checking COM Port in Windows Me/98
Click “ 電話とモデムのオプション ”
(Telephone and modem options) in
“ コントロールパネル ” (Control
Panel)
Screen
Using Data Communication
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ 設定 ”
(Settings) y “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel)
Screen
415
00M1000EN.book
416 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Click [ モデム ] (Modem) in “ コント
ロールパネル ” (Control Panel)
If “ モデム ” (modem) icon is not displayed,
click “ すべてのコントロールパネルのオプ
ションを表示する ” (Display all options in
control panel).
Screen
Screen
Setting up APN
Default setting
cid1:mopera.ne.jp
cid2~10: never
Connection software for AT commands is
required to set up APN.
Check that FOMA M1000 is properly
set up then click “ 検出結果 ” (More
Info on the Diagnostics) tab
Setup procedures using Hyperterminal in
Windows is explained in this section.
• APN for Packet communication is set up. Up to 10
APNs with registration number 
1 to 10(3P437) can be set up.
• "mopera" is pre-registered to 1 in the cid list by
default as "mopera.ne.jp". Registration numbers
2 to 10 are recommended for use with other
APNs.
Screen
Using Data Communication
416
• The registered cid is used as the connection
number for the APN setting up Dial-up
Networking.
• Inquire your network administrator or ISP
regarding APN's other than mopera.
• AT commands may not be displayed in
Hyperterminal from Step 6 P441 onwards.
Check COM port to which FOMA
M1000 is set up and click [OK]
The verified COM port number is used for
APN Setup.
• Displayed message and COM port
number may vary depending on your PC.
• Entering in the following manner:
• ATE1
• Displays AT commands.

Connect FOMA handset with
accompanying USB cable 3P414
Turn on FOMA handset and connect
the other end of the USB cable to
PC
00M1000EN.book
417 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ すべての
プログラム ” (All Programs) y “ アク
セサリ ” (Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ハイパーター
ミナル ” (Hyperterminal)
午前７時５６分
Screen
Hyperterminal is launched.
1In Windows Me or Windows 2000
On the PC, click “ スタート ” (Start) y“ プ
ログラム ” (Program) y“ アクセサリ ”
(Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ハイパーターミナ
ル ” (Hyperterminal)
1In Windows98
Click Hypertrm.exe after clicking “ ハイ
パーターミナル ” (Hyperterminal)
Enter desired name in 名前 (name)
and click [OK]
Enter name as "sample" here as an
example
Screen
1When COM port in FOMA M1000 cannot
be selected
a Click [ キャンセル ] (Cancel)
“ 接続の設定 ” (Set up connection)
screen is closed.
b Click “ ファイル ” (File) and select “ プ
ロパティ ” (Properties)
c Select FOMA M1000 in “ 接続方法 ”
(Connection method) of “接続の設定”
(Set up connection) tab of “sampleのプ
ロパティ” (Sample properties) screen
d Deselect OFF “ 国／地域番号と市外局
番を使う” (Use country code and area
code)
e Click [OK]
Select FOMA M1000 in “ 接続方法 ”
(Connection method) then click
[OK]
1When COM port in FOMA M1000 can be
selected
Click [OK] in COM port properties.
• To check COM port number selected in
“ 接続方法” (Connection method)
(3P437), perform “COMポートを確認す
る ” (Check COM Port)
Enter APN then press
Using Data Communication
Screen
Enter in the following format
AT+CGDCONT=,"PPP", "APN"
 : Enter desired number between
2 to 10
If a cid is already set up, not that the new
CID overwrites the previous setting.
"APN" : Enter APN with double quotation
mark
"PPP" : Enter "PPP" as is
417
00M1000EN.book
418 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
APN setup is complete if OK is displayed.
Example: When XXX.abc is set up in cid 2
Enter "AT+CGDCONT=2,"PPP","XXX.abc"
$$"
Screen
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Caller ID can be set up with AT command before
performing Dial-up Networking
• Use *DGPIR command to setup caller ID to notify
or hide, or to reset to “設定なし ” (None) (default
value) (3P454)
Launch “ ハイパーターミナル ”
(Hyperterminal)
Set up caller ID display during
Packet communication
Enter in the following format
"AT*DGPIR="
1To Append 184 (hiding caller ID)
automatically when calling or answering
Enter AT*DGPIR=1
Check that if OK is displayed, and
click “ ファイル ” (File) y “ ハイパー
ターミナルの終了 ” (End
Hyperterminal)
Screen
Hyperterminal is closed.
Saving is not necessary when confirm save
screen is displayed.
1When APN settings are reset with AT
command
• cid=1 is reset to mopera.ne.jp (default value),
and cid=2 to 10 is unregistered.
Using Data Communication

AT+CGDCONT=
(When resetting
all cids)
AT+CGDCONT=
(When
resetting a specific cid)
1When checking APN with AT command
Click “ ファイル ” (File) y “ ハイパー
ターミナルの終了 ” (End
Hyperterminal) if [OK] is displayed
• Display current settings

AT+CGDCONT?
1When nothing is displayed as AT
command is entered

ATE1
Screen
Notifying/Hiding Caller ID
Default setting
Notify
• Caller ID can be turned on or off to enable/disable
notifying Caller ID to the designator during packet
connection. Use caller ID with care. Your caller ID
is valuable information.
418
1To Append 186 (notifying caller ID)
automatically when calling or answering
Enter AT*DGPIR=2
00M1000EN.book
419 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
1Setting up 186(Notify)/184(Hide) in
Dial-up Networking
186/184 can also be appended to a
number in Dial-up Networking.
* When 186/184 are setup in both DGPIR and
Dial-up Networking, the applicable settings
are described in the following table.
Dial-up
Networking
setup (when
cid=1)
*99***1#
184*99***1#
*Caller ID
display
setting with
DGPIR
command
Never
Hide
Notify
Notify
Never
Hide (Priority
given to 184
setup in
Dial-up
Networking)
Notify
Never
Hide
Notify
午前７時５６分
Setting up Dial-up
=1>
• Contact your ISP or network administrator to setup
and connect with another ISP.
Setting up Dial-up Connection in
Windows XP
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ すべての
プログラム ” (All Programs) y “ アク
セサリ ” (Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communications) y “ 新しい接続 ”
“ ウィザード ” (New connection
wizard)
Click [ 次へ ] (Next) in “ 新しい接続
ウィザード ” (New connection
wizard)
Notify
Hide
Hide
186*99***1#
Notify/hide
caller ID
水曜日
Notify (Priority
given to 186
setup in
Dial-up
Networking)
Screen
NOTE
Select “ インターネットに接続する ”
(Connecting to the Internet), and
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Using Data Communication
• Enter AT*DGPIR=0 to reset caller ID setup with
DGPIR command to "Never".
• Set caller ID setting to "Notify" when using
"mopera", DoCoMo's ISP service.
Screen
419
00M1000EN.book
420 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Select “ 接続を手動でセットアップす
る ” (Setting up connection
manually) then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Enter desired name in “ISP 名 ” (ISP
name) then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Screen
Screen
Using Data Communication
420
Select “ ダイヤルアップモデムを使用
して接続する ” (Connection with
dial-up modem) then click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
“ デバイスの選択 ” (Select device) is
displayed, select “ モデム− FOMA
M1000(COMx)” (Modem-FOMA
M1000 (COMx)) then click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
“ デバイスの選択 ” (Select device) is only
displayed when multiple modems are
installed.
(COMx) is COM Port number displayed in
“COM ポートの確認 ” (Checking COM Port)
(3P437)
Screen
Enter APN number in “ 電話番号 ”
(Phone number) then click
[ 次へ ] (Next)
Screen
Leave “ユーザー名” (Username), “パ
スワード ” (Password) and “ パス
ワードの確認入力 ” (Confirm
password) blank, and click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
Entering of username and password is not
required for "mopera"
Enter “ ユーザー名 ” (Username), “ パスワー
ド ” (Password) and “パスワードの確認入
力 ” (Confirm password) provided by your
ISP or network administrator if connecting
to another ISP.
00M1000EN.book
421 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
setting in “ 全般 ” (General)
m Check
tab
Screen
Verify that “ モデム− FOMA M1000”
(Modem-FOMA M1000) in “ 接続の方法 ”
(Connection method) is selected if 2 or
more modems are connected to your PC.
Select if it is deselected.
Verify that “ ダイヤル情報を使う” (Use dial
up information) is not selected. Deselect
OFF if selected.
j Click [ 完了 ] (Done)
Displays newly created connection wizard.
Screen
Screen
“ ネットワーク ” (Network) tab
n Click
and perform each setup.
icon of newly created dial up,
l Select
and click “ファイル” (File) y “プロパ
Select PPP:Windows 95/98/NT4/2000,
Internet in “ 呼び出すダイヤルアップサー
バーの種類 ” (Dial up server)
Select “ インターネットプロトコル (TCP/
IP)” (Internet protocol(TCP/IP)) in “ この接
続は次の項目を使用します” (Use following
items in this connection)
• Settings to cannot be changed in “QoS パ
ケットスケジューラ ” (QoS Packet
Scheduler)
ティ” (Properties)
Screen
Using Data Communication
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ すべての
プログラム ” (All Programs) y “ アク
セサリ ” (Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ネットワーク
接続 ” (Network connection)
Screen
o Click [ 設定 ] (Setting)
421
00M1000EN.book
422 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
all checkboxes then click
p Deselect
[OK]
水曜日
[OK] in “ ネットワーク ”
q Click
(Network) tab screen
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ プログラ
ム ” Program) y “ アクセサリ ”
(Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ネットワーク
とダイヤルアップ接続 ” (Network
and dial up connection)
Click [OK] in “ 電話とモデムのオプ
ション ” (Telephone and modem
option)
Click [ 次へ ] (Next) in “ ネットワーク
の接続ウィザード ” (Network
connection wizard)
Click “ 新しい接続の作成 ” (Create
new connection) icon in “ ネット
ワークとダイヤルアップ接続 ”
(Network and dial up connection)
Using Data Communication
Screen
Enter “ 市外局番 ” (Area code) then
click [OK] if “ 所在地情報 ” (Location
information) is displayed
“ 所在地情報 ” (Location information) is
displayed when launching “ 新しい接続の作
成 ” (Create new connection) for the first
time in Step2.
From the second launch onwards, this is
not displayed. “ ネットワークの接続ウィ
ザード ” (Network connection wizard) is
displayed instead. Proceed to Step5 when
displayed.
Screen
Setting up Dial-up Networking in
Windows 2000
午前７時５６分
Screen
Select “ インターネットにダイヤル
アップ接続する ” (Dial up
connection to the Internet) then
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Screen
422
00M1000EN.book
423 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Select “ インターネット接続を手動で
設定するか、
またはローカルエリア
ネットワーク (LAN) を使って接続し
ます ” (Connect to the Internet
manually or via Local Area
Network(LAN)) then click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
Screen
午前７時５６分
Screen
APN number in “ 電話番号 ”
j Enter
(Telephone number) then click [ 詳細
設定 ] (Advanced setting)
Deselect “市外局番とダイヤル情報を使う”
(Use area code and dial up information).
Select “ 電話回線とモデムを使ってイ
ンターネットに接続します ”
(Connect to the Internet with
telephone line and modem) then
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Screen
Enter the information provided by your ISP
in “ 接続の種類 ” (Connection type) and “ ロ
グオンの手続き ” (Log on process)
Verify that FOMA M1000 is displayed
in “ インターネットへの接続に使うモ
デムを選択する ” (Select modem for
Internet connection) then click
[ 次へ ] (Next)
Using Data Communication
Screen
Set each settings in “ 接続 ”
(Connection) tab then click “ アドレ
ス ” (Address) tab as shown
Screen
Select FOMA M1000 if FOMA M1000 is not
displayed.
• The following message is not displayed if
modems other than FOMA M1000 are
not installed.
423
00M1000EN.book
424 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Click “アドレス” (Address) tab, and
Enter the desired name in “ 接続名 ”
l set
IP address or DNS (Domain
(Connection) then click [次へ] (Next)
Name Service) as shown the click
[OK]
Enter the information such as “IPアドレス”
(IP address) or “ISPによるDNSアドレスの
自動割り当て ” (DNS(Domain Name
Service) address auto-assigned by ISP)
provided by your ISP or network
administrator in order to connect to an ISP
other than "mopera".
Screen
Screen
“ いいえ ” (No) then click
p Select
[ 次へ ] (Next)
Screen
[ 次へ ] (Next) in “ インターネッ
m Click
トアカウントの接続情報 ” (Internet
accounts set up information)
“ユーザー名” (Username) and
n Leave
“パスワード” (Password) blank then
Using Data Communication
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Username and password confirmation
screens are continuously displayed. Click
[OK] in each screen
Username and password are not required
for "mopera".
Enter “ ユーザー名 ” (Username) and “ パス
ワード” (Password) provided by your ISP or
network administrator in order to connect to
an ISP other than "mopera".
“今すぐインターネットに接
q Deselect
続するにはここを選び [ 完了 ] をク
リックしてください ” (Select here
and click [Done] to connect to the
Internet now) then click [ 完了 ]
(Done)
Screen
Screen
424
00M1000EN.book
425 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
newly created dial up icon,
r Select
then click “ ファイル ” (File) y “ プロ
パティ” (Properties)
Screen
Screen
u Click [ 設定 ] (Setting)
v Deselect all settings, then click [OK]
Check settings in “ 全般 ” (General)
s tab
Check if “モデム”−FOMA M1000 (ModemFOMA M1000) in “接続の方法” (Connection
method) is selected when 2 or more
modems are connected to PC. Select if it is
deselected.
Verify that “ ダイヤル情報を使う ” (Use for
dial up information) is deselected. Deselect
if it is selected.
Screen
[OK] in “ ネットワーク ”
w Click
(Network) tab
Setting up Dial-up Networking in
Windows Me/Windows 98
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ プログラ
ム ” (Program) y “ アクセサリ ”
(Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ダイヤルアッ
プネットワーク ” (Dial-up
Networking)
Click [ 次へ ] (Next) in “ ダイヤルアッ
プネットワークへようこそ ”
(Welcome to Dial-up Networking)
Screen
Click “ ネットワーク ” (Network) tab,
t and
perform each setup
Select PPP:FWindows 95/98/NT4/2000,
Internet in “ 呼び出すダイヤルアップサー
バーの種類 ” (Dial up server).
Select only “ インターネットプロトコル
(TCP/IP)” (Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)) for
component.
This message is displayed when launching
Dial-up Networking for the first time. Click
[ 次へ ] (Next) to proceed to Step 4.
From the second time onwards, this is not
displayed. “ ダイヤルアップネットワー
ク ”(Dial-up Networking) in Step 3 is
displayed instead.
Using Data Communication
425
00M1000EN.book
426 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Enter APN number in “ 電話番号 ”
(Telephone number), then click [ 次
へ ] (Next)
Leave 市外局番 (Area code) blank.
Screen
Screen
Click “ 新しい接続 ” (New
connection) icon in “ ダイヤルアップ
ネットワーク ” (Dial-up Networking)
Check connection name (Desired)
then click [ 完了 ] (Done)
Screen
Screen
Using Data Communication
426
Enter desired name in “ 接続名 ”
(Connection name) then click [次へ]
(Next)
Verify that FOMA M1000 is displayed in “ モ
デムの選択 ” (Select modem).
• Select FOMA M1000 if FOMA M1000 is
not displayed.
Screen
Click スタート (Start) y “ プログラ
ム ” (Program) y “ アクセサリ ”
(Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ダイヤルアッ
プネットワーク ” (Dial-up
Networking)
00M1000EN.book
427 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Select newly created Dial-up
Networking icon then click “ ファイ
ル ” (File) y “ プロパティ”
(Properties)
Screen
Screen
Select “ 電話番号 ” (Phone number)
and “ 接続方法 ” (Connection
method) in “ 全般 ” (General) tab.
Deselect “市外局番とダイヤルのプロ
パティを使う ” (Use properties in
area code and dial)
Verify that FOMA M1000 is displayed in “ 接
続方法 ” (Connection method)
• Select FOMA M1000 if FOMA M1000 is
not displayed
1In Windows 98
Click “ サーバーの種類 ” (Server type) tab
and perform various settings.
Select “PPP: インターネット , Windows NT
Server, Windows 98” (PPP:Internet,
Windows NT Server, Windows 98) in “ ダイ
ヤルアップサーバーの種類 ” (Dial up
server).
Select only “ インターネットプロトコ
ル”(TCP/IP) (Internet protocol (TCP/IP)) for
component.
Click “ セキュリティ” (Security) tab,
and click [OK] without entering
Username and password
Screen
Screen
“ ネットワーク ” (Network) tab
j Click
and perform various settings.
Select “PPP:インターネット,Windows 2000/
NT,Windows Me” (PPP:Internet, Windows
2000/NT, Windows Me) in “ ダイヤルアップ
サーバーの 種類 ” (Dial up server)
Using Data Communication
Entering of Username and password is not
required for "mopera".
Enter “ ユーザー名 ” (Username) and “ パス
ワード” (Password) provided by your ISP or
network administrator for other ISP in order
to connect to an ISP other than "mopera".
1In Windows 98
Click [OK]
Select only “ インターネットプロトコ
ル”(TCP/IP) (Internet protocol (TCP/IP)) for
component.
427
00M1000EN.book
428 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Check setting if a message notifying the
completion of connection is not
displayed.
Using Dial-up Networking
Using Dial-up Networking for Packet
communication and 64K data connection
without the use of FOMA PC setup software
is explained in this section.
• Check that your FOMA handset is properly
connected to your PC before connecting.
Check connection between FOMA handset and
PC prior to establishing Bluetooth connection
Screen

Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ すべての
プログラム ” (All programs) y “ アク
セサリ ” (Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ネットワーク
接続 ” (Network connection)
Click connection icon
Select Dial-up Networking icon of ISP
name setup in Step7 of P444, then click
“ネットワークタスク” (Network task) y “こ
の接続を開始する ” (Start connection), or
click the connection icon.
Disconnecting
Disconnecting may not be completed by
closing the Internet browser. Disconnect by
performing the following procedures.
Dial-up
Networking icon
Connection screen is
displayed.
Click [ 切断 ] (Disconnect)
Using Data Communication
Screen
Screen
Check setting and click [ ダイヤル ]
(Dial)
Dial-up network is completed when a
connection in progress message is
displayed followed by a connection
established message.
• Check each setting and click [ 接続 ]
(Connect) when using an OS other than
Windows XP.
• Entering of a “ ユーザー名 ” (Username)
and “ パスワード ” (Password) is not
required to connect to "mopera".
428
Click Dial-up
Networking icon in
task tray
NOTE
• Transmission speed displayed on the PC may
vary from the actual transmission speed.
00M1000EN.book
429 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
AT Commands
AT Commands are commands for setting FOMA handset functions from a PC.
• AT Command input format.
[&F]
[&W]
[AT]
[M]
Reset to factory default.
Register setting. Called settings by ATZ Command.
Can be used in FOMA M1000 Command Port.
Can be used with FOMA M1000 (Modem).
AT Command
AT%V
Overview
Parameters/Description
Command Examples
Displays versions of
FOMA handset.
AT%V
Ver1.00
OK
Set the operating
conditions of the circuit
CD for DTE.
n=0
n=1
: Always keeps line CD signal ON
: Line CD signals vary according to
line connection status (default)
Set the operation
performed when circuit
ER signal received from
DTE is switched from ON
to OFF.
n=0
n=1
: Ignore status (assumed to be ON) AT&D1
: Online command mode is set
OK
when status changes from ON to
OFF
: Line is disconnected and OFF
LINE mode (default) is enabled
when status changes from ON to
OFF
Reset to factory default. If
the command is entered
during communication,
the handset is reset.
Only n=0 can be set (skippable)
Set how to control the
data set ready signal to
be output to DTE.
n=0
n=1
AT&S0
OK
AT&W n
[AT] [M]
Register current settings.
Only n=0 can be set (skippable)
AT *DGANSM=n
Set the reject/permit
setting mode for incoming
Packet communication.
The setting is only valid
for Packet communication
received immediately
after the command is
entered.
n=0
: Turn OFF reject (AT*DGARL)/
permit setting for incoming Packet
communication (default)
n=1 : Turn ON reject setting for incoming
Packet communication
n=2 : Turn ON permit setting for
incoming Packet communication
AT *DGANSM?
: Display currently settings
AT *DGANSM=0
OK
AT *DGANSM?
*DGANSM:0
OK
Set up APN to permit
incoming Packet
communication from APN
settings. Use 
parameters defined by
AT+CGDCONT.
n=0
AT*DGAPL =0,1
OK
AT *DGAPL?
*DGAPL:1
OK
AT *DGAPL =1
OK
AT *DGAPL?
OK
[M]
AT&C n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
AT&D n
n=2
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
AT&F n
[AT] [M]
AT&S n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT*DGAPL=n [,cid]
[M]
: Add APN defined by  to list of
APNs permitted for incoming
Packet communication
n=1 : Delete APN defined by  from
list of APNs permitted for incoming
connection
If  parameter is omitted, all the 
are added to/deleted from the list.
AT *DGAPL?
: Display permit incoming Packet
communication
Using Data Communication
[M]
: Always ON (default)
: DR signal ON at time of line
connection
AT&C1
OK
429
00M1000EN.book
430 ページ
AT Command
AT*DGARL=n[,cid]
２００４年１１月２４日
Overview
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
n=0
: Add APN defined by  to list of
APNs refused for incoming
connection
n=1 : Delete APN defined by  to list
of APNs refused for incoming
connection
If  parameter is omitted, all  are
added to/deleted from the list.
AT *DGARL?
: Display refused incoming
connection
AT *DGARL =0,1
OK
AT *DGARL?
*DGARL:1
OK
AT *DGARL =1
OK
AT *DGARL?
OK
The setting for notify or
hide made by this
command is valid when a
connection is sent or
received. The Dial-up
Networking settings can
also be used to append
186(ON) or 184(OFF) to
the dial-up connection.
3 P442
n=0
: Connecting to APN directly
(default)
n=1 : Send 184 to APN (always OFF)
n=2 : Send 186 to APN (always ON)
AT *DGPIR?
: Display current setting
AT *DGPIR =0
OK
AT *DGPIR?
*DGPIR:0
OK
Switch FOMA handset's
mode from online data
mode to online command
status without
disconnecting when
escape sequence
executed.
(Online Data Mode)
+++ (Unable to see the
display)
OK
Disconnection reason
display.

See Disconnection reason list 3 P460
AT+CEER
+CEER:36
OK
AT+CGDCONT
[M]
Set APN when sending
Packet communication.
3 P461
3 P461
AT+CGEQMIN
Register criteria value for
determining if QoS
(Quality of Service) sent
from network when PPP
Packet communication is
established, is acceptable
or not.
AT+CGEQMIN=[Parameters] 3 P461
AT+CGEQMIN=?
: Display all lists of settings
AT+CGEQMIN?
: Display current settings
3 P461
Set QoS (Quality of
Service) to request for the
network when PPP
Packet communication is
established.
AT+CGEQREQ= [Parameters] 3 P462
AT+CGEQREQ=?
: Display all lists of settings
AT+CGEQREQ?
: Display current settings
3 P462
Display FOMA handset's
version.
AT+CGMR
12345XXXXXXXXXXX
OK
Set whether to report
network service
registration status. Upon
receiving the status
report, "Within service
area" or "Outside service
area" will be displayed.
n=0
n=1
AT+CGREG=1
OK
(Set to report status)
AT+CGREG?
+CGREG:1,0
OK
(Outside service area)
(Move from Outside
service area to Within
service area)
+CGREG:1
[M]
AT *DGPIR=n
[M]
+++
[M]
AT+CEER
[M]
Using Data Communication
[M]
AT+CGEQREQ
[M]
AT+CGMR
[AT] [M]
AT+CGREG=n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
430
Command Examples
Set APN to refuse
incoming connection.
APN setting uses 
parameters defined by
+CGDCONT.
: OFF (default)
: ON (Report the status when it is
shifted between within service
area and Outside service area)
AT+CGREG?
: Display current setting
+CGREG:< n>,
: Parameter
stat :
0 Outside service area
1 Within service area
4 Unknown
5 Outside service area
(Roaming)
00M1000EN.book
431 ページ
AT Command
AT+CGSN
２００４年１１月２４日
Overview
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
AT+CGSN
12345XXXXXXXXXX
OK
Set if any error report in
FOMA handset
n=0
: Display ERROR and not result
code (default)
n=1 : +CME ERROR: Use result
code and display reason as
number
n=2 : +CME ERROR:User result
code and display reason as
characters
AT+CMEE?
: Display current settings
The right hand side is the
command examples when errors
in FOMA handset or connection.
AT+CMEE=0
OK
AT+CNUM
ERROR
AT+CMEE=1
OK
AT+CNUM
+CME ERROR:10
AT+CMEE=2
OK
AT+CNUM
+CME ERROR:SIM
not inserted
Display FOMA handset's
own number.
number: Telephone number
type : 129 or 145
129 : International access code does
not include +
145 : International access code
includes +
AT+CNUM
+CNUM:,"+8190XXXXXX
XX",145
OK
Display bearer types
before displaying
CONNECT result code
during line connection.
n=0 : Do not display (default)
n=1 : Display

: Display only "GPRS" for
Packet communication
(Display "SYNC", "AV32K",
"AV64K" for data connection)
AT+CR?
: Display current settings
AT+CR =1
OK
ATD *99 ***1#
+CR:GPRS
CONNECT
Set to use extend result
code for incoming
connection.
n=0
n=1
: Do not use (default)
: Use +CRING.+CRING
Form for +CRING is as follows
+CRING
: GPRS "PPP",,, ""
AT+CRC?
: Display current setting.
AT+CRC=0
OK
AT+CRC?
+CRC:0
OK
Set to display network
information indicating
"Within service area" or
"Outside service area".
n=0
n=1
: Not notifying (default)
: Notifying (when switching "Within
service area" and "Outside service
area")
AT+CREG?
: Display current settings
+CREG
: < n>,
: set value
stat :
0 Outside service area
1 Within service area
4 Unknown
5 Within service area (Roaming)
AT+CREG=1
OK
(Set to notify)
Display FOMA handset's
manufacturer.
AT+GMI
Motorola
OK
Display FOMA handset's
product name.
AT+GMM
FOMA M1000
OK
Display FOMA handset's
version.
AT+GMR
Ver1.00
OK
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CNUM
[M]
AT+CR=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CRC=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CREG=n
• OS dependant
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
AT+GMI
[M]
AT+GMM
[M]
AT+GMR
[M]
AT+CREG?
+CREG:1,0
OK
(Outside service area)
(Move from "Outside
service area" to "Within
service area")
+CREG:1
Using Data Communication
[AT] [M]
AT+CMEE=n
Command Examples
Display FOMA handset's
serial number.
431
00M1000EN.book
432 ページ
AT Command
AT+IFC=n,m
２００４年１１月２４日
Overview
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
: DCE by DTE
: DTE by DCE
Each set value for n,m
0 : No flow control
1 : Perform XON/XOFF flow control
2 : Perform RS/CS (RTS/CTS) flow
control
Default: n,m=2.2
AT+IFC?
: Display current settings
AT+IFC=2,2
OK
AT+WS46=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
Set wireless network for
FOMA handset.
n=22 : W-CDMA (WidebandCDMA) only
(default)
AT+WS46=22
OK
ATA
Perform the receiving
process while receiving
Packet communication or
64K data connection.
RING
ATA
CONNECT
Execute the previously
executed command. No
carriage return is
necessary.
A/
OK
Perform automatic call
process based on
parameters and dial-up
parameters to FOMA
handset.
ATD*99***# : Packet
communication
1 to 10 : APNs set in +CGDCONT

ATD*99***1#
CONNECT
Set AT+CBST=116,1,0
ATD : 64K data
connection
<64K connection>
AT+CBST=116,1,0
OK
ATD090XXXXXXXX
CONNECT
Set AT+CBST=131,1,0
ATD< phone number > : AV32K
connection

AT+CBST=131,1,0
OK
ATD090XXXXXXXX
CONNECT
Set AT+CBST=134,1,0
ATD< phone number > : AV64K
connection

AT+CBST=134,1,0
OK
ATD090XXXXXXXX
CONNECT
Sets the presence of
echo for DTE in
command mode.
n=0
n=1
: Echo "OFF"
: Echo "ON"(default)
ATE1
OK
Performs onhook action
to FOMA handset.
n=0
: Disconnect line (can be skipped)
(packet communication)
+++
ATH
NO CARRIER
Display the confirmation
code.
n=0
n=1
: Display "NTT DoCoMo"
: Display product name (same as
+GMM)
: Display version in PPP Packet
communication (same as +GMR)
ATI0
NTT DoCoMo
OK
ATI1
FOMA M1000
OK
: Return from online command
mode to offline data mode (can be
skipped)
ATO
CONNECT
[&F] [&W][AT] [M]
[M]
A/
[AT] [M]
ATD
Using Data Communication
[M]
ATE n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
ATH n
[M]
ATI n
n=2
[AT] [M]
ATO n
[M]
432
Command Examples
Set to control local flow
Return from online
command mode to offline
data mode during
connection.
n=0
00M1000EN.book
433 ページ
AT Command
ATQ n
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Overview
Set up to display/hide
result code to DTE.
n=0
n=1
Set number of rings until
FOMA handset receives
connection automatically.
n=0
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
Command Examples
: Display result code (default)
: Does not display result code
ATQ0
OK
ATQ1
(OK is not displayed this
time)
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
ATS0=n
n=1- 255
n=43
n=127
ATS2?
: Default
: Disabled
: Display current settings
ATS2=43
OK
ATS2?
043
OK
Set carriage return
character.
n=13
: Default (Only n=13. Can be
set)
: Display current settings
ATS3=13
OK
ATS3?
013
OK
ATS4?
: Default (Only n=10. Can be
set)
: Display current settings
ATS4=10
OK
ATS4?
010
OK
Set Back Space (BS)
character.
n=8
ATS5?
: Default (Only n=8. Can be set)
: Display current settings
ATS5=8
OK
ATS5?
008
OK
Set waiting time till end of
connection.
n=1 to 120 (default: n=60)(second)
Setting 121 to 255 is regarded as 120
ATS7? : Display current settings
ATS7=60
OK
ATS7?
060
OK
Set all result code to be
displayed in either
numerals or alphabet
characters.
n=0
: Send back a result code in
numerals
: Send back a result code in
alphabet characters (default)
ATV1
OK
Set whether to show
speed display in the
CONNECT display for the
connection.
Also detect busy tone or
dial tone.
n=0
: No dial tone detected, no busy
tone detect, no speed display
: No dial tone detected, no busy
tone detected, speed display
: Detect dial tone, no busy tone
detected, speed display
: No dial tone detected, detect dial
tone, speed display
: Detect dial tone, detect dial tone,
speed display (default)
ATX1
OK
ATS3?
[&F] [M]
ATS4=n
Set Line Feed (LF)
character.
n=10
[&F] [M]
ATS5=n
[&F] [M]
ATS7=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
ATV n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
ATX n
n=1
n=1
n=2
n=3
n=4
[&F] [&W]
ATZ
[AT] [M]
Reset to the status of
nonvolatile memory.
Disconnect the line if this
command is entered
during connection.
Using Data Communication
ATS0?
Set escape character.
[&F] [M]
ATS3=n
ATS0=0
OK
ATS0?
000
OK
: Receive automatically with
specified number of rings.
: Display current setting
[&F] [&W] [M]
ATS2=n
: Do not receive automatically
(default)
(Off line command mode)
ATZ
NO CARRIER
(On line command mode)
ATZ
OK
433
00M1000EN.book
434 ページ
AT Command
AT¥S
２００４年１１月２４日
Overview
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
Display current set of
commands and S register
setting.
Select type of response
code when connected.
n=0
[M]
AT¥V n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CPIN
n=1
Enter PIN in FOMA
handset.
Command Examples
AT¥S
E1 Q0 V1 X4 &
C1&D2&S0¥V0
S000=000
S002=043
S003=013
S004=010
S005=008
S006=005
S007=060
S008=003
S010=001
S030=000
S103=001
S104=001
OK
: Do no use expanded result code
(default)
: Use expanded result code
Format
AT¥V0
OK
Using Data Communication
: AT+CPIN="",
""
This command is to enter
PIN1, PIN2 or PIN unlock
number in FOMA handset
based on result code replied
by AT+CPIN?
PIN cannot possibly be
entered with this command
depending on result code
when AT+CPIN? is entered
even if PIN or PIN unlock code
is required.
Do not use this command in
order to change PIN. 
and  must be
surrounded with " " .
(+CPIN:READY is ready to
respond when +CPIN? is
entered) AT+CPIN="1234"
ERROR
Result of AT+CPIN?
+CPIN:READY:PIN1 code
PIN2
PIN1 unlock code, Unable to
input PIN2 unlock code
+CPIN:SIM PIN: Waiting to
enter PIN1
+CPIN:SIM PIN2: Waiting to
enter PIN2
+CPIN:SIM PUK: Locking
PIN1 (Possible to enter PIN1
unlock code)
+CPIN:SIM PUK2: Locking
PIN2 (Possible to enter PIN2
unlock code)
(+CPIN:SIM PIN2 is ready
to respond when +CPIN?
is entered)
AT+CPIN="1234"
OK
The right is the example of
PIN"1234" "and "12345678".
(+CPIN:READY is ready to
respond when +CPIN? is
entered)
AT+CPIN="12345678","12
34"
ERROR
(+CPIN:SIM PIN is ready
to respond when +CPIN?
is entered)
AT+CPIN="1234"
OK
(+CPIN:SIM PUK is ready
to respond when +CPIN?
is entered: PIN locked)
AT+CPIN="12345678","12
34"
OK
(+CPIN:SIM PUK2 is
ready to respond when
+CPIN? is entered: PIN
locked)
AT+CPIN="12345678","12
34"
OK
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN:READY
OK
[AT][M]
434
AT+CPIN=?
OK
00M1000EN.book
435 ページ
AT Command
AT+CLIP=n
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Overview
Display sender's caller ID
when 64K data
connection is received.
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
n=0
n=1
Result
m=0
m=1
m=2
No output result (default)
Output result
+CLIP (n,m)
Network setting that does not
notify caller ID
: Network setting that notifies
caller ID
: Unknown
[&F][&W][M]
AT+CLIR=n
Set to notify phone
number when sending
64K data connection.
[M]
ATS30=n
Disconnect handset if no
data is received or sent.
n=0
Command Examples
AT+CLIP=0
OK
AT+CLIP=?
+CLIP:(0,1)
OK
(+CLIP=1 Output result)
RING
+CLIP:
"090XXXXXXXX",177,
"123",136
: Use setting written in service
agreement
n=1
: Do not send Caller ID
n=2
: Send Caller ID (default)
Result : +CLIR(n, m)
m=0
: CLIR is not operating (always
notify)
m=1
: CLIR is operating (always does
not notify)
m=2
: Unknown
m=3
: CLIR Temporary mode (default;
does not notify)
m=4
: CLIR Temporary mode (default:
notify)
AT+CLIR=0
OK
n=0 : Inactive timer off (default)
n=0 to 255
ATS30=0
OK
AT+CLIR?
+CLIR:0,1
OK
AT+CLIR=?
+CLIR:(0-2)
OK
ATS30?
000
OK
ATS30=?
ERROR
[&F][M]
ATS103=n
Set to append and send
received sub address.
n=0
n=1
n=2
: *
: / (default)
: ¥ (yen symbol or backslash)
ATS103=0
OK
ATS103=?
ERROR
[&F][M]
ATS104=n
Set to append and send
outgoing sub address.
n=0
n=1
n=2
: #
: % (default)
: &
ATS104=0
OK
ATS104?
000
OK
ATS104=?
ERROR
[&F][M]
AT*DANTE
[M]
Using Data Communication
ATS103?
000
OK
Display reception level
with a number.
n=0
n=1
n=2
n=3
Reception level 0
Reception level 1
Reception level 2
Reception level 3
AT*DANTE
*DANTE:3
OK
AT*DANTE=?
*DANTE:(0-3)
OK
435
00M1000EN.book
436 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
AT Command
AT*DRPW
Overview
Display an index for
reception power of the
radio signal.
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
Command Examples
AT*DRPW
*DRPW:0
OK
AT*DRPW=?
*DRPW:(0-75)
OK
[M]
Lists of Disconnected Reasons
Disconnected reasons for requested contents are as follows:
1Packet communication
Value
27
Reason
APN is not present or incorrect.
30
Disconnected from network.
33
Requested service option is not subscribed.
36
Connection is disconnected properly.
164K Data connection
Value
Using Data Communication
436
Reason
Specified number does not exist.
16
Connection is disconnected properly.
17
Unable to communicate because remote device is busy.
18
Call was made, but no response within the specified time.
19
Unable to communicate because remote device is busy calling.
21
Remote device rejected a call.
63
Network service and option are not valid.
65
Unavailable processing speed was specified.
88
You made a call to or received a call from a handset with different handset properties.
00M1000EN.book
437 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Command examples
Additional AT Commands Descriptions
1Invalid AT command
The following commands will not generate
errors but will not act as commands.
• AT (Enter only AT)
• ATT (Tone setting)
• ATP (Pulse setting)
• ATS6 (Specify duration of pause till
dialing commences)
• ATS8 (Specify duration of comma till
dialing commences)
• ATS10 (Set delay time for automatic
disconnection)
1Command name +CGDCONT[M]
• Overview
Set APN when sending packet
connection.
Although this command is a setup
command, it does not get stored to the
status of nonvolatile memory by &W,
and does not get reset by &F and &Z.
• Form
+CGDCONT=[[,"PPP"[ ,""]
]]
• Parameter descriptions
Set APN when sending Packet
communication. See examples in
command operation lists
*:
: 1 to 10
: Optional
 is the number used to control the
destination (APN) for the Packet
communication to be registered in
FOMA handset.
1~10 can be registered. =1 is set
as mopera.ne.jp as default but
overwrittable.
is optional connection name that
indicates each destination.
• Operation without parameter
+CGDCONT=
: Set default value
for all 
+CGDCONT=
: Set specified
 as default
+CGDCONT=? : Display list of
values that can be
configured
+CGDCONT?
: Display current
settings
1Command name:+CGEQMIN=[Parameter]
[M]
• Overview
Register criteria value to determine if
QoS sent from network when PPP
Packet communication established is
permitted.
4 ways to set up as stated in command
examples.
Although this command is a setup
command, it does not get stored to the
status of nonvolatile memory by &W,
and does not get reset by &F and &Z.
• Form
+CGEQMIN=[[,,[ ,] ] ]
• Parameter description
*
: 1 to 10
*
: None (default) or 64
*
: None (default) or 384
*:
 is the number used to control the
destination (APN) for the Packet
communication to be registered in
FOMA handset. 1 to 10 can be
registered.
In  and
, the minimum
connection speed [in kbps] is set for
both upload and download traffic
between FOMA handset and the base
station. If the parameter is set to None
(default), all speeds are permissible. If
64 and 384 are set, any connection at a
speed except the above limit is not
permitted, and the Packet
communication will not be connected.
• Operation without parameter
+CGEQMIN=
: Set default value for
all 
+CGEQMIN=
: Set specified 
as default value
Using Data Communication
*
*
Registered APN named abc (cid=3)
AT+CGDCONT=3,"PPP","abc"
OK
• Command examples
437
00M1000EN.book
438 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
4 ways to set up as states in command
examples. Set (1) as states value for
each s
(1) Command used to permit all speed
both upload and download
(when=2)
AT+CGEQMIN=2
OK
(2) Command used to permit only
64kbps upload and 384kbps
download (when=3)
AT+CGEQMIN=3,,64,384
OK
(3) Command used to permit 64kbps
upload and all speed download
(when=4)
AT+CGEQMIN=4,,64
OK
(4) Command used to permit all speed
upload and only 384kbps download
(when=5)
AT+CGEQMIN=5,,,384
OK
1Command name:
:+CGEQREQ=[Parameter] [M]
• Overview
Using Data Communication
Sets up QoS to request to the network
when PPP Packet communication is
established.
This set up is also set up as the default
value in one of the patterns stated in
the following command execution
example.
Although this command is a setup
command, it does not get stored to the
status of nonvolatile memory by &W,
and does not get reset by &F and &Z.
• Form
+CGEQREQ=[]
• Parameter Description
*:1 to 10
*:
 is the number used to control the
destination (APN) for the Packet
communication to be registered in FOMA
handset. 1 to 10 can be registered to
FOMA handset.
• Operation without parameter
+CGEQREQ=
: Set default value for
all s.
+CGEQREQ=
438
水曜日
午前７時５６分
: Set specified 
as default.
• Command examples
Only 1 way to set the command. The
contents are set by default for each cid.
Command used to require 64kbps
upload and 384kbps download
(when=3)
AT+CGEQREQ=3
OK
1Saving modem port command setting
values
Settings by AT commands are initialized
when FOMA handset is switched ON and
OFF, except APN setting by
AT+CGDCONT (3 P440), QoS settings
by AT+CGEQMIN and AT+CGEQREQ
commands, permit/reject setting mode for
incoming connection set by AT*DGAPL/
AT*DGARL/AT*DGANSM commands or
appending 184 or 186 for packet
connection by AT*DGPIR command.
Commands with [&W] can be saved by
entering
AT&W
after setting. And at the same time, other
settings with [&W] are also saved. These
values can be called by entering
ATZ
even if after FOMA handset was switched
ON and OFF.
00M1000EN.book
439 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Result Codes
1Result codes for data connection
No.
Text display
Description
OK
Operation performed properly.
CONNECT
Connected to their party.
RING
Incoming call.
NO CARRIER
Line disconnected.
ERROR
Unable to accept command.
NO DIALTONE
Unable to detect dial tone.
BUSY
Detect busy tone.
NO ANSWER
Completed connection. Timeout.
100
RESTRICTION
Network restriction in place.
101
DELAYED
Redial call restricted.
1Extended result codes
No.
Text display
Description
CONNECT 1200
Connected at 1200bps between FOMA handset and PC.
CONNECT 2400
Connected at 2400bps between FOMA handset and PC.
11
CONNECT 4800
Connected at 4800bps between FOMA handset and PC.
13
CONNECT 7200
Connected at 7200bps between FOMA handset and PC.
12
CONNECT 9600
Connected at 9600bps between FOMA handset and PC.
15
CONNECT 14400
Connected at 14,400bps between FOMA handset and PC.
16
CONNECT 19200
Connected at 19,200bps between FOMA handset and PC.
17
CONNECT 38400
Connected at 38,400bps between FOMA handset and PC.
18
CONNECT 57600
Connected at 57,600bps between FOMA handset and PC.
19
CONNECT 115200
Connected at 115,200bps between FOMA handset and PC.
20
CONNECT 230400
Connected at 230,400bps between FOMA handset and PC.
21
CONNECT 460800
Connected at 460,800bps between FOMA handset and PC.
1Connection protocol result code
No.
Text display
Description
PPPoverUD
Connect via PPPoverUD(BC=UDI, +CBST=116,1,0)
AV32K
AV (video-phone) connect via [32K]
AV64K
AV (video-phone) connect via [64K]
PACKET
Connect with PACKET
Using Data Communication
10
NOTE
• When ATVn command (3 P457) is set to n=1, the result code is displayed in the alphanumeric display format
(default). When the command is set to n=0, the result code is displayed in the numerical display format.
• To retain compatibility with a modem connected via conventional RS-232C, connection speed is displayed
but it differs from the actual connection speed because FOMA handset is connected to the PC with a USB
cable.
• When "RESTRICTION" message is displayed, (No.100), the network is busy. Please try later.
439
00M1000EN.book
440 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Examples of Result Codes
1When ATX0 is set
• Regardless of the settings of AT¥Vn
command ( 3 P459), only CONNECT is
displayed upon completion of
connection.
Text display example
: ATD*99***1#
CONNECT
Number display example
: ATD*99***1#
1When ATX1 is set
• When ATX1, AT¥V0 is set (default)
• Upon completion of connection, result
code is displayed in the following format:
CONNECT 
Text display example
: ATD*99***1#
CONNECT 460800
Number display example
: ATD*99***1# 1 21
Using Data Communication
• When ATX1, AT¥V1 is set*
• The code is displayed upon completion
of connection in the following format:
CONNECT PACKET /
/

Maximum 64kbps for sending and
maximum 384kbps for receiving
connection to mopera.ne.jp is displayed
as follows.
Text display example
: ATD*99***1#
CONNECT 460800
PACKET mopera.ne.jp /
64/ 384
Number display example
: ATD*99***1#
1 21 5
*:
440
When ATX1 and AT¥V1 are set at the
same time, it is likely that dial-up
connection will fail. Only use of AT¥V0
is recommended.
水曜日
午前７時５６分
00M1000EN.book
441 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Entering Characters
Character Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Entering Characters with Direct Input  . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Editing/Registering Fixed Phrases  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters  . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Registering Frequently Used Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Using Electronic Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Setting the Detail of Character Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Entering Characters with Indirect Input Method
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
441
00M1000EN.book
442 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Character Input
With FOMA handset, a character is entered by tapping a target character at a keyboard displayed
on the touch screen with the Stylus. Also, by switching the input method, a character can be
entered by a free draw. Since character input is needed in various situations of FOMA handset
operation, such as registering contacts, creating messages, and creating notes, it would be
convenient if you memorize the procedure beforehand.
Displaying Character Entry Screen
Tap the character input field where a character needs to be entered, and tap $$ on the Status bar
to display the character entry screen. Enter a target character by switching the input mode.
• Input mode 3 P467
• Input method 3 P466
• Switching input method 3 P467
In case of 50-character kana
syllabary keyboard
Input Method
There are following methods to enter characters with FOMA handset. Choose an input method
that suites you.
Entering Characters
Input method
Direct input
method
Indirect input
method
Description
Reference
50-character kana
syllabary keyboard
(Kana Keyboard)
From the keyboard arranged in the order of 50character kana syllabary, you can enter a character by
tapping a target character.
P469
Qwerty keyboard
From the keyboard arranged in alphabetical order, you
can enter a character by tapping a target character.
P471
Handwriting
A character is entered by writing a character on the
free draw input area, using the Stylus.
P478
Multi Tap
From the keyboard with two or more characters
assigned to one key, a character is entered by tapping
a key multiple times to switch the characters.
P496
From the keyboard with two or more characters
assigned to one key, a character is entered by Two
Tap operations
P500
Two Tap
442
00M1000EN.book
443 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Switching Input Method
Default setting
Kana keyboard
The input method used at the time of entering a character can be changed.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap "Handset" tab y
Text input and on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on
Text input setup screen, and tap Input method on Preferences
screen
• Tap $$ $$ at the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap $$ of input method you are setting y [Close] y [Done]
Input method is changed.
Input Mode
There are following input modes to enter a character. Entering text with a mixture of hiragana,
kanji, katakana, alphabet and numeric characters are performed by switching the input mode.
To switch the input mode, tap the keyboard for each input method, or tap the key to switch the
input mode in the free draw input screen.
Input mode
Key display
Description
[Hiragana]/[Kanji]/[Hira]/"あ / ア "
Hiragana, kanji, and double-byte
katakana can be entered.
Katakana
[Kata]/[Single-byte Kana]
Double-byte/single-byte katakana
can be entered.
Alphabet
[Ａｂｃ]/[Abc]/[Eng]/" 英数 "
Double-byte/single-byte alphabet
character can be entered.
Numeric
[Num]/[Eng]/[Ａｂｃ]/[Abc]/" 英数 "
Double-byte/single-byte numeric
character can be entered.
Symbol
[Mark]
Double-byte/single-byte symbols,
special characters or fixed phrases
can be selected.
Entering Characters
Hiragana/kanji
443
00M1000EN.book
444 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
• To switch the input mode, tap the corresponding key in the character input screen for each input method.
• When the character input screen is displayed, there are input modes that cannot be switched, depending on
the application running or what is to be entered.
Direct Input Method
Entering Characters with Direct Input
With FOMA handset, there are three direct input methods: "50-character kana syllabary
keyboard", "Qwerty keyboard" and "free draw input". By setting the input method in advance,
each input screen can be displayed at the time of a character input. 3 P492
50-character Kana Syllabary Keyboard
When the input method is set to Kana keyboard following keyboards will be displayed by tapping
$$ on the Status bar in the situation of entering characters.
Entering Characters
444
Hiragana/kanji input mode
Katakana input mode
Alphabet/numeric input mode
Numeric input mode
Item
Description
a Input method switch key
A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched.
b Number of characters
The number of confirmed characters/maximum number available for
character input are displayed.
c Move key
The keyboard is moved to the upper part/lower part of the touch screen.
d Dictionary key
A dictionary search is performed.
00M1000EN.book
445 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Item
Description
e Input field switch key
When two or more input field (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one
screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be
changed while the free draw input screen is displayed.
f Minimize key
Temporarily hides the keyboard.
g End key
Closes the free draw input screen.
h Convert key
Converts input characters.
i LF/CR key
Starts a new line.
j Space key
A space is entered.
k Clear key
Deletes a character entered.
l Double-byte key
Double-byte characters and numbers can be entered.
m caps/ ↑ key
Capital letters and small letters are switched.
n Date key
Current date can be entered.
o Time key
Current time can be entered.
• To switch the input mode, tap either [Hira]/[Alphabet]/[Kana]/[Numeric] key from each input mode keyboard.
• Tap [Symbol] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
• List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
• List of fixed phrases 3 P522
Kana keyboard
Entering Characters Using Kana Keyboard
With a kana keyboard, characters that can be entered are displayed on the keyboard. Tap a
target character directly to input, and if necessary, switch the input mode by tapping the input
mode key.

Tap Name filed in a contact y tap $$ on the Status bar
• How to operate 3 P99
• When an input mode is other than hiragana/kanji mode, tap [Hira].
Tap [ た ] y [ ろ ] y [ う ]
Conversion candidates
Entering Characters
From the conversion candidates, tap [ 太郎 ]
Input of " 太郎 " is set.
• When there are more than one candidate, display them by dragging the scroll bar.
445
00M1000EN.book
446 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to
follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
• Tap END key to end the entry.
• To continue entering characters, tap a key you are entering.
NOTE
• Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
• The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
Qwerty Keyboard
When the input method is set to "Qwerty keyboard", following keyboards will be displayed by
tapping $$ on the Status bar in the situation of entering characters.
Hiragana/kanji input mode
Entering Characters
446
Alphabet/numeric input mode
Numeric input mode
Item
Description
a Input method switch key
A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched.
b Number of characters
The number of confirmed characters/maximum number available for
character input are displayed.
c Move key
The keyboard is moved to the upper part/lower part of the touch screen.
d Dictionary key
A dictionary search is performed.
00M1000EN.book
447 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Item
Description
e Input filed switch key
When two or more input fields (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one
screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be
changed while the free draw input screen is displayed.
f Minimize key
Temporarily hides the keyboard.
g End key
Closes the free draw input screen.
h Convert key
Converts input characters.
i LF/CR key
Starts a new line.
j Space key
A space is entered.
k Clear key
Deletes a character entered.
l Double-byte key
Double-byte characters and numbers can be entered.
m caps/ ↑ key
Capital letters and small letters are switched.
n Date key
Current date can be entered. Tapping [caps]/[ ↑ ] will switch to Date key, and
current date can be entered.
• To switch the input mode, tap either [Kanji]/[Alphabet]/[Numeric] key from each input mode keyboard.
• Tap [Symbol] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
• List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
• List of fixed phrases 3 P522
Qwerty keyboard
Entering Characters Using Qwerty Keyboard
With a Qwerty keyboard, characters that can be entered are displayed on the keyboard. Tap
directly on a target character to input, and if necessary, switch the input mode by tapping the
input mode key. However, even if the input mode is switched to kanji, hiragana would not show on
the keyboard. When entering hiragana/kanji from the Qwerty keyboard, use the Roman character
entry method.
• The input method must be set to "Qwerty keyboard" beforehand. 3 P492

Tap Name field in a contact y tap $$ on the Status bar
Enter " たろう "
Roman character entry is used.
• To enter " た ": tap [t] 3 [a]
• To enter " ろ ": tap [r] 3 [o]
• To enter " う ": tap [u]
Entering Characters
• How to operate 3 P99
• When an input mode is other than hiragana/kanji mode, tap [Kanji].
Conversion candidates
From the conversion candidates, tap [ 太郎 ]
447
00M1000EN.book
448 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Input of " 太郎 " is set.
• When there are more than one candidate, display them by dragging the scroll bar.
• When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to
follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
• Tap END key to end the entry.
• To continue entering characters, tap a key you are entering.
NOTE
• Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
• The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
• List of Roman character entries 3 P523
Entering a Fixed Phrase
Fixed phrases can be entered by selecting from 5 categories.
• This can be used from all input methods.
While entering characters, tap [Mark]
Category names of fixed phrases
Entering Characters
Tap a category of a phrase you are entering
• Selections can be made from the categories of "General",
"Reply", "Business", "Private" and "English".
• Tap [Back] to go back to the screen for switching between
symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Tap a fixed phrase to enter
The phrase is entered.
• Tap $$ $$ to scroll up and down the list of fixed phrases.
448
00M1000EN.book
449 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
• List of fixed phrases3 P522
Entering a Symbol
Double-byte/single-byte symbols and special characters can be selected for entries.
• This can be used from all input methods.
While entering characters, tap [Mark]
Types of symbols
Tap the type of symbols
• A type of symbol can be selected from "Ｍａｒｋ", "Mark" and
Particular".
• Tap [All] to select from all double-byte/single-byte symbols,
special characters and kanji characters.
• Tap [Back] to go back to the screen for switching between
symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Tap a symbol to enter
NOTE
• List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
Entering Characters
A symbol is entered.
• Tap $$ $$ to scroll up and down the list of symbols.
Entering a Face Mark
A "Face mark" which expresses a face by using symbols and alphabet characters can be
entered.
• This can be used from all input methods.
While entering characters, enter " かお "
Face marks are displayed as for conversion candidates.
449
00M1000EN.book
450 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• The following face marks are displayed as for conversion candidates.
(-_-)
(-.-)
(+_+)
(*_*)
(-_-;)
(..)
(._.)
(._.)_
(;_;)
(>_<)
(@_@)
(T_T)
(^.^)
(^O_O^)
(^O^)
(^^)
(^^ゞ
(^_-)
(^_^)
(^_^;)
(^o^)
(^Ο^)
(＿ )
(~_~)
(~_~;)
(~o~)
)^O^(
>^_^<
^/^
^^;
^_^;
_(._.)_
m(＿ )m
Tap a face mark to enter
A face mark is entered.
Simple Entry of an Email Address
Strings of fixed form used for email or internet address, such as a domain name (that follows
after @) of an email address, can be entered.
• This can be used from all input methods.
While entering characters, tap [Mark]
Tap [Web] from the screen for switching between symbols, fixed
phrases and dictionary
• Tap [Back] to go back to the screen for switching between
symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Entering Characters
Tap a string to enter
The string is entered.
• Tap $$ $$ to scroll up and down the list of symbols.
NOTE
• List of fixed phrases3 P522
450
00M1000EN.book
451 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Entering Characters from Dictionary
A lemmatized search can be performed from a dictionary by selecting a string from the entered
text. It is convenient to check the meaning, a declensional kana ending, etc. of the selected
string. Furthermore, the searched contents can also be copied.
• This can be used from all input methods.
Dictionary Search while Entering Characters with Direct Input Method
After setting the character input method to "Kana keyboard", "Qwerty keyboard" or "handwriting",
a dictionary search is performed while entering characters.
Drag a string for a dictionary search from the entering text
The cursor hits the specified area.
Tap $$
Decided character display area
Direction word display area
Search result display area
Dictionary search key
Dictionary search screen
Tap a dictionary search key of a dictionary you are using
A search begins, and related direction words are displayed in direction word display area.
• A dictionary can be selected from "national language", "Japanese-English" or "EnglishJapanese".
Tap a target direction word from the direction word display area
Dictionary Search while Entering Characters with Indirect Input Method
Entering Characters
The explanation of the selected direction word is displayed in the search result display area.
• Tap [Copy] to copy the contents displayed in the search result display area. Drag a string
in the search result display area, and tap [Copy] to copy the specified string. Tap [Paste]
to paste the copied content in the decided character display area.
• Tap [Back] to end the dictionary search.
After setting the character input method to "Multi Tap" or "Two Tap", a dictionary search is
performed while entering characters.
Drag a string for a dictionary search from the entering text
The cursor hits the specified area.
451
00M1000EN.book
452 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [Mark]
The screen for switching between
symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary
Tap [Dictionary] y perform a dictionary search
Subsequent operations are the same as dictionary search for a direct input method.
• How to operate3 P475
Deleting Characters
Entered characters can be deleted one at a time or several at once. Also, a range for deletion can
be specified.
1When deleting one character a time
In the display area, tap the right side of a character you want to delete to bring the
cursor there, and tap [Clear]
Entering Characters
452
1When deleting all characters entered
• Tap the right side of the last character to bring the cursor there, and point [Clear]
for more than one second
00M1000EN.book
453 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Drag on entered characters, and tap [Clear]
1When deleting all characters beyond specified location
Tap the left side of the first character of the string you want to delete to bring the
cursor there, and point [Clear] for more than one second
1When deleting by specifying the area
Drag on the string you are deleting, and tap [Clear]
With handwriting, a character is entered in the free draw input screen by directly writing on the
touch screen with the Stylus.
Entering Characters
Entering Characters with Handwriting
• It is necessary to set the input method to "Handwriting" beforehand. 3 P492
453
00M1000EN.book
454 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Handwriting Input Screen
When the input method is set to "free draw input", following input screen will display by tapping
$$ on the Status bar in the situation of entering characters.
Item
Description
a Input method switch key
A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched.
b Number of characters
The number of confirmed characters/maximum number available for
character input are displayed.
c Move key
The free draw input screen is moved to the upper part/lower part of the touch
screen.
d Dictionary key
A dictionary search is performed.
e Input field switch key
When two or more input fields (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one
screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be
changed with having the free draw input screen displayed.
f Minimize key
Temporarily hides the keyboard.
g End key
Closes the free draw input screen.
h Recognition mode tab
Switches the mode which recognizes the type of character entered with free
draw.
i Help key
Displays the help for free draw input.
j Maximize/standard key
The size of free draw input area can be switched between enlarged size and
standard size.
Entering Characters
k Input area
A character is entered with free draw.
l Input area switch key
A continuation of the input area current entering is displayed.
m Symbol key
A screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary is
displayed.
n Convert key
Converts input characters.
o New-line key
A new line is started.
p Space key
A space is entered.
q Clear key
Deletes a character entered.
• Tap [Mark] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
• List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
• List of fixed phrases 3 P522
Entering Characters
The input method for entering characters with handwriting input is explained.
454
00M1000EN.book
455 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分

Tap Name field in a contact y tap $$ on the Status bar
• How to operate 3 P99
Write " たろう "in the input area
Conversion candidates
From the conversion candidates, tap [ 太郎 ]
Input of " 太郎 " is set.
• When there are more than one candidate, display them by dragging the scroll bar.
• When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to
follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
• Tap END key to end the entry.
• To continue entering characters, write a character in the input area.
1When changing the character which has not been recognized correctly
When a character is entered in the input area, the bottom right of the input area displays as
following, and by tapping it will display the candidates for the entered character.
• In the input area and for the candidates, the recognized characters are classified and displayed in the
following colors. When the character type currently displayed is unclear, it can also be judged by its color.
• Hiragana: Pink
• Kanji: Yellow
• Katakana: Purple
• Alphabet: Green
• Number: Light-blue
• Symbol: Orange
Entering Characters
If a target character exists in the candidates, tap the character for a conversion.
If a target character does not exist in the candidates, tap $$ and rewrite the character.
455
00M1000EN.book
456 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
• Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
• When a character entered in standard mode could not be recognized correctly, or is hard to recognize, we
recommend you to change the mode that corresponds to the character entered (kana mode or alphanumeric
mode).
• A character would be more easily recognized by writing it large within the frame.
• The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
Save Phrases
Editing/Registering Fixed Phrases
By registering frequently used greetings and phrases, they can be entered quickly by just
selecting a fixed phrase.
• When Master Clear is performed, the registered fixed phrases are all deleted, and it will return to the default
state.
Registering a New Fixed Phrase
A fixed phrase is registered.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector Bar, tap "Handset" tab y
Text input on the Control Panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Edit Template on Preferences screen
Category: Switches the category of fixed phrases.
Entering Characters
Fixed phrase edit screen
Tap the Category and select a category where you are registering
• Selections can be made from the categories of "General", "Reply", "Business", "Private"
"English" and "Internet".
• Maximum of 20 fixed phrases can be registered for each category.
456
00M1000EN.book
457 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [Add]
Sentence : Entered the phrase to be registered.
Enter a phrase y Tap [Settings]
The phrase is registered.
• Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be
entered is 32.
Editing the Default Fixed Phrases
A registered fixed phrase is edited.
Display the fixed phrase edit screen
• How to operate 3 P480
Tap the Category and select a category of the fixed phrase you are
making a change
• Selections can be made from the categories of "General", "Reply", "Business", "Private"
"English" and "Internet".
Tap the fixed phrase you are editing y tap [Change]
Edit the phrase y tap [Settings]
Deleting a Fixed Phrase
Registered fixed phrases can be deleted one at a time.
Entering Characters
The fixed phrase is edited.
• Up to 32 double-byte/single-byte characters can be entered is 32.
• Tap [Cancel] to stop editing the fixed phrase.
Display the fixed phrase edit screen
• How to operate 3 P480
Tap the Category and select a category of the fixed phrase you are
deleting
• Selections can be made from the categories of "General", "Reply", "Business", "Private"
"English" and "Internet".
457
00M1000EN.book
458 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap the fixed phrase you are deleting y tap [Delete]
Tap [Yes]
The fixed phrase will be deleted.
• Tap [No] to cancel the deletion.
Character copy
Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters
Characters and numbers such as from notes or messages can be copied or cut, and pasted on
another character input screen.
Copying/Cutting Characters
Specify the range of text to copy/cut in Notes etc., display the screen to paste and paste.
When a copy is performed, the original copied content remains and the same content is pasted
to the pasted location. Moreover, when a cut is performed, the original copied content is lost, and
the copied content is pasted to the pasted location.
Display the screen to perform Copy/Cut
Edit screen of Notes
Drag and specify the range of string to copy/cut
Entering Characters
The specified area will be highlighted.
Tap Edit on the Menu bar y tap Copy/Cut
Selected range will be copied/cut.
• Tap Copy to copy the selected range.
• Tap Cut to cut the selected range.
458
00M1000EN.book
459 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
• Depending on application, it is not necessary to specify the range to perform a copy/cut. For examples,
calculation result of a calculator and a phone number entered in the phone number entry screen are copied
as the way they are.
• Depending on application, the item names for Copy/Paste displayed on a menu bar may differ, or they may
be displayed at different place than the menu bar.
1Copy/Cut and Paste operations
For screens displayed such as when entering a keyword for a search, a menu can be
displayed from other than a menu bar to perform Copy/Cut and Paste.
Tap $$ beside the title to display the menu.
Search screen for Notes
Pasting a Character
A content copied/cut is pasted.
Display a screen to paste a copied/cut content
Tap on the place to specify the position to paste
Tap $$ beside the title to display the menu.
Entering Characters
The cursor moves to the location where the paste is performed.
Tap Edit on the Menu bar y tap Paste
A content copied/cut is pasted.
459
00M1000EN.book
460 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
• Depending on application, it is not necessary to specify the range to perform a copy/cut. For examples,
calculation result of a calculator and a phone number entered in the phone number entry screen are copied
as the way they are.
• Depending on application, the item names for Paste displayed on a Menu bar may differ, or they may be
displayed at different place than the Menu bar.
Save word
Registering Frequently Used Words
By registering frequently used names and words in the user dictionary, they can be displayed as
conversion candidates at a character conversion, and can be entered quickly.
• When Master Clear is performed, the registered words are all deleted.
Registering a New Word
A word is registered in the user dictionary.
• Up to 100 words can be registered.
Entering Characters
Word edit screen
Tap [Add]
Reading
Word
460
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control Panel screen, and tap [Advanced] on
Text input setup screen
: A reading of the word to register is entered.
: A word to register is entered.
Tap Reading y Enter a reading
00M1000EN.book
461 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be
entered for the combination of Reading and Word is 11.
Tap Word y Enter a word
• Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be
entered for the combination of Reading and Word is 11.
Sap [Settings]
The word is registered.
• Tap [Cancel] to stop registering.
Editing a Registered Word
A word registered in the user dictionary is edited.
Display the word edit screen
• How to operate 3 P484
Tap the word you are editing y tap [Change]
Tap the field you want to edit y edit the Reading/Word
• Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be
entered for the combination of Reading and Word is 11.
Tap [Settings]
The word is edited.
Deleting a Registered Word
A word registered in the user dictionary is deleted one at a time.
Display a word edit screen
• How to operate 3 P484
Tap the word you are deleting y tap [Delete]
Tap [Yes]
The word is deleted.
• Tap [No] to cancel the deletion.
Entering Characters
461
00M1000EN.book
462 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Using Electronic Dictionary
Settings and registration for the dictionary installed in FOMA handset are performed.
Setting to Perform a Dictionary Search Automatically at a Conversion
You can set it so that when a character entered is converted, conversion candidates are
searched from the dictionary and displayed. Also, the type of dictionary used for the search can
be set.
Tap $$ y $$ at the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text
input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input
setup screen, and tap Dictionary search at conversion on
Preferences screen
Use dictionary search
: Sets so that a dictionary search is performed when a
character is converted.
National language dictionary
: National language dictionary is added to the dictionary
used for the search.
Japanese-English dictionary
: Japanese-English dictionary is added to the dictionary
used for the search.
• Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap $$ at the field of Use dictionary search
Tap $$ of the dictionary used for the search
Entering Characters
It is set so that a dictionary search is performed at conversion, and the dictionary used for
the search is selected.
Adding a Dictionary
Dictionaries installed to FOMA handset from the attached CD-ROM can be added as the
dictionaries used at a character conversion. Also, setting the priority for a dictionary search and
deleting added dictionaries can be performed.
• Up to 64 dictionaries can be registered.
462
00M1000EN.book
463 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Additional Dictionary tab on
Preferences screen
Dictionaries installed are displayed.
Tap in the order from $$ of the dictionary to add y [Add]
• Unless $$ of the dictionary is tapped, the installed dictionary
cannot be used.
Tap [Settings]
The dictionary is added.
Setting the Priority of Dictionary Search
If there are two or more dictionaries added, the priority for dictionary search can be set up.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Additional Dictionary tab on
Preferences screen
Entering Characters
463
00M1000EN.book
464 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [Priority]
Tap the dictionary moving the priority y tap [ ▲ ]/[ ▼ ]
Tap [Set]
The priority is set.
Deleting an Added Dictionary
A dictionary added for search at conversion is set not to be used.
• A dictionary installed will not be erased.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Additional Dictionary tab from
Preferences screen
Tap [Delete] y [Yes]
The dictionary is set not to be used.
Setting the Saving Method of User Dictionary and Learning Dictionary
Entering Characters
464
User dictionary and learning dictionary stored in FOMA handset can be set so that they are
automatically backed up in Trans Flash memory card.
00M1000EN.book
465 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Save Dictionary tab on Preferences
screen
Save automatically
: Sets whether or not to save the dictionary
automatically.
Saving cycle
Once a day : Saves when the first character input screen
displayed in a day is closed.
When closing keyboard
: Saves when the character input screen is
closed.
• Tap $$ $$ at the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap $$ at the field of Save automatically
Tap $$ of Once a day/When closing keyboard at field of Saving cycle
Returning the Learning Dictionary to the Default State
Learned information stored in the user dictionary can be reset to default state.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Learning tab on Preferences screen
• Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap [Clear learning information] y [Yes]
Entering Characters
The learned information will be deleted.
• Tap [No] to cancel the deletion of the learning information.
465
00M1000EN.book
466 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1Learning Information
A converted content of a character input by the user is stored in the user dictionary in FOMA
handset, and when the same character is entered and converted again, it will be displayed as
one of the conversion candidates.
Setting the Detail of Character Entry
The settings related to character input, such as the usage of predict conversion function and the
input mode when the character entry screen is activated are set.
Setting the Input System
Default setting
AWnn Japanese keyboard
The input system of FOMA handset can be changed to other input systems.
• Other input systems are not installed in the FOMA handset by default. This operation can be performed only
when other input system is installed.
Entering Characters
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Handset tab
y Text input on the Control panel screen
Tap Primary input method y select an input system
An input system is set.
• Tap [Default] to reset the input system back to the default state.
Setting Alternative Input Method
Default setting
The alternative input method for the FOMA handset can be changed.
• No other alternative input system is installed in the FOMA handset by default. This operation can be
performed only when another input system is installed.
466
None
00M1000EN.book
467 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, and tap Alternative on the
text input setup screen
Tap Alternative input method y select an alternative input system
An alternative input system is selected.
• Tap [Default] to reset the changed alternative input method back to the default state.
Using Predict Conversion Function
Default setting
Use predict conversion: $$
Whether to use the predict conversion function or not at the conversion of a character can be set.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Predict conversion tab on Preferences
screen
• Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap $$ at Use Predict conversion
Entering Characters
The Predict conversion function is set.
Setting the Input Mode at the Time of Activation
The input mode displayed when the text input screen is displayed can be set up beforehand.
467
00M1000EN.book
468 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] from
Text input setup screen, and tap Input mode at activation tab from
Preferences screen
Hiragana input : Sets hiragana as the input mode to be always
displayed.
Single-byte alphabet input
: Sets single-byte alphabet as the input mode to
be always displayed.
System setup : Sets so that the input mode corresponding to
the contents of an input may be displayed
automatically.
• Tap $$ $$ at the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap $$ of the input mode you are using at At activation
The input mode at activation is set.
Setting the Display Format of Date and Time
The display format of a date and time inputted by tapping a specific key can be set for each input
mode beforehand.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Date and time tab on Preferences
screen
Entering Characters
Hiragana input : Sets the display format of a date and time at
hiragana input mode.
Single-byte kana input
: Sets the display format of a date and time at
single-byte kana input mode.
Double-byte alphabet input
: Sets the display format of a date and time at
double-byte alphabet input mode.
Single-byte alphabet input
: Sets the display format of a date and time at
single-byte alphabet input mode.
• Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
468
00M1000EN.book
469 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ of the input mode you are setting y [Change]
Date : Selects the display format for Date.
Time : Selects the display format for Time.
Tap the field to set, and select a display format
Tap [Set]
The display formats of date and time for the selected input mode are set up.
NOTE
• Input method of Date and Time 3 P468, P470, P496, P500
Setting Details for Handwriting
The recognition speed of a free draw input, the width of the pen, and the color of the pen can be
set up. Also, My symbol that inputs a character string by just entering a simple sign can be set.
Registering My Symbol
A setting can be made for registering strings to be converted just by entering a Symbol, such as a
simple sign or mark.
• Up to 30 symbols can be registered.
• Tap $$ to display the help for handwriting.
Symbol field
Entering Characters
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Handwriting tab y [Handwriting
settings] on Preferences screen
Registration text field
Write a symbol at the symbol field
Drag and draw a symbol to register within the frame.
469
00M1000EN.book
470 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Tap [Clear] below the symbol field to delete and rewrite the symbol
Tap a registration text column y enter a text
• Tap [Clear] below the registration text field to delete a text.
Setting the Recognition Speed of Free Draw and Width/Color of Characters
The recognition speed of free draw can be set. Also thickness and color of characters entered
with free draw can be set.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, tap Handwriting tab y [Handwriting settings]
from Preferences screen, and tap Others tab on Decuma Settings
screen
Recognition timeout
: Selects the drag speed that can be recognized.
Pen size
: Selects the width of the pen.
Pen color
: Selects the color of the pen.
Tap $$ of the speed you are setting at Recognition timeout
• By setting the recognition speed faster, characters entered by free draw with fast drag
operation can be recognized.
Entering Characters
Tap $$ of the width you are setting at size
Tap $$ of the color you are setting at Pen color
Tap [Done]
The recognition timeout, width and size/color of the pen are set.
Indirect input method
Entering Characters with Indirect Input Method
FOMA handset has two indirect input methods "Multi Tap" and "Two Tap". By setting up an input
method beforehand, each input screen (keyboard) can be displayed at the time of a character
input. 3 P492
470
00M1000EN.book
471 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Multi Tap/Two Tap Keyboard
When the input method is set as Multi Tap or Two Tap, following keyboard will display by tapping
$$ on the Status bar when a character is entered. For the procedure for Multi Tap and Two Tap,
please refer to each explanation. 3 P495, P500
Hiragana input mode
Item
Description
a Input method switch key
A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched.
b Name
The name of the character input field is displayed.
c Minimize key
Temporarily hides the keyboard.
d Input field switch key
When two or more input field (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one
screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be
changed with having the keyboard displayed.
e End key
Closes the keyboard.
f Display area
Characters entered/decided are displayed.
g Conversion candidate
area
Conversion candidates for characters entered are displayed.
h Scroll arrow
When conversion candidates cannot all fit in the display, tap the arrow to scroll
up and down to display the rest of the candidates.
i Number of characters
The number of decided characters/maximum available character input is
displayed.
• Tap [Mark] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
• List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
• List of fixed phrases 3 P522
Multi Tap
Entering a Character with Multi Tap
Entering Characters
• In order to switch an input mode, tap [Character] at the keyboard of each input mode, and from the screen
that switches input mode, tap one of the keys from [kanji]/[Kata]/[Ａｂｃ]/[Abc]/[Eng]/[Num].
With Multi Tap, a keyboard with two or more characters assigned to one key is displayed as a
character input screen. In order to enter a character, tap the key where a character is assigned
multiple times until that character is displayed.
• The input method needs to be set as Multi Tap beforehand. 3 P492
471
00M1000EN.book
472 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Keyboard Display and Character Assignments for Each Input Mode
Following are the keyboard display and character assignments for each input mode. Whenever a
key is tapped where the character entering is assigned, the character on the key changes.
1Input mode: hiragana
Keyboard
display
Characters assigned
あ
3 あ 3 い 3 う 3 え 3 お 3ぁ 3ぃ 3ぅ 3ぇ 3ぉ 3
か
3か3き3く3け3こ3
さ
3さ3し3す3せ3そ3
た
3 た 3 ち 3 つ 3 て 3 と 3っ 3
な
3な3に3ぬ3ね3の3
は
3は3ひ3ふ3へ3ほ3
ま
3ま3み3む3め3も3
や
3 や 3 ゆ 3 よ 3ゃ 3ゅ 3ょ 3
ら
3ら3り3る3れ3ろ3
わ
3 わ 3 を 3 ん 3ゎ 3
＊
3 、3 。3 − 3 ？ 3 ！ 3 ＆ 3 " 3 「 3 」3 ・ 3（ 3 ）3
# *1, *2
3 (double-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Convert
Converts a character entered.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
1Input mode: single-byte katakana
Keyboard
display
ｱ
Entering Characters
472
Characters assigned
3ｱ3ｲ3ｳ3ｴ3ｵ3ｧ3ｨ3ｩ3ｪ3ｫ3
ｶ
3ｶ3ｷ3ｸ3ｹ3ｺ3
ｻ
3ｻ3ｼ3ｽ3ｾ3ｿ3
ﾀ
3ﾀ3ﾁ3ﾂ3ﾃ3ﾄ3ｯ3
ﾅ
3ﾅ3ﾆ3ﾇ3ﾈ3ﾉ3
ﾊ
3ﾊ3ﾋ3ﾌ3ﾍ3ﾎ3
ﾏ
3ﾏ3ﾐ3ﾑ3ﾒ3ﾓ3
ﾔ
3ﾔ3ﾕ3ﾖ3ｬ3ｭ3ｮ3
ﾗ
3ﾗ3ﾘ3ﾙ3ﾚ3ﾛ3
ﾜ
3ﾜ3ｦ3ﾝ3
3､3｡3-3?3!3&3"3｢3｣3･3(3)3
#*2
3 ﾞ 3 ﾟ 3 (single-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
00M1000EN.book
473 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1Input mode: single-byte alphabet
Keyboard
display
Characters assigned
2ABC
3a3b3c3A3B3C32 3
3DEF
3d3e3f3D3E3F33 3
4GHI
3g3h3i3G3H3I34 3
5JKL
3j3k3l3J3K3L35 3
6MNO
3m3n3o3M3N3O363
7PQRS
3 P3q3r3s3 P3Q3R3S37 3
8TUV
3t3u3v3T3U3V383
9WXYZ
3w3x3y3z3W3X3Y3Z393
3.3@3_3-3/3?3!3&3'3"3:3;3~3
*2
3 (single-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3 .co.jp 3 .com 3 .net 3 .ne.jp 3 .or.jp 3
http:// 3 www. 3 @docomo.ne.jp 3
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
1Input mode: double-byte alphabet
Keyboard
display
１
Characters assigned
１
２ ＡＢＣ
3ａ3ｂ3ｃ3Ａ3Ｂ3Ｃ3 ２ 3
３ ＤＥＦ
3ｄ3ｅ3ｆ3Ｄ3Ｅ3Ｆ3 ３ 3
４ ＧＨＩ
3ｇ3ｈ3ｉ3Ｇ3Ｈ3Ｉ3 ４ 3
５ ＪＫＬ
3ｊ3ｋ3ｌ3Ｊ3Ｋ3Ｌ3 ５ 3
６ ＭＮＯ
3ｍ3ｎ3ｏ3Ｍ3Ｎ3Ｏ3 ６ 3
７ ＰＱＲＳ
3 P3ｑ3ｒ3ｓ3 P3Ｑ3Ｒ3Ｓ3 ７ 3
3ｔ3ｕ3ｖ3Ｔ3Ｕ3Ｖ3 ８ 3
3ｗ3ｘ3ｚ3Ｗ3Ｘ3Ｙ3Ｚ3 ９ 3
０
０
＊
3 ．3 ＠ 3 ＿ 3 ― 3 / 3 ？ 3 ！ 3 ＆ 3 ' 3 " 3 ： 3 ； 3 ~ 3
# *2
3 (double-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
Entering Characters
８ ＴＵＶ
９ ＷＸＹＺ
1Input mode: single-byte number
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
473
00M1000EN.book
474 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Others
3 (double-byte space) 3 (New-line) 3：3 / 3. 3,
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
*1:
*2:
*3:
Voiced sound and semi-voiced sound can be added (Only the characters that can add them). Each time
you tap, it will switch as: "3 ゛(voiced sound)3 ゜(semi-voiced sound) 3 none 3 ".
Will start a new line by pointing it for more than 1 second,
Date and Time can be entered by set display format. 3 P492
Entering a Character
The method to enter a character with Multi Tap is explained.

Tap in the order by Name in a contact y $$ at the Status bar
• How to operate 3 P99
Enter " たろう "
Entering Characters
• To enter " た " : Tap " た " once
• To enter " ろ " : Tap " ら " five times
• To enter " う " : Tap " あ " three times
From the conversion candidates, tap [ 太郎 ]
Input of " 太郎 " is set.
• When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to
follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
• Tap END key to end the entry.
474
00M1000EN.book
475 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• To continue entering characters, tap a key where the character you are entering is
assigned.
• For a character input, please refer to "Keyboard display and character assignments for
each input mode" 3 P496
NOTE
• Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
• The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
Determining the Characters Entered with Multi Tap Automatically
Default setting
Determine automatically $$:
You can setup for the cursor to move automatically to the next input position and wait for an input
after each character is entered by multi-taps. When entering a character assigned to the same
key continuously, the operation to tap the right side of the entered character to move the cursor
becomes unnecessary.
Tap $$ y $$ at the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text
input from the Control Panel screen, tap [Advanced] from Text
input setup screen, and tap Multi Tap tab from Preferences
screen
Determine automatically
: Sets to automatically determine entered characters.
Determining cycle
: Selects the speed to determine.
Tap $$ at the field of Determine automatically
Tap $$ of the speed to set for Determining cycle
Characters entered by Multi Tap are set to be determined automatically.
Entering Characters
Two Tap
Entering a Character with Two Tap
With Two Tap, a keyboard with two or more characters assigned to one key is displayed as a
character input screen. In order to enter a character, tap the key where a character to input is
assigned, display the selection screen for the assigned character, and tap the character to input.
• The input method needs to be set as Two Tap beforehand.3 P492
475
00M1000EN.book
476 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Keyboard Display and Character Assignments for Each Input Mode
Following are the keyboard display and character assignments for each input mode. Tap a key
where the character entering is assigned, and a selection screen for assigned character is
displayed.
1Input mode: hiragana
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
あ
あいうえおぁぃぅぇぉヴ
か
かきくけこがぎぐげご
さ
さしすせそざじずぜぞ
た
たちつてとだぢづでどっ
な
なにぬねの
は
はひふへほばびぶべぼぱぴぷぺぽ
ま
まみむめも
や
やゆよゃゅょ
ら
らりるれろ
わ
わをんゎ
＊
、。- ？ ＆ " 「 」・ ( )
$$(double-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Convert
Converts a character entered.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
1Input mode: single-byte katakana
Keyboard display
Entering Characters
476
Characters assigned
ｱ
ｱ ｲ ｳ ｴ ｵ ｧ ｨ ｩ ｪ ｫ ｳﾞ
ｶ
ｶ ｷ ｸ ｹ ｺ ｶﾞ ｷﾞ ｸﾞ ｹﾞ ｺﾞ
ｻ
ｻ ｼ ｽ ｾ ｿ ｻﾞ ｼﾞ ｽﾞ ｾﾞ ｿﾞ
ﾀ
ﾀ ﾁ ﾂ ﾃ ﾄ ﾀﾞ ﾁﾞ ﾂﾞ ﾃﾞ ﾄﾞ ｯ
ﾅ
ﾅﾆﾇﾈﾉ
ﾊ
ﾊ ﾋ ﾌ ﾍ ﾎ ﾊﾞ ﾋﾞ ﾌﾞ ﾍﾞ ﾎﾞ ﾊﾟ ﾋﾟ ﾌﾟ ﾍﾟ ﾎﾟ
ﾏ
ﾏﾐﾑﾒﾓ
ﾔ
ﾔﾕﾖｬｭｮ
ﾗ
ﾗﾘﾙﾚﾛ
ﾜ
ﾜｦﾝ
､｡-?!&"｢｣･()
$$(single-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
00M1000EN.book
477 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1Input mode: single-byte alphabet
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
2ABC
ABC2abc
3DEF
DEF3def
4GHI
GHI4ghi
5JKL
JKL5jkl
6MNO
MNO6mno
7PQRS
PQRS7pqrs
8TUV
TUV8tuv
9WXYZ
WXYZ9wxyz
. , ? ! - & ' " : ; @ ~ /
$$(single-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time .co.jp
.com .net .ne.jp .or.jp http:// www. @docomo.ne.jp
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
1Input mode: double-byte alphabet
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
１
１
２ ＡＢＣ
ＡＢＣ２ａｂｃ
３ ＤＥＦ
ＤＥＦ３ｄｅｆ
４ ＧＨＩ
ＧＨＩ４ｇｈｉ
５ ＪＫＬ
ＪＫＬ５ｊｋｌ
６ ＭＮＯ
ＭＮＯ６ｍｎｏ
７ ＰＱＲＳ
ＰＱＲＳ７ｐｑｒｓ
ＴＵＶ８ｔｕｖ
９ ＷＸＹＺ
ＷＸＹＺ９ｗｘｙｚ
０
０
＊
．，？ ！ ― ＆ ' " ： ； ＠ ∼ ／
$$(double-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
Entering Characters
８ ＴＵＶ
1Input mode: single-byte number
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
477
00M1000EN.book
478 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Keyboard display
Entering Characters
478
午前７時５６分
Characters assigned
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Others
$$(single-byte space) $$(New-line) : / . ,
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
00M1000EN.book
479 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Entering a Character
The method to enter a character with Two Tap is explained.

Tap the Name field in a contact y $$ at the Status bar
• How to operate 3 P99
Tap [ た ]
A selection screen with the characters assigned to [ た ] key is
displayed.
Tap [ た ]
" た " is entered. Enter " ろう " the same way.
• To enter " ろ ": Tap in the order by [ ら ] 3 [ ろ ]
• To enter " う ": Tap in the order by [ あ ] 3[ う ]
From the conversion candidates, tap [ 太郎 ]
Input of " 太郎 " is set.
• When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to
follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
• Tap END key to end the entry.
• To continue entering characters, tap a key where the character you are entering is
assigned.
• For a character input, please refer to "Keyboard display and character assignments for
each input mode" 3 P500
• Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
• The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
Entering Characters
NOTE
479
00M1000EN.book
480 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
00M1000EN.book
481 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Overseas Use
1International Roaming
"WORLD WING" International Roaming Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Services Available Outside Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Before Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
1Making/Answering Calls from Overseas
Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
1Settings for Overseas Use
Switching Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Setting Operations in Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
481
00M1000EN.book
482 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
"WORLD WING" International Roaming Service
International roaming is a service that makes telephone and other types of communications
available from overseas, which is outside of the FOMA network service area, by using affiliated
operators' networks.
The international roaming service allows subscribers to use their FOMA handsets to make
telephone communication including voice and video calls*2, and email, Short Message Service
(SMS) and packet communication in about 220*1 countries and regions around the world.
*1:
*2:
As of XX 2004
As of XX 2004, videophone communication is available when you and the other parties are using
DoCoMo (Japan), Hutchison 3G UK (United kingdom.) or Hutchison 3G HK (Hong Kong). For details,
visit the DoCoMo website.
• Use of the international roaming service requires a subscription to "WORLD WING," the international roaming
service provided by DoCoMo. In addition, a UIM (green) made available for WORLD WING must be attached
to the FOMA handset.
• A UIM (blue) must be switched with a UIM (green).
• When you purchase a subscription to WORLD WING at a DoCoMo information desk, the card will be
exchanged free of charge.
• Communication services and functions available depend on the network operator connected to. 3 P507
• The communication system in Overseas networks to be applied are W-CDMA or GSM/GPRS.
W-CDMA
3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project)* is a global standard. A 3G
mobile communication system is compliant to 3GPP.
*: A regional standardization organization founded for the
development of common technology specification relating to the
3G mobile communication system (IMT-2000).
GSM (Global System for Mobile
Communications)
The 2nd generation mobile communication system in digital mode is
most widely used around the world, especially in Europe and Asia.
GPRS (General Packet Radio
Service)
The 2.5 generation mobile communication system is the communication
method that enables high-speed packet communication through the
GPRS* by utilizing GSM
*: Packet communication with transmission speed of up to 115 kbps
is available.
• By default, network switching for overseas use automatically takes place. 3 P515
Overseas Use
482
00M1000EN.book
483 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Services Available Outside Japan
Services Available
The following services are available outside Japan:
Service
Description
Voice call
The phone number used in Japan can also be used for making and
answering domestic calls in the country of stay and making international
calls to Japan or other countries.
Video call
International videophone communication is available with subscribers of
specific overseas 3G mobile operators or FOMA handset users in Japan.
Email
The email address used in Japan can also be used for email exchange
from overseas.
Short Message Service (SMS)
The recipients' FOMA handset phone numbers can be used to exchange
Short Message Service (SMS) messages between FOMA handset users
from overseas.
Packet communication
Packet communication is available from overseas by connecting to PCs,
etc.
*:
Services that may be available depending on the network operator or network used.
Communication Systems and Services Available
Services and functions available differ between networks in Japan and overseas.
Different communication systems and services available are as described below:
Service
Voice call
Video call
Internet
Email
Packet
Short
communication Message
Service
(SMS)
○
○
○
○
○
○
GSM
○
×
×
×
×
○
○
×
○
○
○
○
GPRS
Overseas Use
Communication
system
W-CDMA
483
00M1000EN.book
484 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Before Use
Make sure of the following before leaving Japan, in the country of stay and after coming back to
Japan.
Before Leaving Japan
To use your FOMA handset outside Japan, make sure of the following before leaving Japan.
1Subscription
A subscription to WORLD WING is required.
• WORLD WING is an optional service that requires a separate subscription. No monthly charges apply.
• A UIM (green) made available for WORLD WING must be attached to the FOMA handset for overseas use.
1Battery charging
Check the power supply voltage available in the country or region of stay and use the FOMA
international AC adapter 01 (separately provided).
• The AC adapter that comes with the handset is for domestic use only (100 VAC). An AC adapter suited to
the voltage available in the place of stay is required.
• Notes on use of AC adapter 3 P24
• Charging the battery 3 P54
1Network services
Network services may not be set/checked depending on the overseas network operator used.
Some network services can be set/checked only in Japan. Whether network service
operations can be performed or not is as described below:
Name of service
Setting operation
Voicemail Service
Can be set.*
Call Waiting Service
Can be set.
Call Forwarding Service
Can be set.*
Nuisance Call Blocking Service
Can be set.*
Dual Network Service
Cannot be set.
Caller ID Display Request Service
Caller IDs may not be sent correctly.*
Overseas Use
English Announcement
Can be set.*
Caller ID Notification
Can be set.*
Drive Mode
Can be set but no voice guidance available.
English Announcement
Can be set.*
Roaming (roaming guidance)
Can be set.*
Roaming (incoming call barring when roaming)
Can be set.
*:
May not be set in some service areas.
• For details, see "Network Service Operation Guide".
• To perform voicemail or call forwarding operation from overseas, remote operation must be enabled in
Japan in advance. 3 P516
• Services that can be set may not be available depending on the network operator used or the region.
484
00M1000EN.book
485 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Viewing Information from Place of Stay
1Display view
An available network is automatically found and set, and available services such as voice or
video call can be checked with icons that indicate the status of the network.
Display
Description
$$ (Orange)
Voice data can be exchanged through roaming.
$$ (Orange)
Voice data and still images can be exchanged through
roaming.
$$ (Orange)
Voice data and images can be exchanged through
roaming.
NOTE
• The indications are in green when the handset is in FOMA network service area.
• The indications are in gray when the handset is outside of the area covered by the network.
• The network can be manually selected for use. 3 P515
1Inquiries
For inquiries about lost or stolen handsets, settlement of total charges or failure of handsets
outside Japan, contact DoCoMo at the numbers shown in "For Inquires about Lost or Stolen
Handsets or Settlement of Total Charges" or "About Failure" on the back cover of the manual.
• The contact numbers must be prefixed with the code as shown in "International Phone Code for Universal
Number (Table 1)" or "International Access Code (Table 2)" assigned to the place of stay. 3 P510
The codes to prefix the contact numbers are as shown in the tables below: "International
Phone Code for Universal Number (Table 1)" and "International Access Code (Table 2)."
International Phone Code for Universal Number (Table 1)
Area
00
Area
Luxemburg
International
phone code
00
Australia
0011
Malaysia
00
Austria
00
New Zealand
00
Belgium
00
Norway
00
Brazil
0021
Philippines
00
Canada
011
Singapore
001
China
00
South Korea
001
Columbia
009
Spain
00
Denmark
00
Sweden
00
France
00
Switzerland
00
Germany
00
Hong Kong
001
Taiwan
00
Thailand
001
Overseas Use
Argentina
International
phone code
485
00M1000EN.book
486 ページ
Area
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
International
phone code
Ireland
00
Israel
014
Italy
00
Area
International
phone code
U.K.
00
U.S.A.
011
Major International Access Codes (Table 2)
Area
International
phone code
Area
International
phone code
Australia
0011
Monaco
00
Belgium
00
Netherlands
00
Brazil
00
New Zealand
00
Canada
011
China
00
Norway
00
Philippines
00
Czech
00
Poland
00
Denmark
00
Portugal
00
Finland
00/990
Russia
810
France
00
Singapore
001
Germany
00
South Korea
001
Greece
00
Spain
00
Hong Kong
001
Sweden
00
Hungary
00
Switzerland
00
Taiwan
002
Thailand
001
India
00
Indonesia
001
Ireland
00
Italy
00
Turkey
00
U.A.E.
00
Luxemburg
00
U.K.
00
Macao
00
U.S.A.
011
Malaysia
00
Vietnam
00
After Coming Back to Japan
Overseas Use
486
After you come back to Japan, your handset will automatically select to use the FOMA network. If
your handset is set to use manual network selection, you must manually reset the handset to use
the FOMA network.
• The network can be manually selected for use. 3 P515
NOTE
• For overseas use, refer to "International Service Roaming Guide (XXX)" and "Network Service Operation
Guide" together with this manual.
• The Quick Reference Manual useful for referring to operations is provided on P000, which provides a
convenient reference for overseas use of your FOMA handset.
• Charges for overseas use will be added to the bill for monthly services. Be informed that the billing may be
delayed about one month for reasons of overseas network operators.
00M1000EN.book
487 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• If you have any problem about overseas use of your FOMA handset, see "Troubleshooting (for Overseas
Use)". 3 P53
Making Calls
Phone calls from overseas to Japan or to other countries are international calls to Japan, etc. To
make a call, prefix the phone number with "+" and the country code of the destination and enter
the other party's phone number. When entering the phone number, remove "0" at the beginning
of the area code.
Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar
The following operations can be performed:
[0]~[9], [*], [#] : Use these keys to enter the phone number.
[$$]
: Deletes a digit in the phone number from the
right. Pointing for 1+ seconds deletes all of the
phone number entered.
Enter the other party's phone number
The FOMA handset vibrates every time a key on the Enter phone number screen is tapped.
• Point to [0] for 1+ seconds to enter "+".
• Pause ("P"), Wait ("W"), "#" and "*" can be entered. 3 P73
1To call landline phones
+ Country code - Area code with 0 removed - City code - Number
• If the other party is a landline phone in Italy, "0" is required.
1To call mobile phones
+ Country code - 90 - XXXX - XXXX
+ Country code - 80 - XXXX - XXXX
1To call PHS phones
+ Country code - 70 - XXXX - XXXX
Tap [$$]
1If you hear a busy signal
The line is busy. Press e and try again at a later time.
Overseas Use
• Tap [$$] to make a video call. 3 P86
487
00M1000EN.book
488 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Talk on the phone
The call duration is displayed.
The following operations can be performed:
[Mute]/[Unmute]
: Tap this to switch between the mute and unmute
settings. When the mute setting is active, the
other party cannot hear your voice but you can
hear the other party's voice.
[$$]/[$$]
: Tap this to set/release the touch screen lock.
When the lock is active, all tapping operations
other than $$ are disabled.
[Hold]/[Resume]
: Tap this to place a call on/off hold. The mute/
unmute setting cannot be changed while a call
is on hold.
: Press to enable/disable the speakerphone
function.
Press e when you have finished your call
The line is cleared.
Overseas Use
488
00M1000EN.book
489 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Country code
Country codes are as shown below:
Country
Code
Australia
61
Austria
43
Belgium
32
Brazil
55
Canada
China
86
Czech
Denmark
Country
Malaysia
60
Monaco
377
Netherlands
31
New Zealand
64
Norway
47
Philippines
63
420
Poland
48
45
Portugal
351
Finland
358
France
33
Code
Russia
Singapore
65
Germany
49
South Korea
82
Greece
30
Spain
34
Hong Kong
852
Sweden
46
Hungary
36
Switzerland
41
India
91
Indonesia
62
Ireland
353
Italy
39
Japan
Taiwan
886
Thailand
66
Turkey
90
U.A.E.
971
81
U.K.
44
Luxemburg
352
U.S.A.
Macao
853
Vietnam
84
Making Calls within Country of Stay
To make a call to a party in the country of stay, enter the other party's phone number and call in
the same way as calls within Japan.
• If the other party is also using international roaming, make a call in the same way as calls from overseas, even
if the other party is in the same country.
• Storing phone numbers including the other parties' country codes, etc. in the contact list will simplify the
procedure of making international calls.
• The Enter phone number screen can also be displayed by pressing e in idle state.
• If your call did not get through, tap [$$Retry] on the screen to make another attempt to call the same number.
• The view of the Enter phone number screen fields can be changed. 3 P139
• The handset can be set not to show the call duration on the screen displayed while talking. 3 P135
• An audible timer to notify you of the elapsed call time is available. 3 P128
• The handset can be set not to answer incoming calls during international roaming. 3 P516
• The handset can be set to play to a party who has attempted to call you during international roaming a
message informing the caller that the call is being forwarded overseas 3 P517
• Caller IDs may not be sent correctly.
Overseas Use
NOTE
489
00M1000EN.book
490 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Some overseas network operators may charge you for calls that did not get through due to communication
conditions.
• Some overseas network operators may charge you for calls to toll-free numbers.
• When you use international videophone, the image of the other party displayed may be distorted or
connection may not be established depending on the other party's handset. For details, visit the DoCoMo
website.
Answering Calls
Answer incoming phone calls with your FOMA handset when you are outside Japan.
A call arrives
The ring tone sounds and the status LED flashes.
• The vibrator can be enabled instead of the ring tone. 3 P126
Tap [Answer]
The call is answered.
• If a video call arrives, tap [Answer] to answer the call with the camera image enabled. Tap
[Privacy] to answer the call with the camera image disabled.
• Tap [Reject] to hang up without answering the incoming call.
• Operations during conversation are the same as described in Step 4 of "Making calls."
Press e when you have finished your call
The line is cleared.
1To access your FOMA handset overseas from Japan
Entering your phone number in the same way as usual domestic calls allows a caller in Japan
to make a call to your handset outside Japan, which you can answer.
Enter "090-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key
Or
Enter "080-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key
1To access your FOMA handset overseas from countries other than Japan
Regardless of the place of stay, entering your phone number prefixed with "+" and "81"
(country code for Japan) and without the "0" at the beginning of the area code allows a caller
to make a call to your handset, in the same way as overseas calls to Japan.
Overseas Use
490
Enter "+81-90-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key
Or
Enter "+81-80-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key
NOTE
• In some countries, you may be charged for calls that arrive during international roaming.
• Calls that arrive while the line is busy can be automatically diverted to the Voicemail Service Center. 3 P375
• Calls that arrive during international roaming are forwarded from Japan, regardless of the places of origin.
The callers are charged for calls to Japan and the receivers for international forwarding.
00M1000EN.book
491 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Switching Networks
Default setting
Band: WCDMA
Registration preference: Auto
Search frequency: Medium
To use your FOMA handset overseas, it is necessary to switch to a network available in
the place of stay. By default, a network available will be automatically found and set. You
can also select a network manually.
• Network switching must take place in a country where you use your FOMA handset.
• Network cannot be switched while Self mode is active.
Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Network
on the Menu bar on the Phone number entry screen
Band
: Select a frequency band suited for the
country of stay.
Registration preference
: Set the network automatically or manually.
Search frequency : Set the frequency of searching for a
network.
Find new network : Starts a search for a new network.
Tap Band and select a frequency band
Tap Registration preference, and tap Auto/Manual
• If Auto has been tapped, the network found will be automatically set.
• If Manual has been tapped, select from the networks found to set the network.
Tap Search frequency and select the frequency of search
Tap [Find new network]
A network is found. If Registration preference is set to Auto, the network found will be
automatically registered.
1If Registration preference is set to Manual
The screen as shown below is displayed after a network has been found.
Tap the network to set, and tap [Register].
Tap [Done]
Overseas Use
The selected network will be registered.
Setting Operations in Roaming
Set operations for handling calls that arrive while you are using international roaming
outside Japan.
• For details about network services, see "Network Service Operation Guide".
491
00M1000EN.book
492 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Making available Remote Operation of Network Services during Roaming
Set your handset to allow remote operation of Voicemail and Call Forwarding Services from
overseas.
• This operation can be performed only by subscribers of Voicemail or Call Forwarding Service.
Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Roaming
in the Menu bar
Tap $$ in the Remote access control field, and tap [Yes]
Remote access is enabled.
• Tap $$ to disable remote access.
Avoiding Calls Arriving during Roaming
Your handset can be set to restrict incoming calls or data communications during roaming.
Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Roaming
in the Menu bar on the Phone number entry screen
Tap $$ in the Incoming call barring when roaming field, and enter the
network security code on the Enter network security code
screen
Incoming call barring is set.
• Tap $$ to remove incoming call barring when roaming.
Overseas Use
NOTE
• The operation cannot be performed outside the service area or in an area with no radio wave.
Enabling Guidance in Roaming
The handset can be set to play to a party who has attempted to call you during international
roaming a message informing the caller that you are in international roaming.
• If the guidance function is not set, a message "Connecting your call. Please hold." is played to the caller.
492
00M1000EN.book
493 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Even if you have not enabled the guidance, a message in a foreign language may play depending on the
conditions of the overseas network operator. The ringing tone may be different from that in Japan.
Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Roaming
on the Menu bar on the Contact entry screen
Tap $$ in the Roaming Guidance field on the Roaming screen
The guidance function is enabled. To a caller, a message "The receiver is in international
roaming. Please hold while your call is being connected." is played.
• Tap $$ to disable the guidance.
NOTE
• The operation cannot be performed outside the service area or in an area with no radio wave.
Overseas Use
493
00M1000EN.book
494 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
00M1000EN.book
495 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Appendix
Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
List of Symbols and Special Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
List of Fixed Phrases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
List of Roman Character Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Combination of Functions during Multiaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Services Available for FOMA Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Options and Related Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Desktop Suite and SyncML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
1When Troubled
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Error Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Warranty and After-sales Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Protecting the Handset from Data that can Cause Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
495
00M1000EN.book
496 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Menu List
Tap $$ (Application launcher) on Application Selector bar to display.
Application
Description
Reference
$$
Browse
Accesses Internet and a homepage can be
viewed.
P193
$$
Calculator
A calculator can be used.
P350
$$
Calendar
Displays a calendar, and schedules can be
registered.
P322
$$
Camera
Takes still images/videos.
P169
$$
Contacts
Registration of contacts and searching contacts
are performed.
P99
$$
Control panel
Certificate manager
Displays User certificates/CA certificates.
P220
Text input
Details of text input are set up.
P467, 480,
484, 486, 490,
499
Sound
Sound such as Ringers are set.
P126
Shortcut key
Sets the menu launched by a home/shortcut key.
Password
Sets a Security code and a Phone Lock.
Master Clear/Master Reset
Performs Master Clear/Master Reset.
Manner Mode
Sets the operation of the Manner Mode.
P129
Memory card
Formats a memory card, or changes its name.
P302
Memory manager
Displays application memory.
Handset tab
P345
P147, 154
P360
P306, 308,
310
Screen
Adjusts brightness and tap location of the screen.
P134
Settings for cars
Sets the operation for connecting FOMA handset
to a Carkit.
P75
Power
Sets the operation of the Power save mode and
Status LED.
P136
Handset information
Displays system information of the FOMA
handset.
P350
Connection tab
Appendix
496
Bluetooth
Sets the detail of Bluetooth.
P382
Desktop Suite
Sets the connection type of Desktop Suite.
P529
Internet account
Sets the necessary settings for connecting to an
internet.
P183
Messaging accounts
Sets messaging accounts.
P227
Byte Counter
Displays the amount of data transmitted.
P348
00M1000EN.book
497 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Application
$$
午前７時５６分
Description
Reference
Connection tab
Find Wireless LAN Access
Point
Searches an access point of a wireless LAN.
P398
General tab
Select Language
Changes the language displayed on the screen.
P142
International
Sets present country and currency unit.
P140
Ringtune Manager
Installation of ringtones and Vibrator Setting is
performed.
Time & date
P124, 127
Sets the date, time and display format.
P59
$$
Desktop Suite
Synchronizes PC and data.
P530
$$
Home
Displays the Home screen.
P57
$$
Message
Sends and receives messages.
P234
$$
Music
Plays music.
P285
$$
Notes
Registers texts and Free draw notes.
P351
$$
Handset
Displays a phone number entry screen.
P66
$$
Picsel Viewer
Displays various files.
P289
$$
Pictures
Manages pictures such as still pictures taken.
P274
$$
SyncML
Synchronizes data with a specific server with
wireless.
P530
$$
Time
Sets a display of time and alarm.
$$
To Do
Registers what needs to be done.
P336
$$
Video
Manages videos taken.
P280
P319, 358
$$
Voice
Records a speech with the voice recorder.
P313
$$
movianVPN
Connects with such as intranet, by utilizing VPN.
P400
$$
Virus scan
Checks for a virus in FOMA handset or Trans
Flash memory card.
P540
List of Symbols and Special Characters
• Entering symbols and special characters 3P473
Doublebyte
& '
｜
＊
‐
¥
Appendix
Singlebyte
497
00M1000EN.book
498 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Porticular
List of Fixed Phrases
• Entering fixed phrases 3 P472
Category
Greeting
Reply
Business
Private
English
Appendix
498
Fixed phrases
おはようございます
こんにちは
こんばんは
おやすみなさい
ありがとうございます
すいません
よろしくお願いします
お疲れ様です
ご無沙汰しております
おめでとう
OK
NG
賛成
反対
了解です
問題ありません
今やっています
すぐ行きます
もう少し待ってください
いつでも大丈夫です
電話ください。
至急、返事ください。
遅れます。
これから帰社します。
会議中です。
出張中です。
直行します。
直帰します。
お世話になっております。
後程ご連絡致します。
TELして
遊びに行こうよ
飲みに行かない？
今日、ヒマ？
今どこ？
今何してるの？
もうすぐ着くよ
じゃあ、後で！
今日はダメです
いいよ！
Thank you
Call me back!
I'm late.
Where are you now?
I'll be back soon.
Let's meet at
It sounds great!
Congratulations!
Good luck!
I love you.
00M1000EN.book
499 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Category
Internet
午前７時５６分
Fixed phrases
@docomo.ne.jp
.co.jp
.ne.jp
.or.jp
.ac.jp
.com
http://
https://
ftp://
www.
.org
.net
.jp
.html
List of Roman Character Entries
Hiragana/Kanji entry is performed by Roman character input, when the input method is
set to Qwerty Keyboard and input mode is set to kanji mode. 3P471
Line
あ line
Entering character
Keys to tap
あ
い
う
え
お
yi
wu
ぁ
ぃ
ぅ
ぇ
ぉ
la
xa
li
xi
lyi
xyi
lu
xu
le
xe
lye
xye
lo
xo
うぁ
うぃ
うぇ
うぉ
wha
whi
wi
whe
we
who
か
き
く
け
こ
ka
ca
ki
ku
cu
qu
ke
ko
co
が
ぎ
ぐ
げ
ご
ga
gi
gu
ge
go
きゃ
きぃ
きゅ
きぇ
きょ
kya
kyi
kyu
kye
kyo
ぎゃ
ぎぃ
ぎゅ
ぎぇ
ぎょ
gya
gyi
gyu
gye
gyo
くぁ
くぃ
くぅ
くぇ
くぉ
qwa
qa
kwa
qwi
qi
qyi
qwu
qwe
qe
qye
qwo
qo
くょ
qya
ye
ぃぇ
か line
くゃ
さ line
くゅ
qyu
qyo
ぐぃ
ぐぅ
ぐぇ
ぐぉ
gwa
gwi
gwu
gwe
gwo
し
す
せ
そ
sa
si
ci
shi
su
se
ce
so
ざ
じ
ず
ぜ
ぞ
za
zi
ji
zu
ze
zo
しゃ
しい
しゅ
しぇ
しょ
sya
sha
syi
syu
shu
sye
she
syo
sho
じゃ
じぃ
じゅ
じぇ
じょ
zya
ja
jya
zyi
jyi
zyu
ju
jyu
zye
je
jye
zyo
jo
jyo
すぁ
すぃ
すぅ
すぇ
すぉ
swa
swi
swu
swe
swo
Appendix
ぐぁ
さ
499
00M1000EN.book
500 ページ
Line
た line
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Entering character
Keys to tap
た
ち
つ
て
と
ta
ti
chi
tu
thu
te
to
ちゃ
ちぃ
ちゅ
ちぇ
ちょ
tya
cha
cya
tyi
tyu
chu
cyu
tye
che
cye
tyo
cho
cyo
つぇ
つぉ
tsa
tsi
tse
tso
cyi
つぁ
つぃ
てゃ
てぃ
てゅ
てぇ
てょ
tha
thi
thu
the
tho
とぁ
とぃ
とぅ
とぇ
とぉ
twa
twi
twu
twe
two
だ
ぢ
づ
で
ど
da
di
du
de
do
dyi
dyu
dye
dyo
ぢゃ
ぢぃ
ぢゅ
ぢぇ
ぢょ
dya
でゃ
でぃ
でゅ
でぇ
でょ
dha
dhi
dhu
dhe
dho
どぁ
どぃ
どぅ
どぇ
どぉ
dwa
dwi
dwu
dwe
dwo
itu
xtu
っ
な line
は line
な
に
ぬ
ね
の
na
ni
nu
ne
no
にゃ
にぃ
にゅ
にぇ
にょ
nya
nyi
nyu
nye
nyo
は
ひ
ふ
へ
ほ
ha
hi
hu
fu
he
ho
ひゃ
ひぃ
ひゅ
ひぇ
ひょ
hya
hyi
hyu
hye
hyo
ふぉ
fwa
fa
fwi
fi
fyi
fwu
fwe
fe
fye
fwo
fo
bi
bu
be
bo
ふぁ
ふぃ
や line
ら line
わ line
Appendix
500
ふぇ
ふょ
fya
ば
び
ぶ
べ
ぼ
ba
びゃ
びぃ
びゅ
びぇ
びょ
bya
byi
byu
bye
byo
vi
vu
ve
vo
ふゃ
ま line
ふぅ
ふゅ
fyu
fyo
ヴぁ
ヴぃ
ヴ
ヴぇ
ヴぉ
va
ヴゃ
ヴぃ
ヴゅ
ヴぇ
ヴょ
vya
vyi
vyu
vye
vyo
ぱ
ぴ
ぷ
ぺ
ぽ
pa
pi
pu
pe
po
ぴゃ
ぴぃ
ぴゅ
ぴぇ
ぴょ
pya
pyi
pyu
pye
pyo
mi
mu
me
mo
myi
myu
mye
myo
ま
み
む
め
も
ma
みゃ
みぃ
みゅ
みぇ
みょ
mya
や
ゆ
よ
ya
yu
yo
ゃ
ゅ
ょ
lya
xya
lyu
xyu
lyo
xyo
ら
り
る
れ
ろ
ra
ri
ru
re
りゃ
りぃ
りゅ
りぇ
りょ
rya
ryi
ryu
rye
ん
wa
わ
ゎ
を
iwa
xwa
wo
ro
ryo
nn
n'
xn
00M1000EN.book
501 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Combination of Functions during Multiaccess
The available combination of operations for Multiaccess is as shown below:
Operation to be
used
Making/
receiving a
voice call
Making/
receiving a
video call
Connecting to
Internet
Sending/
receiving a
message
Sending/
receiving SMS
While on a voice
call
○
×
○
While on a video
call
×
×
○
While
connected to
Internet
○
○
Current status
○
×
–
Available
Not available.
The combination is functionally not possible.
Internet connection not available via CSD in overseas.
Not available to send/receive messages via CSD in overseas.
A call cannot be made or received during an internet connection via CSD in overseas.
Services Available for FOMA Handset
Available service
Phone number
Collect call (reversed charge calls)
106 (no area code)
Directory assistance for general subscriber phones and DoCoMo's
mobile phones (charges apply).
(Unlisted phone numbers cannot be given.)
104 (no area code)
Telegrams (charges apply)
115 (no area code)
8 a.m. - 10 p.m.
Time (charges apply)
117 (no area code)
Weather report (charges apply)
Area code + 177
Police emergencies
110 (no area code)
Fire and ambulance
119 (no area code)
Marine emergencies and accident reports
118 (no area code)
Message Dial for a disaster (charges apply)
171 (no area code)
• If you use the collect call service (106), the call charge is billed to the receiver together with a commission
of 90 yen (94.5 yen with tax included) per call. (as of XX 2004)
• If you use the directory assistance service (104), a service charge of 100 yen (105 yen with tax included) is
billed together with the call charge. Note that this service is available without charge for those visually
impaired or physically disabled in the upper body. For further information, inquire at 116 (NTT sales center)
from a general subscriber phone. (as of XX 2004)
Appendix
NOTE
501
00M1000EN.book
502 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Note that calls to 110, 119 or 118 from the FOMA handset cannot be located. Since the police or fire
department authorities may call you to confirm, inform them that you are calling from a mobile phone, give
your number and detailed information of your whereabouts. To make sure that you are not cut off during the
call, stay in one place when you make the call and do not turn off the phone after the call, but keep it on for
about 10 minutes so that a call can be received.
• Depending on the area you are calling from you may not be connected to the local police or fire department.
Use a public payphone or general subscriber phone if you cannot get in touch with the local authorities.
• Customers who use "Call Forwarding" and "Voice Warp" from a general subscriber phone whose forwarding
destination is a mobile or carphone (mobile phone), may still hear the ring tone even when the mobile phone
is busy, is outside the service area or is turned OFF due to the setting of the general subscriber/mobile
phone.
• You may not be able to call 116 (NTT sales center), Dial Q2, Message Dial and make credit card calls. (Credit
card calls can be made from a general subscriber or a public phone to a FOMA handset.)
Appendix
502
00M1000EN.book
503 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Options and Related Devices
Combining the FOMA handset with optional devices supports a wide variety uses from
personal use to business use. Some products are unavailable depending on the region.
For details, contact our sales office. For details about the optional devices, refer to the
instruction manual for each device.
• AC adapter MXX
• Desktop holder MXX
• Battery pack MXX
• Rear cover MXX
• Carrying case MXX
• Stylus MXX
• USB cable MXX
• FOMA USB cable
• International FOMA AC adapter 01
• Earphone/microphone with flat switch P01/P02
• Flat type stereo earphone set P01
• Earphone/microphone with switch P001/P002*
• Stereo earphone set P001*
*:
Earphone jack converter adapter P001 is needed.
Desktop Suite and SyncML
FOMA handset has two types of software in order to synchronize data.
1Desktop suite
A FOMA handset connected to a personal computer with USB, or via Bluetooth, can transmit
and synchronize data such as Contacts, Calendar, To do list, and messages.
With Desktop suite, installation and transmission of applications and files to a FOMA handset
can be performed in addition to transmission and synchronization of data.
1SyncML
A FOMA handset connected to a personal computer via a wireless LAN, can transmit and
synchronize data such as Contacts, Calendar, and To do list.
Please see the following homepage or the help of Desktop suite/SyncML about details on
such as download method, data which can be transmitted/synchronized, a hardware
requirement, the operation method, and restrictions.
 http://www.XXXXXX
Hardware Requirements
Please use in the operational environments shown below.
Item
Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows 98SE
CPU
A processor with XX or higher performance is recommended.
Required memory*
XXMB or higher
Free hard disk space*
XXMB or higher
Display
High Color (16bit) or higher is recommended.
*:
Appendix
OS
Required environment
Required memory and hard disk space may vary depending on system environments.
503
00M1000EN.book
504 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Before Using

Please see the above homepage or the help of Desktop suite/SyncML about details on such as
download method, data which can be transmitted/synchronized, a hardware requirement, the
operation method, and restrictions.
For inquiries on Desktop suite and SyncML
XXXXSupport Center 0120-XXX-XXX
Office hours: Week days from XX:XX to XX:XX a.m. and XX:XX to XX:XX p.m.
(Saturdays, Sundays, public holidays, and predetermined holidays are excluded)
Using Desktop Suite
By using Desktop Suite, following operations can be performed between a personal computer
linked to a FOMA handset.
Installing Desktop Suite PC
Set the attached CD-ROM to a personal computer
Specify "The drive name of CD-ROM: \XXX\setup.exe" and click
[OK]
Click in the order of [ スタート ] (Start) menu y “ ファイル名を指定
して実行 ” (Execute by specifying a file name)
• From here on, please follow the instructions displayed on the
screen.
Starting Desktop Suite PC
Please connect a FOMA handset and a personal computer beforehand, after they are powered
on. 3 P416
Appendix
504
Select in the order of [ スタート ] (Start) menu y “ すべてのプログ
ラム ” (All Programs) ([Programs] for OS other than WindowsXP)
00M1000EN.book
505 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
y "Motorola Desktop Suite", and click on "Motorola Desktop
Suite"
Starting of Desktop Suite PC will display the above screen.
1About detailed operation method of Desktop Suite PC
Please refer to the help file. The display method is as follows:
Select in the order of [ スタート ] (Start) menu y “ すべてのプログラム ” (All Programs)
([Programs] for OS other than WindowsXP) y "Motorola Desktop Suite", and click on
"Motorola Desktop Help"
Uninstalling Desktop Suite PC
Uninstalls Desktop Suite PC
• Before uninstalling, please end Desktop Suite PC.
• The display on the screen differs when an OS other than Windows XP is used.
< Example: When uninstalling form Windows XP >
Click on the icons in the order of [ スタート ] (Start) menu y “ コン
トロールパネル ” (Control Panel) y “ プログラムの追加と削除 ”
(Add or Remove Programs)
The “ プログラムの追加と削除 ” (Add or Remove Programs) screen is displayed.
1For Windows 2000 Professional, Me
Click on [ スタート ] (Start) menu, and select in the order of [ 設定 ] (Setting) y “ コント
ロールパネル ” (Control Panel) and double click on “ アプリケーションの追加と削除 ”
(Add or Remove Programs)
“アプリケーションの追加と削除 ” (Add or Remove Programs) screen (for Windows Me,
“アプリケーションの追加と削除のプロパティ ” (Property of Add or Remove
Programs) ) is displayed.
• From here on, please follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
Appendix
Select "Motorola Desktop Suite" and click on “ 変更と削除 ”
(Change or Delete)
Setting the Connection Method of Desktop Suite
The method for connecting to Desktop Suite (USB cable connection/Bluetooth communication) is
set.
505
00M1000EN.book
506 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, tap Connect tab from
Control Panel screen y tap Desktop Suite
When the connection
method is USB
When the connection
method is Bluetooth
1Changing the precedence of apparatus when connection method is set to Bluetooth
Tap [Change]
Display
Device list
: Tap and select when displaying the Bluetooth
apparatus by types.
: The apparatus by which Bluetooth connection was
made (above the line), and the apparatus being
searched (below the line) are displayed.
• Tap [Update] to start a search for apparatus available for Bluetooth
connection starts.3P383
Tap Connection Drop Box, set connection method y tap [Done]
Operating Desktop Suite
Desktop Suite is operated and data is transmitted. The connection starts with the method set at
"Setting the connection method of Desktop Suite" (3 P529)
• When connecting via USB, this operation is performed after connecting a personal computer with a FOMA
handset with an USB cable beforehand. 3 P414
• When connecting via Bluetooth, it is recommended to register the connecting Bluetooth apparatus
beforehand. 3 P382
Appendix
506
00M1000EN.book
507 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar
When connecting via
USB
午前７時５６分
When connecting via
Bluetooth
Tap [Connect]
1When disconnecting
Tap [Disconnect]
Synchronizing a Personal Computer with a Data by Using SyncML
Setting up SyncML
Performs a server setup in order to use SyncML.
• Information necessary for the setting will be supplied by the provider of SyncML.
Tap $$ y $$ at the Application Selector bar
Tap in the order from Edit y Settings in the Menu bar
Server address
Username
Password
: Enter a server address.
: Enter a username.
: Enter a password.
Appendix
507
00M1000EN.book
508 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap a column to set up, and enter information
1When performing a setting for a transport login
• Please perform this when needed. Information necessary for the setting will be supplied
by the provider of SyncML.
a Tap Protocol tab
Transport protocol
: Transport protocol is displayed.
Use transport login
: Sets enable/disable of transport login.
Username : The user name for transport login is entered. This
can be entered only when transport login is
enabled.
Password : The password for transport login is entered. This
can be entered only when transport login is
enabled.
b Tap $$ at Use transport login column
• Tap $$ to disable Transport Login.
c Tap the Username column, and enter a user name
d Tap the Password column, and enter a password
Tap [Done]
The server is set.
Setting the Task to Synchronize
Sets the task to synchronize by SyncML.
Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar
The task to synchronize is displayed.
Appendix
508
00M1000EN.book
509 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap a task to set
Enable task
Task name
: Sets enable/disable of the task.
: The task name acquired beforehand is
displayed.
Server database
: The path to the server database acquired
beforehand is displayed.
Tap $$ of Enable task
• Tap $$ to disable the task.
Tap Task name column, and enter a task name
• Make a change as needed.
Tap Server database column and enter a path
• Make a change as needed.
Tap [Done]
The task is set.
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the task setting.
Synchronizing Data
Connects to the SyncML server, and synchronizes the data.
Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar
The task to synchronize is displayed.
The tasks with synchronization disabled are displayed 3 P532
Appendix
509
00M1000EN.book
510 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [Sync]
The progress of synchronization is displayed.
Condition of the task is displayed.
• Tap [Stop] to cancel the performing synchronization.
• Tap SyncML 3 Disconnect on the Menu bar to disconnect the
communication.
Synchronization
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Check
FOMA handset cannot be turned ON (the handset
cannot be used).
• Is the battery connected properly? 3 P52
• Is the battery depleted? 3 P55
• When the mova handset is ON in a dual network
service, the FOMA service is not available. Check
whether or not FOMA handset is ON. Please see
"Network Service Operation Guide" for further
information. 3 P373
A message "UIM selection failed" is displayed when
the FOMA handset is powered on.
• The UIM may not be properly attached or may be
damaged. Check to see if the UIM is properly
attached. 3 P49
Screen does not change when a key is pressed or the • Is All lock set? 3 P153
touch screen is tapped while the display is turned off.
Appendix
510
The display gets dark, and indication disappeared.
• Is the handset in power saving mode? 3 P42
"Battery Status: Very Low Recharge Battery" is
displayed, and alarm is heard.
• The battery is almost discharged. Charge the
battery. 3 P54
Calls cannot be made by entering a phone number.
• Is Self-mode set? 3 P155
After dialling a number, you hear a busy tone and
cannot establish your call.
• Have you dialed the area code? 3 P66
• Did you hear the dial tone before dialling? 3 P66
• Is "No service" indicated? 3 P41
Mail reception is announced by other than the set ring
tone.
• Is the mail from the partner whom you registered
the ringer tone in the phonebook? 3 P104
The image/melody set in each function does not
display/play, and operates in default setting.
• Is the same UIM as the one acquired the picture or
the melody attached? 3 P50
00M1000EN.book
511 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
The icon indicating the network state shows the
handset is out of network coverage, and you cannot
use the global roaming service.
• You are outside the service area of global roaming
service, or in an area with poor signal strength.
• Please check with "Network Service Operation
Guide" or the homepage of WORLD WING to see
whether the service area or the operator is the one
you can use.
• Please switch to a corresponding network. 3 P515
Neither a Video Call, a short message service (SMS),
nor a packet communication can be used.
• Please check with "Network Service Operation
Guide" or the homepage of WORLD WING to see
whether the service area or the operator is the one
you can use.
• Please switch to a corresponding network. 3 P515
Cannot receive either a voice call or a video call.
• Is Incoming call barring when roaming set? 3
P516
After returning from overseas, the icon indicating the
network state remains displaying no service.
• Is the network set for GSM/GPRS system? 3
P515
Error Message List
Displayed Messaget
Description
Reference
The application was not able to install, since the file is
corrupt.
P362
Application was not able to
install since there is
insufficient memory in the
handset. Please delete an
unnecessary file and try
again
There is insufficient memory for the specified installation.
Delete some files and restart the installation.
P363
Cannot find specified
memory card. Check if the
memory card is properly
inserted
Application was not able to uninstall due to an error.
P363
The download was aborted
due to an error
Was not able to download due to an error.
P211
Delete or move internal files
to the memory card
A photograph cannot be taken since the memory in the
FOMA handset is full. Please either move to the external
memory, or delete unnecessary picture/video.
P307, 308
Move or delete some files
A photograph cannot be taken since the memory in the
FOMA handset is full. Please either move to the external
memory, or delete unnecessary picture/video.
P307, 308
Captured file could not be
stored
The picture/video taken was not able to save due to an error. P169, 170
Folder changed to default
external folder
The specified folder was not correct, so the default external
folder is opened.
P303
Camera could not be
accessed. The application
will close
The camera application is closed due to an error.
P169
Appendix
This software cannot be
installed as the installation
file is corrupt
511
00M1000EN.book
512 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Displayed Messaget
Appendix
512
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Description
Reference
Not all contacts were
deleted successfully
Certain contacts were not able to delete.
P113
Not all contacts were copied
successfully
Certain contacts were not able to copy.
P115
Not all contacts were moved
successfully
Certain contacts were not able to move.
P115
Contact can't be saved.
Please enter name.
This message displays when you attempt to save a contact
without entering a name. Please try saving again after
entering a name.
P99
Illegal characters. Contact
was updated.
When you attempt to save a contact that includes characters
that cannot be saved to UIM, the data will be changed and
then saved.
P105
USB cable not connected.
Since the USB cable is not connected to the FOMA handset,
it cannot connect to a PC.
P414
Failed to connect to PC via
USB. Check the settings on
the PC.
FOMA handset cannot be connected to a PC via USB.
P417
Do you want to enable
Bluetooth?
This message is displayed when attempting to connect
FOMA handset with a PC using Bluetooth, and an available
device is not set.
Please tap [Yes], and set the available device.
P382
Your preferred device cannot
be found. Make sure it is
turned on and in-range.
Alternatively change your
preferred device.
This message is displayed when attempting to connect
FOMA handset with a PC using Bluetooth, and an available
device is not set. Please tap [Update], and you can select
another device from the list of available devices.
P382
Check Failed
The check on a short message (SMS) failed.
P263
A handset is trying to
connect in order to transfer
an entry.
Other handset is trying to connect to the FOMA handset in
order to transmit data. Tap [Accept] to receive the data with
Bluetooth.
P385
The file name already exists This message is displayed when you attempt to change a file
name to the one already exist. Please use other file name.
P304
Enter a name for the track
This message displays when you attempt to change a music
file name without entering anything. Please enter a file
name.
P304
This application's file is
damaged and has been
deleted
The dameaged data in notes is deleted.
TV Phone is not available
You are not in an area where a Video Call can be used. You
can make a voice call by tapping [Voice].
P89
Failed to connect
Video call cannot be made due to an error. You can make a
voice call by tapping [$$Voice].
P89
Video call cannot be dialed
in an active audio call
This message displays when attempting to make a video call
during a voice call. You can make a voice call by tapping
[$$Voice].
P89
Failed
A setup of network service failed due to an error.
Failure Network failure
Failed a network search for setting up a network, due to an
error.
00M1000EN.book
513 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Displayed Messaget
午前７時５６分
Description
Reference
Failure Other Phone is Busy The other phone is busy when switching Dual Network.
P373
Failure Invalid Network
Password
The password for the network is incorrect.
P146
Network password incorrect
The password for the network is incorrect.
P146
Not Subscribed
The network service is not subscribed.
Failure Network already
exists
The network attempted to be registered already exists in the
preferred list.
List full Please delete an
entry first
The preferred list is full.
Failure Emergency only
Either network cannot be found, or manual network selection
is cancelled.
Failure No Service
The network cannot be used,
Incorrect password
PIN is not correct.
P147
Incorrect password PIN will
be blocked if next attempt
fails
Reentered PIN is not correct.
P147
PIN is blocked
PIN is locked.
P151
None of UIMs is selected
UIM is not selected.
UIM selection failed
An error occurred with the UIM.
Unknown document file type It is a file not supported.
P289
The document is faulty, and
could not be converted
An error occurred with the file.
P289
Image could not be loaded
Image could not be loaded due to an error.
Image is too large to operate The image is too large to display or edit.
Image could not be moved
Image could not be moved due to an error.
P275
Image could not be renamed Image could not be renamed due to an error.
Image could not be deleted
Image could not be deleted due to an error.
Unable to play clip.
Unable to play clip due to an error.
Enter a name for the clip.
This message displays when you attempt to change a clip
file name without entering anything. Please enter a file
name.
P304
Unable to update pattern
definitions.
Failed to update pattern definitions of virus scan due to an
error.
The total data amount
exceeds the specified
threshold.
The total packet data sent and received exceeded the
specified threshold.
P349
A certificate must be
selected.
A certificate needs to be selected.
P220
Client certificates are not
available. Network
authentication cannot be
configured.
Either a certificate does not exist, or the certificate has
expired, so it cannot be used.
P220
Appendix
Cannot use pattern scanner. Initialization of virus scan failed due to an error
513
00M1000EN.book
514 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Displayed Messaget
Appendix
514
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Description
Reference
A problem occurred during
the automatic settings
update
Downloading quickstart failed due to an error.
Failure Device settings not
reset
Master Reset failed due to an error.
Failure User data not
cleared Device settings not
reset
Master Clear failed due to an error.
Bad name
It is a name that cannot be registered in TransFlash memory
card.
P302
Switch off light must be less
than or equal to the time to
Power down screen
It will be adjusted
accordingly
The time for Power down screen in power saving mode
cannot be set up shorter than the time for switch off light.
Please reset the time again.
P136
Battery Status: Very Low
Recharge Battery
Low battery. Please charge.
P54
You cannot delete the ……
folder because it still has
items in it.
The folder could not be deleted since it has data in it.
P303
Your handset is low on
memory. Do you want to
create some space now?
The memory capacity of FOMA handset is insufficient. Tap
[Yes] to display the screen for deleting unnecessary files, or
the memory manager.
P311
Disk is full
The memory is full. Delete unnecessary files.
P311
This file is damaged and
can't be used.
The file is damaged, so it cannot be used.
This application's file is
damaged and has been
deleted.
The file is damaged, so it has been deleted.
Failed to read the user
dictionary. Are you sure you
want to initialize?
Failed to read the user dictionary. Tap [OK] to initialize and
activate.
P484
Failed to read the learning
dictionary. Are you sure you
want to initialize?
Failed to read the learning dictionary. Tap [OK] to initialize
and activate.
P490
Invalid Battery Unable to
Charge Battery
An invalid battery pack is used. Please use an appropriate
battery pack.
P52
No viewer can be found on
your device to open this file.
It is a file type that cannot be supported. Tap [Save] to be
saved in FOMA handset.
P250
00M1000EN.book
515 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Warranty and After-sales Service
Warranty
• A written warranty is provided with every FOMA handset; make sure that you receive it. Store the warranty in
a safe place when you have read it and checked that it contains the "shop name/date" you purchased it. If it
does not contain the necessary information, contact the shop where you bought it. The warranty is valid for
a period of one year from the date of purchase.
• This product and all accessories are subject to change, in part or whole, for the sake of improvement without
prior notice.
After-sales Service
When Problems Occur
Before requesting service, read the section "Troubleshooting".
If the problem still persists, contact one of the numbers described in "Contacts" at the back cover
of this manual.
If the Result of Inquiries Indicates that a Repair is Required
Take your FOMA handset to a service center designated by DoCoMo. Be sure to check the
opening hours of the service center. Note that you must present the warranty.
1In the warranty period
• The FOMA handset will be repaired at no charge subject to the conditions of the warranty.
• The warranty must be presented to receive warranty service. The subscriber will be charged for the repair
of items not covered in the warranty or repairs of defects resulting from misuse, accident or neglect even
during the warranty period.
• The subscriber is charged even during the warranty period for the repair of failures caused by the use of
devices or consumable items that are not DoCoMo-specified.
1Repairs may not be possible in the following cases:
• Repair is not possible when corrosion due exposure to moisture, condensation or perspiration is detected
in a moisture seal reaction or test, or if any of the internal boards are damaged or deformed. Since these
conditions are outside the scope of the warranty, a repair, if at all possible, will be charged.
1After expiration of the warranty
• All repairs that are requested are charged.
1Replacement parts
Appendix
• Replacement parts (parts required to maintain product function) will be kept in stock for at least 6 years
after termination of production. The product can be repaired during this period. Depending on the nature
of the required repair, it may still be possible to repair your phone even after this period, so please contact
one of the numbers described in "Contacts" at the back cover of this manual.
Notes
• Do not modify the FOMA handset, the UIM or its accessories.
515
00M1000EN.book
516 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
- Fire, injury or damage may result.
- In order to prevent interference of radio waves or network breakdown, the FOMA handset and UIM are
manufactured according to technical standards stipulated by law. Do not use FOMA handsets or UIMs that
do not meet these standards.
- If the FOMA handset is modified (part replacement, modification, painting, etc.) it will be repaired only after
the modified parts have been restored to the condition at the time of purchase. However, repair may be
refused depending on the nature of modification.
- Repair of failures or damage caused by modification are charged even during the warranty period.
• Do not remove any inscription stickers attached to the FOMA handset. The inscription stickers certify that the
FOMA handset satisfies specific technical standards. Note that if stickers are removed intentionally or are
reattached in such a way that confirmation of the sticker's contents is impossible, repair or servicing may be
refused because confirmation of whether or not the phone conforms to relevant technical standards cannot
be made.
• The ON/OFF function settings and stored data may be cleared (reset) by failure, repair or handling processes.
Should this happen, set up the functions again.
• Magnetic components are used in the earpiece and speaker of the FOMA handset. Do not allow cash cards
or other devices that are vulnerable to magnetism to come into contact with the phone.
• If the handset becomes wet or moist, turn the power off and remove the battery pack immediately and bring
the handset to our repair office as soon as possible. However, repair may not be possible depending on the
condition of the handset.
Phonebook, Downloaded Data and IC Card Data
• Maintain a separate record of the data you register in your FOMA handset. DoCoMo will not accept any
liability and responsibility whatsoever for changes of information or loss of information.
• Data created, imported or downloaded by the subscriber may be lost or become corrupted when changing
the model or repairing mobile phone or carphone. DoCoMo may, at its option, repair a mobile carphone by
replacing it. In such an event, it will not be possible, to transfer the data (except some data) to the new
handset. DoCoMo will not accept any responsibility.
Scan Function
Protecting the Handset from Data that can Cause Damage
By using the Scan Function, FOMA handset can perform a virus scan in FOMA handset or a
TransFlash memory card. When it is found infected from a result of a virus scan, the virus can be
cleansed immediately.
• The scan cannot be performed when another application is in use.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar
Last Scan
Last Update
Appendix
516
: Displays the date of the last scan.
: Displays the date of the last update of the
pattern file.
00M1000EN.book
517 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [$$Start scanning]
All media
: Scans both FOMA handset and TransFlash
memory card.
Internal memory
: Scans FOMA handset.
Card name
: Scans TransFlash memory card.
• When a TransFlash memory card is not attached, the selection
screen for the media would not be displayed. It will skip to
Step 4.
Tap $$ y [OK] of the media you are scanning
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the start of scanning.
Tap [OK]
The scan starts, and the result is displayed when the scan completes.
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the start of scanning.
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the scan during a scan.
Updating the Virus Pattern File
Virus scan uses the virus pattern file in order to distinguish viruses. By updating the virus pattern
file, it would make it possible to scan new viruses.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap [Update]
from the virus scan screen
Appendix
517
00M1000EN.book
518 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [OK]
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the update.
Tap [OK]
The phone ID is transmitted, and the update starts.
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the transmission of the phone ID.
• Tap [Cancel] y [OK] to cancel the update.
Tap [OK]
The update completes.
NOTE
• When the pattern data is updated, SSL communication is performed to the server (the site of our company).
Please enable the SSL certificate. 3P195
• When the pattern data is updated, the unique information (model, serial number, etc.) of your handset is
automatically transmitted to our server (the server that our company manages for the scanning function). We
do not use the transmitted information for any purposes other than the scanning function.
• Please set the date (year, month, and day) of your FOMA handset correctly.
• In case an update of a virus pattern file fails, please redo the update from the beginning.
• If the virus pattern file in the handset is the latest one, a message is displayed indicating that the pattern file
is the newest.
Appendix
518
00M1000EN.book
519 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1Functions and data that can be scanned
• [Since the specification is not decided yet, detail is omitted.]
1When infected with a virus
If a virus is detected during a scan, the confirmation screen for deleting the virus will be
displayed.
• Tap [Delete] or [OK] to delete the detected virus, and to resume the scan.
• Tap [Skip] to resume the scan without deleting the detected virus.
1When the scan completes
When the scan completes, a screen with the result of the scan is displayed.
No virus
Virus deleted
Virus not deleted
Appendix
519
00M1000EN.book
520 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [Details] in the result screen shown at virus detection to display details on the scan.
$$ : The virus has been deleted.
$$ : The virus has not been deleted.
• Select a file name and tap [Details] to notify the infected file, name
of the virus, and the status of the virus (deleted/deleted or not) .
The name of infected file
Checking the Version of the Virus Pattern File
The detailed information on virus scan application is displayed, and the version of a virus pattern
file can be checked.
Tap in the sequence of $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar,
and tap Virus Scan on the Menu bar y About Virus Scan
Application name and the version of the virus pattern file are
displayed.
Appendix
520
00M1000EN.book
522 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
00M1000EN.book
523 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
About Proper Telephone Etiquette
Do not disturb people around you when using your FOMA handset.
Always turn OFF your FOMA handset in the following situations:
1In a location where use of handsets is prohibited
There are places where you cannot use a handset. Always turn OFF your FOMA handset when:
• In an airplane
• In a hospital
Be aware that patients use electronic medical equipment in many areas in hospitals. Your
FOMA handset must be switched off even in lobbies or waiting rooms.
1While driving
Using your FOMA handset while driving could affect safe driving and cause danger.
Stop your car in a safe place before using your FOMA handset or use Drive Mode.
1While in a crowded train where there may be a person who uses an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or cardioverter defibrillator near you.
1Use of the handset could adversely affect the operation of an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or cardioverter defibrillator.
1While in public places such as a concert hall, movie theater or art museum
Using your FOMA handset in quiet public places will likely bother other people.
Match the volume of your voice and your FOMA handset's ring tone to
your location
1In a quiet location like a restaurant or hotel lobby, pay attention to the volume of your
voice and ring tones, etc. when using your FOMA handset.
1In town areas, while using your FOMA handset, be sure not to block foot or vehicular
traffic.
Consider privacy
Give consideration to privacy before shooting or sending images with a mobile phone
with a built-in camera.
"Silent" functions designed for public use
Your FOMA handset has a number of useful "silent" functions designed for public use, such
as a setting that instructs your handset not to answer incoming calls and the ability to set the
handset for silent operation.
2Manner Mode
Mutes all sounds your FOMA handset makes, such as keypad sound and ring tones.
3P160
2Drive Mode
Plays a guidance to notify that you cannot answer the call because you are driving a car,
then disconnects the call. This mode ensures your safety while driving because no ring
tone sounds when a call is received. 3P79
2Vibrator
Vibrates when there is an incoming call. 3P155
2Voice message
Allows the caller to leave a message when you cannot answer the phone. 3P81
In addition to the above functions, optional services such as Voice Mail Service and Call
Forwarding Service are also available. 3P483, P488
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 135
Language                        : EN-US
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:30df8962-b0ab-417a-8d94-f0ffd60537f0
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Company                         : Micron Electronics, Inc.
Source Modified                 : D:20041217200624
Headline                        : 
Create Date                     : 2004:12:17 14:06:49-06:00
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 6.0 for Word
Modify Date                     : 2004:12:17 14:33:10-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:12:17 14:33:10-06:00
Document ID                     : uuid:8555d3df-4afe-44bd-b122-6a61391aa035
Version ID                      : 2
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : The following is a draft copy of the instruction manual
Creator                         : Rob Bero
Subject                         : 
Tagged PDF                      : No
Author                          : Rob Bero
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Exhibit 8D Users Manual

Download: Motorola Mobility T6EY1 GSM Transceiver with WLAN and Bluetooth User Manual Exhibit 8D Users Manual
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Motorola Mobility T6EY1 GSM Transceiver with WLAN and Bluetooth User Manual Exhibit 8D Users Manual
Document ID498905
Application IDfYBQZxS2EBLMrqOiFDhDzA==
Document DescriptionExhibit 8D Users Manual
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize247.14kB (3089305 bits)
Date Submitted2004-12-21 00:00:00
Date Available2005-05-02 00:00:00
Creation Date2004-12-17 14:06:49
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod2004-12-17 14:33:10
Document TitleThe following is a draft copy of the instruction manual
Document CreatorAcrobat PDFMaker 6.0 for Word
Document Author: Rob Bero

APPLICANT: MOTOROLA, INC.
FCC ID: IHDT6EY1
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A preliminary draft copy of the Users Manual follows in four parts (Exhibit 8A through Exhibit 8D):
EXHIBIT 8D
00M1000EN.book
389 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Using Data Communication
Data Communication from FOMA Handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Using Data Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing for Data Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Connection Setup File (Drivers) for M1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Connection Setup Files (Drivers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninstalling M1000 Connection Setup Files (Drivers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing for Bluetooth Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOMA PC Setup Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing FOMA PC Setup Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Data Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple Setting "Packet Data Communication Setting Using Other ISP's" .
Executing the Set Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninstalling FOMA PC Setup Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W-TCP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up APN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning COM Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Dial-up Networking Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Dial-up Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Dial-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Dial-up Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
390
391
393
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
402
406
407
408
410
412
412
413
419
428
389
00M1000EN.book
390 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Data Communication from
FOMA Handsets
You can perform three types of data
communication with your FOMA handset and
your PC; namely, packet communication, 64K
data communication and data transfer PC.
Available Data Communication Types
2Packet communication
Communication charges are based on the
volume of exchanged data.
Suitable when you wish to stay connected to
the network and exchange data on an as
needed basis.
Data can be transmitted with maximum
download speed of 384Kbps, maximum
upload speed of 64Kbps via network
supporting FOMA Packet communication
such as "mopera" (DoCoMo's Internet
provider service). The M1000 can also be
used for data communications overseas by
accessing GPRS access points.
• Performing large volumes of data
communication may result in high
charges.
Using Data Communication
390
264K data communication
Communication charges are based on the
duration of time being connected to the
network.
Stable 64K bps data transmission can be
performed via network supporting FOMA
64K data communication such as "mopera"
(DoCoMo's Internet provider service) or
synchronized ISDN 64K access points.
The M1000 can also be used overseas by
accessing CSD data communication
supported access points.
2Data transfer
Data can be transferred free of charge
between a PC and FOMA handset. The
FOMA handset can be connected directly
using the accompanying USB cable or by
connecting the desktop holder to a PC using
the USB cable. To transfer data, install the
Desktop Suite to the PC. 3P527
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Connecting the FOMA Handset and PC
To connect your FOMA handset to a PC or
PDA either of the following methods can be
used.
USB Connection
2Connect with the accompanying-USB cable
3P414
• Separately sold FOMA USB cables can
also be used.
2Connect with USB cable for PC via
Desktop holder 3P415
Bluetooth Connection
2Connect via Bluetooth 3P419
• Device registration is required prior to
use. 3P382
Cautions
Internet Service Provider Charges
You will be charged by your Internet Service
Provider (ISP, hereafter) to connect to the
Internet. FOMA Service does not include the
ISP fee and it must be paid to the ISP directly.
Contact your ISP for further details.
"mopera", is DoCoMo's free Internet provider
service that does not require you to register.
Setting up ISP Connection
ISP settings differ between Packet
communication and 64K data communication.
Select appropriate access points for Packet
communication. For 64K data communication,
select an access point which supports FOMA
64K data communication or synchronized
ISDN 64K.
• Connection to DoPa is not supported
• Connection to PHS64K/32K Data Communication
such as PIAFS is not supported.
00M1000EN.book
391 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
QoS
Stands for Quality of Service and indicates
quality of network service. Data
transmission speed can be specified on a
FOMA handset.* 3P461
User Authentication when Accessing the Network
Connection may require authentication (ID
and password). Enter the user ID and
password in Dial-up Network when prompted.
Contact the network administrator or the ISP
to obtain the ID and password, and further
details.
*:
W-TCP
TCP parameters that optimize TCP/IP
transmission capability during Packet
communication over FOMA network.
Optimization of TCP parameters is
necessary in order to generate the
maximum FOMA communication
capabilities.
Prerequisites to Packet Connection and
64K Data Communication
Communication using FOMA handsets
requires meeting the following conditions. The
service, however, may be unavailable even if
required conditions are met due to traffic
conditions at base stations or radio wave
conditions.
Administrator rights on PC
Full access rights to Windows XP and
Windows 2000 systems. All other users do
not have rights to install drivers (connection
setup files).
• PC must support USB cables
• For Bluetooth connection, devices such as PC has
must comply with Bluetooth Ver1.1 Dial-up
Networking Profile standards.
The actual data speed may vary by
depending on network conditions.
• To be within the FOMA service area
• For Packet communication, the access point must
support FOMA Packet communication
• For 64K data communication, the access point
(the designated network) must support FOMA
64K data communication or 64K synchronized
ISDN.
1Data communication terminologies
Bluetooth ON 3P382
Bluetooth device registration 3P382
cid
Stands for Context Identifier. APN
registration number is registered in FOMA
made up of digits 1 to 10. Up to ten APN's
can be registered.
DNS
Stands for Domain Name System
The system converts an address made up
of digits identified by computers to a 'name'
such as "mopera.ne.jp" for easier
recognition by human.
PC System Requirements
PC System requirements for data
communication are as follows:
Item
Requirement
PC main unit • PC-AT compatible machine with
a CD-ROM drive
• USB Port (Universal Serial Bus
Specification Rev1.1/2.0
compliant)
• Display Resolutions 800 × 600
dots, High Color(65,536Colors)
or higher recommended
OS
• Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000, Windows XP
(Japanese Version)
Memory
• Windows 98, Windows Me:32MB
or more*
• Windows 2000:64MB or more*
• Windows XP:128MB or more*
HDD space
• 5MB of available space or more*
*:
Using Data Communication
APN
Stands for Access Point Name. Identifies
the network to log in (ISP or LAN) for Packet
communication. DoCoMo's Internet
connection service mopera's APN is
"mopera.ne.jp".
Before Using Data
Communication
Required memory and HDD space may depend
on PC system specifications.
391
00M1000EN.book
392 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
NOTE
• Data communication may not be enabled
subject to system properties. DoCoMo does not
guarantee proper operations nor respond to
inquiries when used with system requirements
that are not mentioned above.
• Use the accompanying FOMA USB cable or a
FOMA USB cable sold separately. Do not use
general PC USB cables as the connector
interface does not match the shape of FOMA
external interface.
• Do not apply force to the connector when
inserting. The connectors can only be inserted
in the correct direction and at the correct angle.
When inserted correctly, the connectors can be
inserted smoothly. In case of difficulty in
inserting confirm the orientation of the
connectors.
Connecting PC and FOMA Handsets
Setting up connection with a USB cable is
described in this section.
The FOMA handset can be connected directly
using the accompanying FOMA USB cable or
by connecting the desktop holder using the
PC USB cable.
To Connect Using the Accompanying
FOMA USB Cable
1Removing the USB cable
a Pull the USB cable out straight while
holding down the release button on
the external connector.
Screen
Screen
b Pull out the USB cable from PC
Using Data Communication
Remove the cap covering the
external connection interface of the
FOMA handset
Connect the accompanying USB
connector to a USB port on the PC
Match the direction of the external
connector of the accompanying
USB cable with the external
connection interface on the FOMA
handset and insert the connector
straight
Once the connection is established, the
FOMA handset displays "USB cable
connected".
392
Connecting a General PC USB Cable to a
Desktop Holder
The desktop holder enables data
communication by connecting the FOMA
handset to both the PC and the AC adapter.
• Use a general USB cable with connectors that
support USB Rev1.1/2.0 Series A compliant.
00M1000EN.book
393 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Connect Desktop holder to a PC by
using the PC USB cable
午前７時５６分
1About Connection setup file (drivers)
and FOMA PC setup software
Connection setup file (drivers) and FOMA
PC setup software are included in the
FOMA M1000 CD-ROM.
• M1000 setup file is the driver software for
Packet communication, 64K data
communication or data transfer used for
connecting the FOMA handset with the
accompanying FOMA USB cable to a PC.
M1000 setup file installs necessary drivers to
Windows.
Screen
水曜日
Attach the FOMA handset to the
desktop holder
• FOMA PC setup software enables easy setup
of Packet communication, 64K data
communication or Dial up networking.
See P54 on how to attach/remove.
NOTE
Preparing for Data
Communication
Preparations for packet communication/64K
data communication by connecting the FOMA
handset with the PC is described in this
section.
Via Bluetooth
connection*
Install connection setup
file (drivers) 3P416
Connect the FOMA
handset with PC
3P419
Install connection setup
file (drivers)*3P416
Set up connection details
To set up using the
FOMA PC setup
software 3P419
To set up without using the
FOMA PC setup software
3P436
Installing Connection Setup
File (Drivers) for M1000
• Install all drivers in one attempt when installing the
M1000 setup file. Installation may be unsuccessful
if the accompanying FOMA USB cable is pulled
out, or if [Cancel] is clicked during installation. If
installation is unsuccessful, use uninstall
procedures to delete the M1000 setup file by
following uninstall procedures (3P418), and try
installing again.
• Log in as a user with administrator rights when
installing the M1000 communication set up file to
Windows 2000 or Windows XP. Contact the PC
manufacturer or Microsoft regarding operations
related to administrator rights settings.
Using Data Communication
Via USB connection
• If "FOMA M1000 USB" is not displayed in
"Uninstall M1000 setup file (drivers) "( 3P418),
the installation has failed. Run uninstallation
(3P418) and try installation again.
• Uninstall driver if PC does not recognize the
FOMA handset for some reason and install it
again.
Connect 3P429, P451
Disconnect 3P430, P452
*:
Connection setup file (drivers) installation is not
necessary if a Bluetooth modem other than that
of FOMA handsets has already been installed.
Go on to set up connection details. See P417 to
check for an installed Bluetooth modem.
393
00M1000EN.book
394 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Checking Connection
Setup Files (Drivers)
【仕様未定につき、記載省略します。
】
Checking whether the M1000 setup file is
installed properly.
Launch the “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel) in Windows
1Windows XP
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ コントロール
パネル ” (Control Panel)
1Windows 2000, Windows Me or
Windows 98
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ 設定 ”
(Settings) y “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel)
Launch the “システム” (Systems) in
“ コントロールパネル ” (Control
Panel)
1Windows XP
Click “ システム ” (Systems) in “ パフォー
マンスとメンテナンス ” (Performance
and Maintenance)
Using Data Communication
1Windows Me
Click “ すべてのコントロールパネルのオ
プションを表示する ” (Show all options
in Control Panel) if “システム” (Systems)
icon is not displayed in the “ コントロー
ルパネル ” (Control Panel).
Launch the Device Manager
1Windows XP or Windows 2000
Click “ ハードウェア” (Hardware) tab
then click “ デバイスマネージャ” (Device
Manager).
1Windows Me or Windows 98
Click “ デバイスマネージャ ” (Device
Manager) tab
Check installed driver names by
clicking each device
Check whether all drivers are listed under
“ ポート（COM と LPT)” (Port(COM and
LPT), “ ユニバーサルシリアルバス ”(USB)
“ コントローラ ” (USB Controller) and “ モデ
ム ” (Modem).
394
00M1000EN.book
395 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Go to "Using FOMA PC Setup Software"
(3P419) if all driver names are found.
Connecting with USB
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Device name
Driver name
Universal Serial Bus
(USB) Controller or USB
(Universal Serial Bus)
Controller
• FOMA M1000
• FOMA M1000
Command*
• FOMA M1000
Modem*
• FOMA M1000 OBEX*
(Windows XP)
*:
only for Windows Me/98
Connecting with Bluetooth
Screen
(Windows XP)
Screen
(Windows 2000)
Screen
Device name
Driver name
Modem
To be decided
NOTE
(Windows Me, Windows 98)
• Upon verifying above, if the list of driver names
is incomplete, delete the M1000 setup file by
following uninstall procedures, and try installing
again.
Uninstalling M1000 Connection
Setup Files (Drivers)
Device name
Driver name
Port (COM/LPT)
• FOMA M1000
Command Port
• FOMA M1000 OBEX
Port
Modem
• FOMA M1000
Follow the procedures below when
uninstalling of drivers is necessary. The
uninstall instructions below are for Windows
XP.
Using Data Communication
Screen
395
00M1000EN.book
396 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Connecting with USB
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Preparing for Bluetooth
Connection
【仕様未定につき、記載省略します。
】
【仕様未定につき、記載省略します。
】
Connecting with Bluetooth
Using Data Communication
396
【仕様未定につき、記載省略します。
】
00M1000EN.book
397 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
FOMA PC Setup Software
Packet communication or 64K data
communication from FOMA handset to PC
requires various settings. FOMA PC setup
software enables easy configuration simple
operations.
• Packet communication or 64K data
communication can be set up without using FOMA
PC setup software. 3P436
• See P414 for connection between FOMA
handsets and PC
Simple settings
Follow the guidance to set up "Create
FOMA data communication Dial-up
Network" while configuring "W-TCP
settings" etc. automatically.
W-TCP settings
The communication settings in PC are
optimized before using "FOMA Packet
communication".
Optimizing W-TCP settings is required in
order to maximize connection
performance.
NOTE
• If W-TCP setup software or FOMA data
communication setup software not included in
the bundled FOMA M1000 CD-ROM have
already been installed, uninstall them prior to
installing the FOMA PC setup software.
午前７時５６分
Procedures from Installation of FOMA PC
Setup Software to Internet Connection
Step1: Install software
FOMA PC setup software is installed
• Uninstall "old W-TCP setup software",
"old APN setup software" or older
versions of "FOMA PC setup software"
before installing "FOMA PC setup
software".
"FOMA PC setup software" cannot be
installed if "old W-TCP setup software"
or "old APN setup Software" is installed.
Step2: Prepare before setting up
Preparations are conducted prior to
setting up
• Check that FOMA handset is connected
to the PC and is acknowledged by the
PC.
• See P414 for connecting FOMA handset
with PC.
• If FOMA handset is not properly
acknowledged by PC, various setup and
data communication cannot be done. If
the FOMA handset is not acknowledged
then see P416 to install the connection
setup file.
Step3: Perform various settings
Setup is done according to the
desired type of data communication
• Configuring simple settings
- Packet communication setting using
"mopera" 3P423
- Packet communication setting using
other Internet Service Providers
3P424
- 64K data communication setting using
"mopera" 3P427
- 64K data communication using other
Internet Service Providers 3P428
- See P436 onwards for all other
settings.
Using Data Communication
Setting up Access Point Names (APN)
Access Point Names for Packet
communication need to be setup.
Unlike 64K data communication, FOMA
Packet communication does not require
use of a telephone number. Register
Access Point Names in FOMA handset
and connect to the network by
designating its registered number (cid) in
the access telephone number field.
"mopera" is pre-registered as
mopera.ne.jp, the first in the cid list by
default. Set up APNs to connect to other
ISP's or LAN's.
水曜日
Setup 4: Connect
Connection to the Internet is made
• See P429 for connection procedures.
397
00M1000EN.book
398 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Before Installing
• Use the FOMA PC setup software under the
following system requirements.
Item
Requirement
• PC-AT Compatible
OS
• Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000, Windows XP
(Japanese Version)
Memory
• Windows 98 or Windows Me:
32MB or more*
• Windows 2000: 64MB or more*
• Windows XP: 128MB or more*
HDD Space
5MB or more*
*:
* You are unable to select if “ タスクトレイに常
駐する ” (Remain in task tray) has been
selected.
Required memory and HDD space may vary
depending on the system configuration of the
PC.
Installing FOMA PC Setup
Software
• Log in with the user account with Administrator
rights to install ("FOMA PC setup software") on
Windows XP or Windows 2000. Contact the PC
manufacturer or Microsoft regarding administrator
rights setting.
Using Data Communication
記載省略します。】
b 【仕様未定につき、
If displayed screens show that old “W-TCP
Verify the installation folder and
click [ 次へ ](Next)
Click [ 参照 ] (Browse) to make changes,
specify desired installation folder, and click
[ 次へ ] (Next).
If HDD lacks space, you can install to a
different driver. Otherwise, proceed
accordingly.
Verify the folder name and click [ 次
へ ] (Next)
Name the new folder and click [次へ] (Next)
if necessary.
設定ソフト ” (W-TCP Setup Software) or
old “APN 設定ソフト ” (APN Setup
Software) are installed, refer to P421.
Click [ はい ] (Yes/agree) to agree to
the End User License Agreement
after reading
Installation will be canceled if [いいえ ] (No/
disagree)is clicked.
398
Displays icon in the task tray on the bottom
right (normally) of the PC screen.
• Check that no resident program or application is in
use before installation. If any program is in use,
click [ キャンセル ] (Cancel) to end the program
and start installation again.
【仕様未定につき、
記載省略します。】
Click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Select whether "W-TCP Setup Software"
stays in Task tray or not after setting up.
Selecting the checkbox (Remain in Task
tray) is recommended for the program to
set/release the optimization of "W-TCP
communication".
Select “タスクトレイに常駐する” (Remain
in Task tray) $$ and continue the installation
unless you have any particular problem.
Settings can be changed by clicking on “ メ
ニュー ” (Menu) in FOMA PC setup
software and selecting “W-TCP 設定をタス
クトレイに常駐させる ” (Set W-TCP
Software in task tray) even if “ タスクトレイ
に常駐する ” (Stay in task tray) has been
deselected.
Check the system requirements.
PC main body
午前７時５６分
Screen
00M1000EN.book
399 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Click [ 完了 ] (Done)
"FOMA PC setup software" operation
screen is launched when setup is complete.
Proceed to each setup.
水曜日
1If "FOMA PC setup software" is already
installed
The Following message is displayed.
Screen
Precautions during Installation of
FOMA PC Setup Software
1If "old W-TCP setup software" is
installed
The following message is displayed.
Screen
Delete “ 旧 W-TCP 設定ソフト ” (Older
version of W-TCP Setup Software) from
Add/Delete Programs in the Control Panel
Click [ はい ] (Yes) to automatically uninstall
the previously installed software followed
by the installation of FOMA PC setup
software.
1When [ キャンセル ] (Cancel) is clicked
during installation
When [ キャンセル ] (Cancel) or [いいえ ]
(No) is clicked during installation, and
when selected to not proceed further,
the following screen is displayed.
1If "Older version of Access Point Name
Setup Software" is installed, the
following message is displayed.
Screen
Click [ 継続 ] (Continue) to proceed with the
installation, and [ 中止 ] (Cancel) to
terminate.
Screen
1If old versions of "FOMA PC setup
software" is installed
The following message is displayed.
Screen
Setting up Data
Communication
Settings for Packet communication or 64K
data communication is made.
• Check that FOMA handset is properly connected
to PC before setting up. 3P414
Launch FOMA PC Setup Software
Click [ はい ] (Yes) to automatically uninstall
the old software followed by the installation
of FOMA PC setup software.
Using Data Communication
Click [ はい ] (Yes) to automatically
uninstall the old software followed by
the installation of FOMA PC setup
software.
午前７時５６分
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ プログラ
ム ” (Programs) y “FOMA PC 設定ソ
フト ” (FOMA PC Setup Software) y
FOMA PC 設定ソフト (FOMA PC
FOMA PC setup software)
399
00M1000EN.book
400 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
1Windows XP
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “すべてのプロ
グラム ” (All Programs) y “FOMA PC 設定
ソフト ” (FOMA PC setup software) y
“FOMA PC設定ソフト ” (FOMA PC setup
software)
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Be cautioned that large volume data exchanges
such as browsing web sites with images and
downloading large files using Packet
communication may result in high charges.
Click [ かんたん設定 ] (Simple
Settings)
Select “ パケット通信 ” (Packet
communication) then Click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
Screen
FOMA PC setup software is launched and
the operation screen is displayed.
Screen
Screen
Select “mopera 接続 ” (mopera
connection) then Click [ 次へ ] (Next)
See P424 if you wish to use other ISP than
"mopera".
Using Data Communication
400
Packet data communication using "mopera"
3P423
Packet data communication using other
Internet Service Providers 3P424
64K data communication setting using
"mopera" 3P427
64K data communication using other
Internet Service Providers 3P428
Screen
Simple Setting "Packet Data
Communication with mopera"
High speed packet data communication with
maximum speed of 384kbps via DoCoMo's
ISP service called "mopera" is set up.
• High speed packet data communication :
Maximum downlink speed 384kbps, Maximum
uplink speed 64kbps (excluding some models).
The charge is based on the volume of exchanged
data. You do not need not to worry about the
duration of connecting time. This service is based
on a best-effort connection where transmission
speed is affected by network traffic and
communication infrastructure.
Click [OK]
Please wait while the FOMA handset
connected to the PC obtains APN setup.
Screen
00M1000EN.book
401 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Enter the connection name then
Click [ 次へ ] (Next)
(Windows Me, Windows 98)
Specify the desired connection name.
Enter a recognizable name in “ 接続名”
(Connection Name) field.
This field is case sensitive. Enter name
accurately.
Invalid characters: ¥ / : * ? ! | " (single byte
only) cannot be accepted.
Screen
Select user when using Windows XP or
Windows 2000.
Enter the username and password
provided by the ISP. Enter accurately. The
fields are case sensitive.
Screen
午前７時５６分
Check “ 最適化を行う ” (Optimize)
then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
"W-TCP Settings" necessary for Packet
communication is optimized. This message
will not be displayed if it is already
optimized.
Reboot PC to validate the change.
Input username/password then
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
When “mopera接続” (mopera connection) is
selected, username/password are entry
can be omitted.
(Windows XP, Windows 2000)
Screen
Confirm settings and Click [ 完了 ]
(Done)
A list of all setting information is displayed.
Check that all settings are properly
configured.
A shortcut is created automatically if “ デス
クトップにダイヤルアップのショート
カットを作成する ” (Create Dial-up
Networking shortcut on desktop) is
selected.
Click [ 戻る ] (Back) to modify setting
information.
Using Data Communication
Screen
401
00M1000EN.book
402 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
After acquiring handset settings, “ パケット
通信設定” (Packet communication settings)
screen is displayed.
Specify a name in the APN input field
The field is case sensitive. Enter accurately.
Invalid characters: ¥ / : * ? !<> | " (single
byte only) cannot be accepted
If “ 発信者番号通知を行う ” (display ID
number) is selected, Phone number. will be
notified to the receiver while making a call.
mopera.ne.jp is set by default in the “ 接続先
(APN)の選択 ” (Select APN) field.
Screen
午前７時５６分
Click [OK]
Reboot PC to validate the changes. Click
[はい] (Yes) if prompted by reboot selection
screen.
Execute the connection 3P429
Screen
Simple Setting "Packet Data
Communication Setting Using Other ISP's"
High speed packet data communication with
maximum speed of 384kbps is set up.
Using Data Communication
• High speed packet data communication :
Maximum downlink speed 384kbps,
Maximum uplink speed 64kbps (excluding some
models). The charge is based on the volume of
exchanged data. You do not need not to worry
about the duration of connecting time. This service
is based on a best-effort connection where
transmission speed is affected by network traffic
and communication infrastructure.
• Be cautioned that large volume data exchanges
such as browsing web sites with images and
downloading large files using Packet
communication may result in high charges.
Click [ かんたん設定 ] (Simple
setting)
Select “ パケット通信 ” (Packet
communication) then Click [ 次へ ]
(Next).
Select “その他” (Others) then Click [
次へ ] (Next)
Click [OK]
Please wait while the FOMA handset
connected to the PC obtains APN setup.
402
Set up Packet communication
Set up APN
mopera.ne.jp is pre-registered by default as
the first cid.
Click [ 追加 ] (Add) to display “ 接続先 (APN)
の追加 ” (Add APN) to specify the desired
APN in the field. The APN must support
FOMA Packet communication. Click [OK].
You are reverted to the “接続先(APN)設定 ”
(set up APN) screen.
Only single byte alphanumerical
characters, (-) dash, and (.) full stop, can be
entered in the APN field.
Up to 10 cid can be registered.
• Select “PDP-PPP 方式 ” (PDP-PPP
connection) or “PDP-IP 方式 ” (PDP-IP
connection) from “ ダイヤルアップ種別 ”
(Dial-up Networking types) if field “ ダイ
ヤルアップの表示 ” (Display Dial-up
Networking) is set to “ 全表示 ” (Display
all) 3P435
00M1000EN.book
403 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Configure Advanced Settings (TCP/
IP)
Click [詳細情報の設定] (Advanced settings)
in “ パケット通信設定 ” (Packet
communication settings) to display “IP アド
レス ” (IP Address) and “ ネームサーバー ”
(Name Server) setting screen. Input
necessary information related to ISP and
LAN Dial-up Networking where required.
水曜日
午前７時５６分
username and password provided by ISP
must be entered correctly. Note that fields
are case sensitive.
Select “ 最適化を行う ” (Optimize)
then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
“W-TCP 設定 ” (W-TCP setting) necessary
for Packet communication is optimized.
This screen is not displayed if already
optimized. (Proceed to step12)
Select APN then click [OK]
Back to Step 5.
The APN list set in Step 6 is displayed in the
“ 接続先 (APN) の選択 ” (Select APN) dialog.
Verify connection with designation
(APN) in “ 接続先 (APN) の選択 ”
(Select APN) menu then click
[ 次へ ] (Next)
username and password then
j Set
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select
user.
(Windows XP, Windows 2000)
setting information then click
l Verify
[ 完了 ] (Done)
All configured settings are listed. Verify that
there are no errors in the setup information.
A shortcut on desktop will be created
automatically if “ デスクトップにダイヤル
アップのショートカットを作成する ”
(Create Dial-up Networking shortcut on
desktop) is selected.
Click [ 戻る ] (Back) to change settings
Screen
(Windows Me, Windows 98)
Screen
Using Data Communication
Screen
Screen
m Click [OK]
Reboot PC to validate changes. Click
[ はい ] (Yes) if prompted by the reboot
selection screen.
Execute the connection 3P429
403
00M1000EN.book
404 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Invalid characters: ¥ / : * ? ! < > | " (single
byte only) are not accepted.
Select "FOMA M1000" for modem name.
Simple Settings "64K Data
Communication Setting Using mopera"
64Kbps data communication is set up.
DoCoMo's ISP "mopera" is used.
• Charges are based on the duration of connecting
time
Click [ かんたん設定 ] (Simple
setting)
Select “64K データ通信 ” (64K data
communication) then click [ 次へ ]
(Next).
Screen
Set username and password then
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
User may ignore this step if mopera
connection is selected.
Screen
(Windows XP, Windows 2000)
Screen
Select “mopera 接続 ” (mopera
connection) then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Using Data Communication
See P428 to use ISP connection other than
"mopera"
(Windows Me, Windows 98)
Screen
Screen
Enter APN and select modem then
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
“64K データ通信設定 ” (64K Data
communication) dialog is displayed.
Specify a name as you wish in “ 接続名”
(Connection) field.
This field is case sensitive. Enter name
accurately.
404
In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select a
user.
Setup information provided by ISP must be
entered correctly. Note that fields are case
sensitive.
00M1000EN.book
405 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Verify setup information then click
[ 完了 ] (Done)
Connection name must be entered. The
field is case sensitive. Enter accurately.
Note that fields are case sensitive.
Invalid characters: ¥ / : * ? ! < > | " (single
byte only)
All configured settings are listed. Verify that
there are no errors in the setting
information.
A shortcut on desktop is created
automatically if “ デスクトップにダイヤル
アップのショートカットを作成する ”
(Create Dial-up Networking shortcut on
desktop) is selected.
Click [ 戻る ] (Back) to change settings.
Screen
Screen
When using the accompanying FOMA-USB
cable, select "FOMA M1000" (FOMA
M1000) as modem.
Enter the information provided by ISP
correctly. The fields are case sensitive and
accept only single byte characters. The
phone number is notified once connected if
“発信者番号通知を行う” (Display caller ID)
is selected.
Click [OK]
Execute the connection 3P429
Simple Setting "64K Data
Communication with Other ISP"
Select “64K データ通信 ” (64K data
communication) then click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
Select “ その他 ” (Other) then click [
次へ ] (Next)
Enter Dial-up Networking
information then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Set up username and password
then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select a
user.
Using Data Communication
• Charges are based on duration of time connected.
Click [ かんたん設定 ] (Simple
setting)
Configuring Advanced setting
(TCP/IP setting)
Click “ 詳細情報の設定 ” (Advanced setting)
to display “IP アドレス ” (IP Address) and
“ ネームサーバー ” (Name Server) setting
dialog. Input necessary information related
to ISP or LAN Dial-up Networking where
required.
Setting is performed for 64K data
communication at 64Kbps.
午前７時５６分
If connecting to another ISP that possesses
synchronized ISDN 64K access points, the
following information need to be registered.
- Connection name (optional)
- Modem selection (FOMA M1000)
- Dial-up phone number
405
00M1000EN.book
406 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
(Windows XP, Windows 2000)
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Click [OK]
Execute the connection 3See right
Screen
Executing the Set
Connection
Connection and disconnection using the
settings configured with the FOMA PC Setup
software is described in this section.
(Windows Me, Windows 98)
• Connection from dial-up icon is valid only for the
FOMA handset used to configure with the icon.
Install connection setup file again if connecting
with another FOMA handset.
Click connection icon
on the PC
Click [ ダイヤル ] (Dial) and connect
Screen
Click “ ダイヤル ” (Dial) without entering the
“ ユーザ名 ” (Username)and “ パスワード ”
(Password) if mopera is selected. Enter
“ ユーザ名 ” (Username)and “ パスワード ”
(Password) and click “ ダイヤル ” (dial) if
another ISP or dial up connection is
selected.
No need to enter password again if “ パス
ワードを保存する ” (Save password) is
selected.
Set username and password information
accurately according to the information
provided by the ISP. The fields are case
sensitive.
Using Data Communication
Verify setup information then click
[ 完了 ] (Done)
A list of all settings is displayed. Check that
all settings are properly configured.
A shortcut is created automatically if “デス
クトップにダイヤルアップのショート
カットを作成する ” (Create Dial-up
Networking shortcut on desktop) is
selected.
Click [ 戻る ] (Back) to change settings.
Screen
Screen
Click [OK] upon verifying
connection
The Following screen is displayed when
connecting the dial up normally.
• The message is not displayed if “ 接続 ”
(connection) has been set to hide the
message previously.
406
00M1000EN.book
407 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Right click on the “W-TCPアイコン ” (WTCP icon) in the task tray, and click “ 常駐さ
せない ” (terminate in task tray).
Disconnecting
Closing the web browser does not always
guarantee disconnection from the network.
Disconnect the connection by following the
steps below.
Click dial up icon
in task tray on PC
screen
Right click
Dial up icon
Click
The connection screen is displayed.
Click [ 切断 ] (Disconnect)
Terminating active programs
The following messages will be displayed if
uninstallation is attempted while “FOMA PC
設定ソフト ” (FOMA PC Setup software) or
“W-TCP 設定 ” (W-TCP setting) is running.
Stop uninstalling and close all active
programs.
Screen
Screen
Screen
NOTE
• The displayed data speed on the PC may be
different from the actual speed.
Uninstalling FOMA PC
Setup Software
Before Uninstallation
Undo all changes made for the FOMA
handset settings before uninstalling the
FOMA PC setup software.
Disable “W-TCP 設定 ” (W-TCP
setting) in task tray
Launch “ アプリケーションの追加と
削除 ” (Add/Remove Programs) in
Windows
1Windows XP
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ コントロール
パネル ” (Control Panel) y “ プログラムの
追加と削除 ” (Add/Remove Programs)
Using Data Communication
Uninstalling
1Windows Me, Windows 98 or Windows
2000
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ 設定 ”
(Settings) y “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel) y “ プログラムの追加と削
除 ” (Add/Remove Programs)
"アプリケーションの追加と削除のプロパ
ティ ” (Add/Remove Applications
properties) will be displayed in Windows Me
or Windows 98.
407
00M1000EN.book
408 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Select “FOMA PC 設定ソフト ”
(FOMA PC Setup software) y click [
変更と削除 ] (Change/Delete)
午前７時５６分
Optimization of W-TCP is disabled after
PC is rebooted.
Screen
Select “NTT DoCoMo FOMA PC設定ソフト ”
(NTT FOMA PC Setup software)
Screen
Click here
Verify the program to delete y click
[ はい ] (Yes)
Uninstallation begins.
Screen
Click [OK] Installation of FOMA PC
setup software is completed.
W-TCP Setting
W-TCP Roles
“W-TCP 設定 ” (W-TCP Setting) is a "TCP
Parameters setting tool" to optimize TCP/IP
performance for Packet communication in
FOMA network.
Setting this software is required to fully utilize
FOMA handset communication performance.
Setting/Disabling the Optimization.
Windows XP
Each Dial-up Networking can be optimized
separately in Windows XP.
Screen
Launch the program
Using Data Communication
1To operate from FOMA PC Setup software
Click [W-TCP 設定 ] (W-TCP setting) in “マ
ニュアル設定 ” (Manual setting) after
launching the program
Screen
1Disabling “W-TCP最適化 ” (Optimizing
W-TCP)
Displays following message if “W-TCP 最
適化 ” (Optimizing W-TCP) is performed.
Click [ はい ] (Yes) to uninstall
1To operate from task tray
Click W-TCP icon in task tray.
Left Click
Screen
408
00M1000EN.book
409 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Conduct the following operations
1When system setting is not optimized
Click [ 最適化を行う ] (Optimize)
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1When disabling optimization
a Click [ システム設定 ] (System setting)
in “W-TCP設定 ” (W-TCP setting)
b Click [ 最適化を解除する ] (Disable
optimization)
Screen
Screen
"(W-TCP (Dial-up Networking) setting)" is
displayed. Select the desired Dial-up
Networking and click [ 実行 ] (Execute) to
optimize system setting or Dial-up
Networking.
System setting is optimized after PC is
rebooted by following the instructions
displayed.
1When system setting is already
optimized
Screen
Optimization is disabled after PC is
rebooted by following the instructions
displayed.
Windows Me, Windows 2000 or Windows
98
Launch program
1When operating from FOMA “PC 設定ソ
フト ” (FOMA PC Setup software)
Click [W-TCP設定] (W-TCP setting) in “マ
ニュアル設定 ” (Manual setting) after
launching program
Left Click
“W-TCP(ダイヤルアップ )設定 ” (W-TCP
(Dial-up Networking) setting) is displayed.
Perform necessary settings to make
changes.
System setting is optimized after PC is
rebooted by following the instructions
displayed.
Conduct the following operations
1If it is not optimized
Click [ 最適化を行う ] (Optimize)
Using Data Communication
1When operating from Task tray
Click (W-TCP icon) in task tray.
409
00M1000EN.book
410 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Setting up APN
APN for Packet communication is set up.
Screen
Up to 10 APN numbers can be set up.
Numbers from 1 to 10 can be assigned to the
cid's.
The cid is used to specify connection for
Packet communication.
Optimization is enabled after PC is
rebooted by following the instructions
displayed.
1If it is already optimized
“ 現在、最適化されています。” (Already
optimized) message is displayed in “W-TCP
設定 ” (W-TCP Setting)
"mopera" is pre-registered as 1 in the cid list
by default. Other APNs must be assigned a
number from in 2 to 10.
• Check that FOMA handset is properly connected
to PC before setting up 3P414
Click [ 接続先 (APN) 設定 ] (APN
Setting) after launching “FOMA PC
設定ソフト ” (FOMA PC Setup
software)
Screen
Screen
Using Data Communication
410
Click [ 最適化を解除する ] (Disable
optimization) to disable settings resulting
from transmission with devices other than
the FOMA handset.
Optimization is disabled after PC is
rebooted by following the instructions
displayed.
Click [OK] in FOMA handset setting
screen.
Load registered APN information by
accessing connected FOMA handset
automatically.
• Launching is disabled if FOMA handset
is not connected
Setting up APN
Screen
00M1000EN.book
411 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Adding/Editing/Deleting APN
Loading APN Setting in FOMA Handset
1When Adding an APN
Click [ 追加 ] (Add) in “ 接続先 (APN) 設定 ”
(APN Setting)
APN setting can be retrieved by manually
accessing the FOMA handset
1When Editing registered APN
Select desired APN from list in “ 接続先
(APN) 設定 ” (APN Setting) yClick [ 編集 ]
(Edit)
• You can select from “PDP-PPP 方式 ”
(PDP-PPP connection)or “PDP-IP 方式 ”
(PDP-IP connection) to add/edit an APN
if “ ダイヤルアップの表示 ” (Display
Dial-up Networking) is set to “ 全表示”
(Display all) 3P435
1When Deleting registered APN
Select desired APN from list in “ 接続先
(APN) 設定 ” (APN Setting) yClick [ 削除 ]
(Delete)
• APN Registered in cid 1 cannot be
deleted.
Creating Dial-up Networking
Dial-up Networking for Packet communication
can be created from an added/edited APN in
“ 接続先 (APN) 設定 ” (APN setting), and be
saved in FOMA handset.
“ パケット通信用ダイヤルアップの作成 ”
(Create Dial-up Networking for Packet
communication) is displayed
• Perform Step 5 if mopera is selected as
the APN.
Enter desired APN name and click
“ アカウント・パスワードの設定 ”
(Setting up account /password)
Enter username and password then
click [OK]
Loading APN Setting Information from File
APN setting saved in PC can be re-edited and
written to FOMA handset.
Click “ ファイル ” (File) y “ 開く ”
(Open)in “ 接続先 (APN) 設定 ” (APN
setting)
Writing APN Setting Information to FOMA
Handset
Displayed APN setting can be written to
FOMA handset
Click [ はい ] (Yes)
• In Windows XP or Windows 2000, a user
is selected.
• Click [ 詳細情報の設定 ] (Advanced
setting) in “パケット通信用ダイヤルアッ
プの作成 ” (Create Dial-up Networking
for Packet communication) if IP address
and DNS setting are provided by your
ISP. Then click [OK] after registering
required information.
Using Data Communication
Click ファイル (File) y “ 名前を付け
て保存 ” (Save as)/“ 上書き保存 ”
(Save) in “ 接続先 (APN) 設定 ” (APN
Setting)
Select an added/edited APN in “接続
先 (APN) 設定 ” (APN Setting), and
click [ ダイヤルアップ作成 ] (Create
Dial-up Networking)
Write to FOMA handset confirmation
screen is displayed.
Saving Setting Information info a file
APN setting information registered in FOMA
handset can be backed up, and APN setting
information in edit mode can be saved.
Click “ファイル” (File) y “FOMA端末
からの設定を取得 ” (Retrieve setting
from FOMA handset) in “ 接続先
(APN) 設定 ” (APN setting)
Click FOMA“端末へ設定を書き込む”
(Save in FOMA handset) in “ 接続先
”(APN) 設定 (APN setting)
411
00M1000EN.book
412 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Click [FOMA 端末へ設定を書き込む ]
(Write settings to FOMA handset)
and perform writing
水曜日
Displaying Dial-up
Networking Type
Select from “PDP-PPP 方式 ” (PDP-PPP
connection)or “PDP-IP 方式 ” (PDP-IP
connection)* from Dial-up Networking type if
“ ダイヤルアップの表示 ” (Display Dial-up
Networking) is set to “ 全表示 ” (Display all).
Select “PPPのみ表示 (PDP-IP方式のみ表示／
設定可 )” (Display only PPP (Display/Set up
only PDP-IP connection)) normally.
*:
Assigning COM Port
The COM port of the PC is assigned to the
FOMA handset to manually perform
connection setting. This COM port can be
changed. Normally, however, set it to “自動設
定 (推奨 )” (Auto setting (recommended)) .
Click “ メニュー” (Menu) y “ 通信設
定 ” (Connection setting) after
launching program
“PDP-PPP方式 ” (PDP-PPP connection) is
Packet communication using Point-to-Point
protocol. “PDP-PPP方式 ” (PDP-PPP
connection) is used to connect to mopera
(mopera)etc. Contact your ISP or network
administrator to check connection protocol of
APN.
Click “ メニュー” (Menu) y “ 通信設
定 ” (Connection setting) after
launching program
Set up screen is displayed.
Using Data Communication
Set up screen is displayed.
Screen
Screen
Select “PPP のみ表示 ”(Display only
PPP)/“ 全表示 (Display All)” in “ ダイ
ヤルアップの表示 ” (Display Dial-up
Networking)
Click [OK]
Select “COM ポート指定 ” (Assign
COM port) , and assign COM Port
COM Port number is displayed in COM.
412
Click [OK]
Assigned COM Port is set up.
• Use “ ハイパーターミナル ” (Hyper
terminal) which is accompanied with
Windows to check COM port 3P440
NOTE
• APN information are stored in FOMA handset.
To connect another FOMA handset set up APN
again.
• If you wish to continue to use the same APN as
that registered in the PC, register the APN to the
same number (cid) in the FOMA handset.
• If the COM port connecting the FOMA handset
is recognized by the PC as greater than COM20
then loading and writing of APN information is
disabled. In these cases, use “ハイパーターミ
ナル” (Hyper Handset) which is accompanied
with Windows. 3P440
午前７時５６分
00M1000EN.book
413 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Setting up Dial-up Networking
You can set up Dial-up Networking for Packet
communication/64K data connection without
using FOMA PC setup software. The flow is
explained below.
Set up Packet
communication
Set up 64K data
connection
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1AT Commands
AT Commands consist of commands for
controlling modems.
The FOMA handset supports standard AT
commands, some extended commands
and proprietary AT commands.
• Detailed settings of “ データ通信” (data
connection) or FOMA handset can be
checked with AT Command entries.
How to attach 3P414
Install connection setup file (driver). 3P416
NOTE
Check COM port
Check COM port.
3P437
Set up APN
Set up APN 3P440
• Set *9601 as connection number when using
DoCoMo's ISP "mopera" for 64K data
connection.
• Set “ 発信者番号の通知／非通知 ” (Caller ID
display ON/OFF) as required. Set to 通知 (ON)
to use "mopera".
• Set “その他の設定” (Other settings) as required.
FOMA is operational with default settings.
• Contact your ISP or network administrator for
further setup details.
• Set up is not required
with "mopera".
Checking COM Port
Set up caller ID
Set up to display/hide caller ID. 3P442
Other settings
This section explains about procedures to
verify COM Port number.
The verified COM port is used for APN setting
(3P440).
Set up Dial-up Networking
• Contact your ISP or network administrator for
further setup details.
• Windows XP users
Set up APN 3P438
• Windows 2000 users
Set up APN 3P439
• Windows Me users
Set up APN. 3P439
• Windows 98 users
Set up APN. 3P439
Connect Dial-up Networking 3P451
• There is no need to check modem when if using
DoCoMo's ISP "mopera" APN setup is not
necessary, then. Proceed to “ 発信者番号の通知／
非通知を設定します ” (Display/hide caller ID)
(3P442)
1About APN and cid
Unlike 64K data connection, a regular
telephone number is not used for Packet
communication. APN is used instead.
Using Data Communication
Perform other settings. (AT Command) 3P453
You are required to specify COM port number
assigned to "FOMA M1000" (modem)
embedded after installation of connection
setup file when setting up the APN.
• The (cid) registration number 1 to 10 are
registered in FOMA handsets as part of the
APN when APN numbers are set up.
• APN is managed by cid (registration number
from 1 to 10). Entering (*99***#)
connects to the corresponding APN.
• "mopera" is pre-registered to 1 in the cid list
by default as ("mopera.ne.jp"). "mopera" can
413
00M1000EN.book
414 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
easily be used by entering the number
(*99***1#). Use cid 2 to 10 to register other
APNs.
• APNs can be registered like registering
contact information to a mobile phone. The
table below summarizes differences and
similarities when compared to a contact list in
a mobile phone.
Item to compare
Registration data
APN
Setting
Phone
number
cid
Memory
number in
contact list
Registration Registrati
process
on via PC
Registrati
on via
mobile
phone
How to use
○ (Using
FOMA PC
Setup
software)
Name of
intended
party
Using Data Communication
–
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ コント
ロールパネル ” (Control Panel)
Screen
○ (Using
dedicated
software)
× (Unable ○
to
confirmed)
Specify cid
and
connect
午前７時５６分
Checking COM Port in Windows XP
Contact
list in
handset
APN
–
水曜日
Search
contact list
and call
Click “ プリンタとその他のハード
ウェア ” (Printer and other
hardware) in “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel) y “ 電話とモデムのオ
プション ” (Telephone and modem
options)
Screen
Enter
phone
number
and dial
from
FOMA
handset
Enter “ 市外局番／エリアコード ”
(Area code) if “ 所在地情報 ”
(Location information) is displayed,
and click [OK]
Click “ モデム ” (Modem) tab.
Checking COM port in “ 接続先 ”
(Connection) list of FOMA M1000,
and click [OK]
The verified COM port is used for APN
setup.
414
00M1000EN.book
415 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
• Displayed messages and COM port
numbers may vary depending on your
PC.
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Enter “ 市外局番 ” (Area code) then
click [OK] if “ 所在地情報 ” (Location
information) is displayed
Click “ モデム ” (Modem) tab and
check COM port in “ 接続先 ”
(Connection) list of FOMA M1000
(FOMA M1000). Click [OK]
Screen
The verified COM port number is used for
APN Setup.
• Displayed message and COM port
number may vary depending on your PC.
Checking COM Port in Windows 2000
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ 設定 ”
(Settings) y “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel)
Screen
Screen
Checking COM Port in Windows Me/98
Click “ 電話とモデムのオプション ”
(Telephone and modem options) in
“ コントロールパネル ” (Control
Panel)
Screen
Using Data Communication
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ 設定 ”
(Settings) y “ コントロールパネル ”
(Control Panel)
Screen
415
00M1000EN.book
416 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Click [ モデム ] (Modem) in “ コント
ロールパネル ” (Control Panel)
If “ モデム ” (modem) icon is not displayed,
click “ すべてのコントロールパネルのオプ
ションを表示する ” (Display all options in
control panel).
Screen
Screen
Setting up APN
Default setting
cid1:mopera.ne.jp
cid2~10: never
Connection software for AT commands is
required to set up APN.
Check that FOMA M1000 is properly
set up then click “ 検出結果 ” (More
Info on the Diagnostics) tab
Setup procedures using Hyperterminal in
Windows is explained in this section.
• APN for Packet communication is set up. Up to 10
APNs with registration number 
1 to 10(3P437) can be set up.
• "mopera" is pre-registered to 1 in the cid list by
default as "mopera.ne.jp". Registration numbers
2 to 10 are recommended for use with other
APNs.
Screen
Using Data Communication
416
• The registered cid is used as the connection
number for the APN setting up Dial-up
Networking.
• Inquire your network administrator or ISP
regarding APN's other than mopera.
• AT commands may not be displayed in
Hyperterminal from Step 6 P441 onwards.
Check COM port to which FOMA
M1000 is set up and click [OK]
The verified COM port number is used for
APN Setup.
• Displayed message and COM port
number may vary depending on your PC.
• Entering in the following manner:
• ATE1
• Displays AT commands.

Connect FOMA handset with
accompanying USB cable 3P414
Turn on FOMA handset and connect
the other end of the USB cable to
PC
00M1000EN.book
417 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ すべての
プログラム ” (All Programs) y “ アク
セサリ ” (Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ハイパーター
ミナル ” (Hyperterminal)
午前７時５６分
Screen
Hyperterminal is launched.
1In Windows Me or Windows 2000
On the PC, click “ スタート ” (Start) y“ プ
ログラム ” (Program) y“ アクセサリ ”
(Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ハイパーターミナ
ル ” (Hyperterminal)
1In Windows98
Click Hypertrm.exe after clicking “ ハイ
パーターミナル ” (Hyperterminal)
Enter desired name in 名前 (name)
and click [OK]
Enter name as "sample" here as an
example
Screen
1When COM port in FOMA M1000 cannot
be selected
a Click [ キャンセル ] (Cancel)
“ 接続の設定 ” (Set up connection)
screen is closed.
b Click “ ファイル ” (File) and select “ プ
ロパティ ” (Properties)
c Select FOMA M1000 in “ 接続方法 ”
(Connection method) of “接続の設定”
(Set up connection) tab of “sampleのプ
ロパティ” (Sample properties) screen
d Deselect OFF “ 国／地域番号と市外局
番を使う” (Use country code and area
code)
e Click [OK]
Select FOMA M1000 in “ 接続方法 ”
(Connection method) then click
[OK]
1When COM port in FOMA M1000 can be
selected
Click [OK] in COM port properties.
• To check COM port number selected in
“ 接続方法” (Connection method)
(3P437), perform “COMポートを確認す
る ” (Check COM Port)
Enter APN then press
Using Data Communication
Screen
Enter in the following format
AT+CGDCONT=,"PPP", "APN"
 : Enter desired number between
2 to 10
If a cid is already set up, not that the new
CID overwrites the previous setting.
"APN" : Enter APN with double quotation
mark
"PPP" : Enter "PPP" as is
417
00M1000EN.book
418 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
APN setup is complete if OK is displayed.
Example: When XXX.abc is set up in cid 2
Enter "AT+CGDCONT=2,"PPP","XXX.abc"
$$"
Screen
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Caller ID can be set up with AT command before
performing Dial-up Networking
• Use *DGPIR command to setup caller ID to notify
or hide, or to reset to “設定なし ” (None) (default
value) (3P454)
Launch “ ハイパーターミナル ”
(Hyperterminal)
Set up caller ID display during
Packet communication
Enter in the following format
"AT*DGPIR="
1To Append 184 (hiding caller ID)
automatically when calling or answering
Enter AT*DGPIR=1
Check that if OK is displayed, and
click “ ファイル ” (File) y “ ハイパー
ターミナルの終了 ” (End
Hyperterminal)
Screen
Hyperterminal is closed.
Saving is not necessary when confirm save
screen is displayed.
1When APN settings are reset with AT
command
• cid=1 is reset to mopera.ne.jp (default value),
and cid=2 to 10 is unregistered.
Using Data Communication

AT+CGDCONT=
(When resetting
all cids)
AT+CGDCONT=
(When
resetting a specific cid)
1When checking APN with AT command
Click “ ファイル ” (File) y “ ハイパー
ターミナルの終了 ” (End
Hyperterminal) if [OK] is displayed
• Display current settings

AT+CGDCONT?
1When nothing is displayed as AT
command is entered

ATE1
Screen
Notifying/Hiding Caller ID
Default setting
Notify
• Caller ID can be turned on or off to enable/disable
notifying Caller ID to the designator during packet
connection. Use caller ID with care. Your caller ID
is valuable information.
418
1To Append 186 (notifying caller ID)
automatically when calling or answering
Enter AT*DGPIR=2
00M1000EN.book
419 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
1Setting up 186(Notify)/184(Hide) in
Dial-up Networking
186/184 can also be appended to a
number in Dial-up Networking.
* When 186/184 are setup in both DGPIR and
Dial-up Networking, the applicable settings
are described in the following table.
Dial-up
Networking
setup (when
cid=1)
*99***1#
184*99***1#
*Caller ID
display
setting with
DGPIR
command
Never
Hide
Notify
Notify
Never
Hide (Priority
given to 184
setup in
Dial-up
Networking)
Notify
Never
Hide
Notify
午前７時５６分
Setting up Dial-up
=1>
• Contact your ISP or network administrator to setup
and connect with another ISP.
Setting up Dial-up Connection in
Windows XP
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ すべての
プログラム ” (All Programs) y “ アク
セサリ ” (Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communications) y “ 新しい接続 ”
“ ウィザード ” (New connection
wizard)
Click [ 次へ ] (Next) in “ 新しい接続
ウィザード ” (New connection
wizard)
Notify
Hide
Hide
186*99***1#
Notify/hide
caller ID
水曜日
Notify (Priority
given to 186
setup in
Dial-up
Networking)
Screen
NOTE
Select “ インターネットに接続する ”
(Connecting to the Internet), and
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Using Data Communication
• Enter AT*DGPIR=0 to reset caller ID setup with
DGPIR command to "Never".
• Set caller ID setting to "Notify" when using
"mopera", DoCoMo's ISP service.
Screen
419
00M1000EN.book
420 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Select “ 接続を手動でセットアップす
る ” (Setting up connection
manually) then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Enter desired name in “ISP 名 ” (ISP
name) then click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Screen
Screen
Using Data Communication
420
Select “ ダイヤルアップモデムを使用
して接続する ” (Connection with
dial-up modem) then click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
“ デバイスの選択 ” (Select device) is
displayed, select “ モデム− FOMA
M1000(COMx)” (Modem-FOMA
M1000 (COMx)) then click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
“ デバイスの選択 ” (Select device) is only
displayed when multiple modems are
installed.
(COMx) is COM Port number displayed in
“COM ポートの確認 ” (Checking COM Port)
(3P437)
Screen
Enter APN number in “ 電話番号 ”
(Phone number) then click
[ 次へ ] (Next)
Screen
Leave “ユーザー名” (Username), “パ
スワード ” (Password) and “ パス
ワードの確認入力 ” (Confirm
password) blank, and click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
Entering of username and password is not
required for "mopera"
Enter “ ユーザー名 ” (Username), “ パスワー
ド ” (Password) and “パスワードの確認入
力 ” (Confirm password) provided by your
ISP or network administrator if connecting
to another ISP.
00M1000EN.book
421 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
setting in “ 全般 ” (General)
m Check
tab
Screen
Verify that “ モデム− FOMA M1000”
(Modem-FOMA M1000) in “ 接続の方法 ”
(Connection method) is selected if 2 or
more modems are connected to your PC.
Select if it is deselected.
Verify that “ ダイヤル情報を使う” (Use dial
up information) is not selected. Deselect
OFF if selected.
j Click [ 完了 ] (Done)
Displays newly created connection wizard.
Screen
Screen
“ ネットワーク ” (Network) tab
n Click
and perform each setup.
icon of newly created dial up,
l Select
and click “ファイル” (File) y “プロパ
Select PPP:Windows 95/98/NT4/2000,
Internet in “ 呼び出すダイヤルアップサー
バーの種類 ” (Dial up server)
Select “ インターネットプロトコル (TCP/
IP)” (Internet protocol(TCP/IP)) in “ この接
続は次の項目を使用します” (Use following
items in this connection)
• Settings to cannot be changed in “QoS パ
ケットスケジューラ ” (QoS Packet
Scheduler)
ティ” (Properties)
Screen
Using Data Communication
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ すべての
プログラム ” (All Programs) y “ アク
セサリ ” (Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ネットワーク
接続 ” (Network connection)
Screen
o Click [ 設定 ] (Setting)
421
00M1000EN.book
422 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
all checkboxes then click
p Deselect
[OK]
水曜日
[OK] in “ ネットワーク ”
q Click
(Network) tab screen
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ プログラ
ム ” Program) y “ アクセサリ ”
(Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ネットワーク
とダイヤルアップ接続 ” (Network
and dial up connection)
Click [OK] in “ 電話とモデムのオプ
ション ” (Telephone and modem
option)
Click [ 次へ ] (Next) in “ ネットワーク
の接続ウィザード ” (Network
connection wizard)
Click “ 新しい接続の作成 ” (Create
new connection) icon in “ ネット
ワークとダイヤルアップ接続 ”
(Network and dial up connection)
Using Data Communication
Screen
Enter “ 市外局番 ” (Area code) then
click [OK] if “ 所在地情報 ” (Location
information) is displayed
“ 所在地情報 ” (Location information) is
displayed when launching “ 新しい接続の作
成 ” (Create new connection) for the first
time in Step2.
From the second launch onwards, this is
not displayed. “ ネットワークの接続ウィ
ザード ” (Network connection wizard) is
displayed instead. Proceed to Step5 when
displayed.
Screen
Setting up Dial-up Networking in
Windows 2000
午前７時５６分
Screen
Select “ インターネットにダイヤル
アップ接続する ” (Dial up
connection to the Internet) then
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Screen
422
00M1000EN.book
423 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Select “ インターネット接続を手動で
設定するか、
またはローカルエリア
ネットワーク (LAN) を使って接続し
ます ” (Connect to the Internet
manually or via Local Area
Network(LAN)) then click [ 次へ ]
(Next)
Screen
午前７時５６分
Screen
APN number in “ 電話番号 ”
j Enter
(Telephone number) then click [ 詳細
設定 ] (Advanced setting)
Deselect “市外局番とダイヤル情報を使う”
(Use area code and dial up information).
Select “ 電話回線とモデムを使ってイ
ンターネットに接続します ”
(Connect to the Internet with
telephone line and modem) then
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Screen
Enter the information provided by your ISP
in “ 接続の種類 ” (Connection type) and “ ロ
グオンの手続き ” (Log on process)
Verify that FOMA M1000 is displayed
in “ インターネットへの接続に使うモ
デムを選択する ” (Select modem for
Internet connection) then click
[ 次へ ] (Next)
Using Data Communication
Screen
Set each settings in “ 接続 ”
(Connection) tab then click “ アドレ
ス ” (Address) tab as shown
Screen
Select FOMA M1000 if FOMA M1000 is not
displayed.
• The following message is not displayed if
modems other than FOMA M1000 are
not installed.
423
00M1000EN.book
424 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Click “アドレス” (Address) tab, and
Enter the desired name in “ 接続名 ”
l set
IP address or DNS (Domain
(Connection) then click [次へ] (Next)
Name Service) as shown the click
[OK]
Enter the information such as “IPアドレス”
(IP address) or “ISPによるDNSアドレスの
自動割り当て ” (DNS(Domain Name
Service) address auto-assigned by ISP)
provided by your ISP or network
administrator in order to connect to an ISP
other than "mopera".
Screen
Screen
“ いいえ ” (No) then click
p Select
[ 次へ ] (Next)
Screen
[ 次へ ] (Next) in “ インターネッ
m Click
トアカウントの接続情報 ” (Internet
accounts set up information)
“ユーザー名” (Username) and
n Leave
“パスワード” (Password) blank then
Using Data Communication
click [ 次へ ] (Next)
Username and password confirmation
screens are continuously displayed. Click
[OK] in each screen
Username and password are not required
for "mopera".
Enter “ ユーザー名 ” (Username) and “ パス
ワード” (Password) provided by your ISP or
network administrator in order to connect to
an ISP other than "mopera".
“今すぐインターネットに接
q Deselect
続するにはここを選び [ 完了 ] をク
リックしてください ” (Select here
and click [Done] to connect to the
Internet now) then click [ 完了 ]
(Done)
Screen
Screen
424
00M1000EN.book
425 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
newly created dial up icon,
r Select
then click “ ファイル ” (File) y “ プロ
パティ” (Properties)
Screen
Screen
u Click [ 設定 ] (Setting)
v Deselect all settings, then click [OK]
Check settings in “ 全般 ” (General)
s tab
Check if “モデム”−FOMA M1000 (ModemFOMA M1000) in “接続の方法” (Connection
method) is selected when 2 or more
modems are connected to PC. Select if it is
deselected.
Verify that “ ダイヤル情報を使う ” (Use for
dial up information) is deselected. Deselect
if it is selected.
Screen
[OK] in “ ネットワーク ”
w Click
(Network) tab
Setting up Dial-up Networking in
Windows Me/Windows 98
Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ プログラ
ム ” (Program) y “ アクセサリ ”
(Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ダイヤルアッ
プネットワーク ” (Dial-up
Networking)
Click [ 次へ ] (Next) in “ ダイヤルアッ
プネットワークへようこそ ”
(Welcome to Dial-up Networking)
Screen
Click “ ネットワーク ” (Network) tab,
t and
perform each setup
Select PPP:FWindows 95/98/NT4/2000,
Internet in “ 呼び出すダイヤルアップサー
バーの種類 ” (Dial up server).
Select only “ インターネットプロトコル
(TCP/IP)” (Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)) for
component.
This message is displayed when launching
Dial-up Networking for the first time. Click
[ 次へ ] (Next) to proceed to Step 4.
From the second time onwards, this is not
displayed. “ ダイヤルアップネットワー
ク ”(Dial-up Networking) in Step 3 is
displayed instead.
Using Data Communication
425
00M1000EN.book
426 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Enter APN number in “ 電話番号 ”
(Telephone number), then click [ 次
へ ] (Next)
Leave 市外局番 (Area code) blank.
Screen
Screen
Click “ 新しい接続 ” (New
connection) icon in “ ダイヤルアップ
ネットワーク ” (Dial-up Networking)
Check connection name (Desired)
then click [ 完了 ] (Done)
Screen
Screen
Using Data Communication
426
Enter desired name in “ 接続名 ”
(Connection name) then click [次へ]
(Next)
Verify that FOMA M1000 is displayed in “ モ
デムの選択 ” (Select modem).
• Select FOMA M1000 if FOMA M1000 is
not displayed.
Screen
Click スタート (Start) y “ プログラ
ム ” (Program) y “ アクセサリ ”
(Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ダイヤルアッ
プネットワーク ” (Dial-up
Networking)
00M1000EN.book
427 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Select newly created Dial-up
Networking icon then click “ ファイ
ル ” (File) y “ プロパティ”
(Properties)
Screen
Screen
Select “ 電話番号 ” (Phone number)
and “ 接続方法 ” (Connection
method) in “ 全般 ” (General) tab.
Deselect “市外局番とダイヤルのプロ
パティを使う ” (Use properties in
area code and dial)
Verify that FOMA M1000 is displayed in “ 接
続方法 ” (Connection method)
• Select FOMA M1000 if FOMA M1000 is
not displayed
1In Windows 98
Click “ サーバーの種類 ” (Server type) tab
and perform various settings.
Select “PPP: インターネット , Windows NT
Server, Windows 98” (PPP:Internet,
Windows NT Server, Windows 98) in “ ダイ
ヤルアップサーバーの種類 ” (Dial up
server).
Select only “ インターネットプロトコ
ル”(TCP/IP) (Internet protocol (TCP/IP)) for
component.
Click “ セキュリティ” (Security) tab,
and click [OK] without entering
Username and password
Screen
Screen
“ ネットワーク ” (Network) tab
j Click
and perform various settings.
Select “PPP:インターネット,Windows 2000/
NT,Windows Me” (PPP:Internet, Windows
2000/NT, Windows Me) in “ ダイヤルアップ
サーバーの 種類 ” (Dial up server)
Using Data Communication
Entering of Username and password is not
required for "mopera".
Enter “ ユーザー名 ” (Username) and “ パス
ワード” (Password) provided by your ISP or
network administrator for other ISP in order
to connect to an ISP other than "mopera".
1In Windows 98
Click [OK]
Select only “ インターネットプロトコ
ル”(TCP/IP) (Internet protocol (TCP/IP)) for
component.
427
00M1000EN.book
428 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Check setting if a message notifying the
completion of connection is not
displayed.
Using Dial-up Networking
Using Dial-up Networking for Packet
communication and 64K data connection
without the use of FOMA PC setup software
is explained in this section.
• Check that your FOMA handset is properly
connected to your PC before connecting.
Check connection between FOMA handset and
PC prior to establishing Bluetooth connection
Screen

Click “ スタート ” (Start) y “ すべての
プログラム ” (All programs) y “ アク
セサリ ” (Accessories) y “ 通信 ”
(Communication) y “ ネットワーク
接続 ” (Network connection)
Click connection icon
Select Dial-up Networking icon of ISP
name setup in Step7 of P444, then click
“ネットワークタスク” (Network task) y “こ
の接続を開始する ” (Start connection), or
click the connection icon.
Disconnecting
Disconnecting may not be completed by
closing the Internet browser. Disconnect by
performing the following procedures.
Dial-up
Networking icon
Connection screen is
displayed.
Click [ 切断 ] (Disconnect)
Using Data Communication
Screen
Screen
Check setting and click [ ダイヤル ]
(Dial)
Dial-up network is completed when a
connection in progress message is
displayed followed by a connection
established message.
• Check each setting and click [ 接続 ]
(Connect) when using an OS other than
Windows XP.
• Entering of a “ ユーザー名 ” (Username)
and “ パスワード ” (Password) is not
required to connect to "mopera".
428
Click Dial-up
Networking icon in
task tray
NOTE
• Transmission speed displayed on the PC may
vary from the actual transmission speed.
00M1000EN.book
429 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
AT Commands
AT Commands are commands for setting FOMA handset functions from a PC.
• AT Command input format.
[&F]
[&W]
[AT]
[M]
Reset to factory default.
Register setting. Called settings by ATZ Command.
Can be used in FOMA M1000 Command Port.
Can be used with FOMA M1000 (Modem).
AT Command
AT%V
Overview
Parameters/Description
Command Examples
Displays versions of
FOMA handset.
AT%V
Ver1.00
OK
Set the operating
conditions of the circuit
CD for DTE.
n=0
n=1
: Always keeps line CD signal ON
: Line CD signals vary according to
line connection status (default)
Set the operation
performed when circuit
ER signal received from
DTE is switched from ON
to OFF.
n=0
n=1
: Ignore status (assumed to be ON) AT&D1
: Online command mode is set
OK
when status changes from ON to
OFF
: Line is disconnected and OFF
LINE mode (default) is enabled
when status changes from ON to
OFF
Reset to factory default. If
the command is entered
during communication,
the handset is reset.
Only n=0 can be set (skippable)
Set how to control the
data set ready signal to
be output to DTE.
n=0
n=1
AT&S0
OK
AT&W n
[AT] [M]
Register current settings.
Only n=0 can be set (skippable)
AT *DGANSM=n
Set the reject/permit
setting mode for incoming
Packet communication.
The setting is only valid
for Packet communication
received immediately
after the command is
entered.
n=0
: Turn OFF reject (AT*DGARL)/
permit setting for incoming Packet
communication (default)
n=1 : Turn ON reject setting for incoming
Packet communication
n=2 : Turn ON permit setting for
incoming Packet communication
AT *DGANSM?
: Display currently settings
AT *DGANSM=0
OK
AT *DGANSM?
*DGANSM:0
OK
Set up APN to permit
incoming Packet
communication from APN
settings. Use 
parameters defined by
AT+CGDCONT.
n=0
AT*DGAPL =0,1
OK
AT *DGAPL?
*DGAPL:1
OK
AT *DGAPL =1
OK
AT *DGAPL?
OK
[M]
AT&C n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
AT&D n
n=2
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
AT&F n
[AT] [M]
AT&S n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT*DGAPL=n [,cid]
[M]
: Add APN defined by  to list of
APNs permitted for incoming
Packet communication
n=1 : Delete APN defined by  from
list of APNs permitted for incoming
connection
If  parameter is omitted, all the 
are added to/deleted from the list.
AT *DGAPL?
: Display permit incoming Packet
communication
Using Data Communication
[M]
: Always ON (default)
: DR signal ON at time of line
connection
AT&C1
OK
429
00M1000EN.book
430 ページ
AT Command
AT*DGARL=n[,cid]
２００４年１１月２４日
Overview
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
n=0
: Add APN defined by  to list of
APNs refused for incoming
connection
n=1 : Delete APN defined by  to list
of APNs refused for incoming
connection
If  parameter is omitted, all  are
added to/deleted from the list.
AT *DGARL?
: Display refused incoming
connection
AT *DGARL =0,1
OK
AT *DGARL?
*DGARL:1
OK
AT *DGARL =1
OK
AT *DGARL?
OK
The setting for notify or
hide made by this
command is valid when a
connection is sent or
received. The Dial-up
Networking settings can
also be used to append
186(ON) or 184(OFF) to
the dial-up connection.
3 P442
n=0
: Connecting to APN directly
(default)
n=1 : Send 184 to APN (always OFF)
n=2 : Send 186 to APN (always ON)
AT *DGPIR?
: Display current setting
AT *DGPIR =0
OK
AT *DGPIR?
*DGPIR:0
OK
Switch FOMA handset's
mode from online data
mode to online command
status without
disconnecting when
escape sequence
executed.
(Online Data Mode)
+++ (Unable to see the
display)
OK
Disconnection reason
display.

See Disconnection reason list 3 P460
AT+CEER
+CEER:36
OK
AT+CGDCONT
[M]
Set APN when sending
Packet communication.
3 P461
3 P461
AT+CGEQMIN
Register criteria value for
determining if QoS
(Quality of Service) sent
from network when PPP
Packet communication is
established, is acceptable
or not.
AT+CGEQMIN=[Parameters] 3 P461
AT+CGEQMIN=?
: Display all lists of settings
AT+CGEQMIN?
: Display current settings
3 P461
Set QoS (Quality of
Service) to request for the
network when PPP
Packet communication is
established.
AT+CGEQREQ= [Parameters] 3 P462
AT+CGEQREQ=?
: Display all lists of settings
AT+CGEQREQ?
: Display current settings
3 P462
Display FOMA handset's
version.
AT+CGMR
12345XXXXXXXXXXX
OK
Set whether to report
network service
registration status. Upon
receiving the status
report, "Within service
area" or "Outside service
area" will be displayed.
n=0
n=1
AT+CGREG=1
OK
(Set to report status)
AT+CGREG?
+CGREG:1,0
OK
(Outside service area)
(Move from Outside
service area to Within
service area)
+CGREG:1
[M]
AT *DGPIR=n
[M]
+++
[M]
AT+CEER
[M]
Using Data Communication
[M]
AT+CGEQREQ
[M]
AT+CGMR
[AT] [M]
AT+CGREG=n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
430
Command Examples
Set APN to refuse
incoming connection.
APN setting uses 
parameters defined by
+CGDCONT.
: OFF (default)
: ON (Report the status when it is
shifted between within service
area and Outside service area)
AT+CGREG?
: Display current setting
+CGREG:< n>,
: Parameter
stat :
0 Outside service area
1 Within service area
4 Unknown
5 Outside service area
(Roaming)
00M1000EN.book
431 ページ
AT Command
AT+CGSN
２００４年１１月２４日
Overview
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
AT+CGSN
12345XXXXXXXXXX
OK
Set if any error report in
FOMA handset
n=0
: Display ERROR and not result
code (default)
n=1 : +CME ERROR: Use result
code and display reason as
number
n=2 : +CME ERROR:User result
code and display reason as
characters
AT+CMEE?
: Display current settings
The right hand side is the
command examples when errors
in FOMA handset or connection.
AT+CMEE=0
OK
AT+CNUM
ERROR
AT+CMEE=1
OK
AT+CNUM
+CME ERROR:10
AT+CMEE=2
OK
AT+CNUM
+CME ERROR:SIM
not inserted
Display FOMA handset's
own number.
number: Telephone number
type : 129 or 145
129 : International access code does
not include +
145 : International access code
includes +
AT+CNUM
+CNUM:,"+8190XXXXXX
XX",145
OK
Display bearer types
before displaying
CONNECT result code
during line connection.
n=0 : Do not display (default)
n=1 : Display

: Display only "GPRS" for
Packet communication
(Display "SYNC", "AV32K",
"AV64K" for data connection)
AT+CR?
: Display current settings
AT+CR =1
OK
ATD *99 ***1#
+CR:GPRS
CONNECT
Set to use extend result
code for incoming
connection.
n=0
n=1
: Do not use (default)
: Use +CRING.+CRING
Form for +CRING is as follows
+CRING
: GPRS "PPP",,, ""
AT+CRC?
: Display current setting.
AT+CRC=0
OK
AT+CRC?
+CRC:0
OK
Set to display network
information indicating
"Within service area" or
"Outside service area".
n=0
n=1
: Not notifying (default)
: Notifying (when switching "Within
service area" and "Outside service
area")
AT+CREG?
: Display current settings
+CREG
: < n>,
: set value
stat :
0 Outside service area
1 Within service area
4 Unknown
5 Within service area (Roaming)
AT+CREG=1
OK
(Set to notify)
Display FOMA handset's
manufacturer.
AT+GMI
Motorola
OK
Display FOMA handset's
product name.
AT+GMM
FOMA M1000
OK
Display FOMA handset's
version.
AT+GMR
Ver1.00
OK
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CNUM
[M]
AT+CR=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CRC=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CREG=n
• OS dependant
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
AT+GMI
[M]
AT+GMM
[M]
AT+GMR
[M]
AT+CREG?
+CREG:1,0
OK
(Outside service area)
(Move from "Outside
service area" to "Within
service area")
+CREG:1
Using Data Communication
[AT] [M]
AT+CMEE=n
Command Examples
Display FOMA handset's
serial number.
431
00M1000EN.book
432 ページ
AT Command
AT+IFC=n,m
２００４年１１月２４日
Overview
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
: DCE by DTE
: DTE by DCE
Each set value for n,m
0 : No flow control
1 : Perform XON/XOFF flow control
2 : Perform RS/CS (RTS/CTS) flow
control
Default: n,m=2.2
AT+IFC?
: Display current settings
AT+IFC=2,2
OK
AT+WS46=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
Set wireless network for
FOMA handset.
n=22 : W-CDMA (WidebandCDMA) only
(default)
AT+WS46=22
OK
ATA
Perform the receiving
process while receiving
Packet communication or
64K data connection.
RING
ATA
CONNECT
Execute the previously
executed command. No
carriage return is
necessary.
A/
OK
Perform automatic call
process based on
parameters and dial-up
parameters to FOMA
handset.
ATD*99***# : Packet
communication
1 to 10 : APNs set in +CGDCONT

ATD*99***1#
CONNECT
Set AT+CBST=116,1,0
ATD : 64K data
connection
<64K connection>
AT+CBST=116,1,0
OK
ATD090XXXXXXXX
CONNECT
Set AT+CBST=131,1,0
ATD< phone number > : AV32K
connection

AT+CBST=131,1,0
OK
ATD090XXXXXXXX
CONNECT
Set AT+CBST=134,1,0
ATD< phone number > : AV64K
connection

AT+CBST=134,1,0
OK
ATD090XXXXXXXX
CONNECT
Sets the presence of
echo for DTE in
command mode.
n=0
n=1
: Echo "OFF"
: Echo "ON"(default)
ATE1
OK
Performs onhook action
to FOMA handset.
n=0
: Disconnect line (can be skipped)
(packet communication)
+++
ATH
NO CARRIER
Display the confirmation
code.
n=0
n=1
: Display "NTT DoCoMo"
: Display product name (same as
+GMM)
: Display version in PPP Packet
communication (same as +GMR)
ATI0
NTT DoCoMo
OK
ATI1
FOMA M1000
OK
: Return from online command
mode to offline data mode (can be
skipped)
ATO
CONNECT
[&F] [&W][AT] [M]
[M]
A/
[AT] [M]
ATD
Using Data Communication
[M]
ATE n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
ATH n
[M]
ATI n
n=2
[AT] [M]
ATO n
[M]
432
Command Examples
Set to control local flow
Return from online
command mode to offline
data mode during
connection.
n=0
00M1000EN.book
433 ページ
AT Command
ATQ n
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Overview
Set up to display/hide
result code to DTE.
n=0
n=1
Set number of rings until
FOMA handset receives
connection automatically.
n=0
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
Command Examples
: Display result code (default)
: Does not display result code
ATQ0
OK
ATQ1
(OK is not displayed this
time)
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
ATS0=n
n=1- 255
n=43
n=127
ATS2?
: Default
: Disabled
: Display current settings
ATS2=43
OK
ATS2?
043
OK
Set carriage return
character.
n=13
: Default (Only n=13. Can be
set)
: Display current settings
ATS3=13
OK
ATS3?
013
OK
ATS4?
: Default (Only n=10. Can be
set)
: Display current settings
ATS4=10
OK
ATS4?
010
OK
Set Back Space (BS)
character.
n=8
ATS5?
: Default (Only n=8. Can be set)
: Display current settings
ATS5=8
OK
ATS5?
008
OK
Set waiting time till end of
connection.
n=1 to 120 (default: n=60)(second)
Setting 121 to 255 is regarded as 120
ATS7? : Display current settings
ATS7=60
OK
ATS7?
060
OK
Set all result code to be
displayed in either
numerals or alphabet
characters.
n=0
: Send back a result code in
numerals
: Send back a result code in
alphabet characters (default)
ATV1
OK
Set whether to show
speed display in the
CONNECT display for the
connection.
Also detect busy tone or
dial tone.
n=0
: No dial tone detected, no busy
tone detect, no speed display
: No dial tone detected, no busy
tone detected, speed display
: Detect dial tone, no busy tone
detected, speed display
: No dial tone detected, detect dial
tone, speed display
: Detect dial tone, detect dial tone,
speed display (default)
ATX1
OK
ATS3?
[&F] [M]
ATS4=n
Set Line Feed (LF)
character.
n=10
[&F] [M]
ATS5=n
[&F] [M]
ATS7=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
ATV n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
ATX n
n=1
n=1
n=2
n=3
n=4
[&F] [&W]
ATZ
[AT] [M]
Reset to the status of
nonvolatile memory.
Disconnect the line if this
command is entered
during connection.
Using Data Communication
ATS0?
Set escape character.
[&F] [M]
ATS3=n
ATS0=0
OK
ATS0?
000
OK
: Receive automatically with
specified number of rings.
: Display current setting
[&F] [&W] [M]
ATS2=n
: Do not receive automatically
(default)
(Off line command mode)
ATZ
NO CARRIER
(On line command mode)
ATZ
OK
433
00M1000EN.book
434 ページ
AT Command
AT¥S
２００４年１１月２４日
Overview
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
Display current set of
commands and S register
setting.
Select type of response
code when connected.
n=0
[M]
AT¥V n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CPIN
n=1
Enter PIN in FOMA
handset.
Command Examples
AT¥S
E1 Q0 V1 X4 &
C1&D2&S0¥V0
S000=000
S002=043
S003=013
S004=010
S005=008
S006=005
S007=060
S008=003
S010=001
S030=000
S103=001
S104=001
OK
: Do no use expanded result code
(default)
: Use expanded result code
Format
AT¥V0
OK
Using Data Communication
: AT+CPIN="",
""
This command is to enter
PIN1, PIN2 or PIN unlock
number in FOMA handset
based on result code replied
by AT+CPIN?
PIN cannot possibly be
entered with this command
depending on result code
when AT+CPIN? is entered
even if PIN or PIN unlock code
is required.
Do not use this command in
order to change PIN. 
and  must be
surrounded with " " .
(+CPIN:READY is ready to
respond when +CPIN? is
entered) AT+CPIN="1234"
ERROR
Result of AT+CPIN?
+CPIN:READY:PIN1 code
PIN2
PIN1 unlock code, Unable to
input PIN2 unlock code
+CPIN:SIM PIN: Waiting to
enter PIN1
+CPIN:SIM PIN2: Waiting to
enter PIN2
+CPIN:SIM PUK: Locking
PIN1 (Possible to enter PIN1
unlock code)
+CPIN:SIM PUK2: Locking
PIN2 (Possible to enter PIN2
unlock code)
(+CPIN:SIM PIN2 is ready
to respond when +CPIN?
is entered)
AT+CPIN="1234"
OK
The right is the example of
PIN"1234" "and "12345678".
(+CPIN:READY is ready to
respond when +CPIN? is
entered)
AT+CPIN="12345678","12
34"
ERROR
(+CPIN:SIM PIN is ready
to respond when +CPIN?
is entered)
AT+CPIN="1234"
OK
(+CPIN:SIM PUK is ready
to respond when +CPIN?
is entered: PIN locked)
AT+CPIN="12345678","12
34"
OK
(+CPIN:SIM PUK2 is
ready to respond when
+CPIN? is entered: PIN
locked)
AT+CPIN="12345678","12
34"
OK
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN:READY
OK
[AT][M]
434
AT+CPIN=?
OK
00M1000EN.book
435 ページ
AT Command
AT+CLIP=n
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Overview
Display sender's caller ID
when 64K data
connection is received.
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
n=0
n=1
Result
m=0
m=1
m=2
No output result (default)
Output result
+CLIP (n,m)
Network setting that does not
notify caller ID
: Network setting that notifies
caller ID
: Unknown
[&F][&W][M]
AT+CLIR=n
Set to notify phone
number when sending
64K data connection.
[M]
ATS30=n
Disconnect handset if no
data is received or sent.
n=0
Command Examples
AT+CLIP=0
OK
AT+CLIP=?
+CLIP:(0,1)
OK
(+CLIP=1 Output result)
RING
+CLIP:
"090XXXXXXXX",177,
"123",136
: Use setting written in service
agreement
n=1
: Do not send Caller ID
n=2
: Send Caller ID (default)
Result : +CLIR(n, m)
m=0
: CLIR is not operating (always
notify)
m=1
: CLIR is operating (always does
not notify)
m=2
: Unknown
m=3
: CLIR Temporary mode (default;
does not notify)
m=4
: CLIR Temporary mode (default:
notify)
AT+CLIR=0
OK
n=0 : Inactive timer off (default)
n=0 to 255
ATS30=0
OK
AT+CLIR?
+CLIR:0,1
OK
AT+CLIR=?
+CLIR:(0-2)
OK
ATS30?
000
OK
ATS30=?
ERROR
[&F][M]
ATS103=n
Set to append and send
received sub address.
n=0
n=1
n=2
: *
: / (default)
: ¥ (yen symbol or backslash)
ATS103=0
OK
ATS103=?
ERROR
[&F][M]
ATS104=n
Set to append and send
outgoing sub address.
n=0
n=1
n=2
: #
: % (default)
: &
ATS104=0
OK
ATS104?
000
OK
ATS104=?
ERROR
[&F][M]
AT*DANTE
[M]
Using Data Communication
ATS103?
000
OK
Display reception level
with a number.
n=0
n=1
n=2
n=3
Reception level 0
Reception level 1
Reception level 2
Reception level 3
AT*DANTE
*DANTE:3
OK
AT*DANTE=?
*DANTE:(0-3)
OK
435
00M1000EN.book
436 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
AT Command
AT*DRPW
Overview
Display an index for
reception power of the
radio signal.
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Parameters/Description
Command Examples
AT*DRPW
*DRPW:0
OK
AT*DRPW=?
*DRPW:(0-75)
OK
[M]
Lists of Disconnected Reasons
Disconnected reasons for requested contents are as follows:
1Packet communication
Value
27
Reason
APN is not present or incorrect.
30
Disconnected from network.
33
Requested service option is not subscribed.
36
Connection is disconnected properly.
164K Data connection
Value
Using Data Communication
436
Reason
Specified number does not exist.
16
Connection is disconnected properly.
17
Unable to communicate because remote device is busy.
18
Call was made, but no response within the specified time.
19
Unable to communicate because remote device is busy calling.
21
Remote device rejected a call.
63
Network service and option are not valid.
65
Unavailable processing speed was specified.
88
You made a call to or received a call from a handset with different handset properties.
00M1000EN.book
437 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Command examples
Additional AT Commands Descriptions
1Invalid AT command
The following commands will not generate
errors but will not act as commands.
• AT (Enter only AT)
• ATT (Tone setting)
• ATP (Pulse setting)
• ATS6 (Specify duration of pause till
dialing commences)
• ATS8 (Specify duration of comma till
dialing commences)
• ATS10 (Set delay time for automatic
disconnection)
1Command name +CGDCONT[M]
• Overview
Set APN when sending packet
connection.
Although this command is a setup
command, it does not get stored to the
status of nonvolatile memory by &W,
and does not get reset by &F and &Z.
• Form
+CGDCONT=[[,"PPP"[ ,""]
]]
• Parameter descriptions
Set APN when sending Packet
communication. See examples in
command operation lists
*:
: 1 to 10
: Optional
 is the number used to control the
destination (APN) for the Packet
communication to be registered in
FOMA handset.
1~10 can be registered. =1 is set
as mopera.ne.jp as default but
overwrittable.
is optional connection name that
indicates each destination.
• Operation without parameter
+CGDCONT=
: Set default value
for all 
+CGDCONT=
: Set specified
 as default
+CGDCONT=? : Display list of
values that can be
configured
+CGDCONT?
: Display current
settings
1Command name:+CGEQMIN=[Parameter]
[M]
• Overview
Register criteria value to determine if
QoS sent from network when PPP
Packet communication established is
permitted.
4 ways to set up as stated in command
examples.
Although this command is a setup
command, it does not get stored to the
status of nonvolatile memory by &W,
and does not get reset by &F and &Z.
• Form
+CGEQMIN=[[,,[ ,] ] ]
• Parameter description
*
: 1 to 10
*
: None (default) or 64
*
: None (default) or 384
*:
 is the number used to control the
destination (APN) for the Packet
communication to be registered in
FOMA handset. 1 to 10 can be
registered.
In  and
, the minimum
connection speed [in kbps] is set for
both upload and download traffic
between FOMA handset and the base
station. If the parameter is set to None
(default), all speeds are permissible. If
64 and 384 are set, any connection at a
speed except the above limit is not
permitted, and the Packet
communication will not be connected.
• Operation without parameter
+CGEQMIN=
: Set default value for
all 
+CGEQMIN=
: Set specified 
as default value
Using Data Communication
*
*
Registered APN named abc (cid=3)
AT+CGDCONT=3,"PPP","abc"
OK
• Command examples
437
00M1000EN.book
438 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
4 ways to set up as states in command
examples. Set (1) as states value for
each s
(1) Command used to permit all speed
both upload and download
(when=2)
AT+CGEQMIN=2
OK
(2) Command used to permit only
64kbps upload and 384kbps
download (when=3)
AT+CGEQMIN=3,,64,384
OK
(3) Command used to permit 64kbps
upload and all speed download
(when=4)
AT+CGEQMIN=4,,64
OK
(4) Command used to permit all speed
upload and only 384kbps download
(when=5)
AT+CGEQMIN=5,,,384
OK
1Command name:
:+CGEQREQ=[Parameter] [M]
• Overview
Using Data Communication
Sets up QoS to request to the network
when PPP Packet communication is
established.
This set up is also set up as the default
value in one of the patterns stated in
the following command execution
example.
Although this command is a setup
command, it does not get stored to the
status of nonvolatile memory by &W,
and does not get reset by &F and &Z.
• Form
+CGEQREQ=[]
• Parameter Description
*:1 to 10
*:
 is the number used to control the
destination (APN) for the Packet
communication to be registered in FOMA
handset. 1 to 10 can be registered to
FOMA handset.
• Operation without parameter
+CGEQREQ=
: Set default value for
all s.
+CGEQREQ=
438
水曜日
午前７時５６分
: Set specified 
as default.
• Command examples
Only 1 way to set the command. The
contents are set by default for each cid.
Command used to require 64kbps
upload and 384kbps download
(when=3)
AT+CGEQREQ=3
OK
1Saving modem port command setting
values
Settings by AT commands are initialized
when FOMA handset is switched ON and
OFF, except APN setting by
AT+CGDCONT (3 P440), QoS settings
by AT+CGEQMIN and AT+CGEQREQ
commands, permit/reject setting mode for
incoming connection set by AT*DGAPL/
AT*DGARL/AT*DGANSM commands or
appending 184 or 186 for packet
connection by AT*DGPIR command.
Commands with [&W] can be saved by
entering
AT&W
after setting. And at the same time, other
settings with [&W] are also saved. These
values can be called by entering
ATZ
even if after FOMA handset was switched
ON and OFF.
00M1000EN.book
439 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Result Codes
1Result codes for data connection
No.
Text display
Description
OK
Operation performed properly.
CONNECT
Connected to their party.
RING
Incoming call.
NO CARRIER
Line disconnected.
ERROR
Unable to accept command.
NO DIALTONE
Unable to detect dial tone.
BUSY
Detect busy tone.
NO ANSWER
Completed connection. Timeout.
100
RESTRICTION
Network restriction in place.
101
DELAYED
Redial call restricted.
1Extended result codes
No.
Text display
Description
CONNECT 1200
Connected at 1200bps between FOMA handset and PC.
CONNECT 2400
Connected at 2400bps between FOMA handset and PC.
11
CONNECT 4800
Connected at 4800bps between FOMA handset and PC.
13
CONNECT 7200
Connected at 7200bps between FOMA handset and PC.
12
CONNECT 9600
Connected at 9600bps between FOMA handset and PC.
15
CONNECT 14400
Connected at 14,400bps between FOMA handset and PC.
16
CONNECT 19200
Connected at 19,200bps between FOMA handset and PC.
17
CONNECT 38400
Connected at 38,400bps between FOMA handset and PC.
18
CONNECT 57600
Connected at 57,600bps between FOMA handset and PC.
19
CONNECT 115200
Connected at 115,200bps between FOMA handset and PC.
20
CONNECT 230400
Connected at 230,400bps between FOMA handset and PC.
21
CONNECT 460800
Connected at 460,800bps between FOMA handset and PC.
1Connection protocol result code
No.
Text display
Description
PPPoverUD
Connect via PPPoverUD(BC=UDI, +CBST=116,1,0)
AV32K
AV (video-phone) connect via [32K]
AV64K
AV (video-phone) connect via [64K]
PACKET
Connect with PACKET
Using Data Communication
10
NOTE
• When ATVn command (3 P457) is set to n=1, the result code is displayed in the alphanumeric display format
(default). When the command is set to n=0, the result code is displayed in the numerical display format.
• To retain compatibility with a modem connected via conventional RS-232C, connection speed is displayed
but it differs from the actual connection speed because FOMA handset is connected to the PC with a USB
cable.
• When "RESTRICTION" message is displayed, (No.100), the network is busy. Please try later.
439
00M1000EN.book
440 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Examples of Result Codes
1When ATX0 is set
• Regardless of the settings of AT¥Vn
command ( 3 P459), only CONNECT is
displayed upon completion of
connection.
Text display example
: ATD*99***1#
CONNECT
Number display example
: ATD*99***1#
1When ATX1 is set
• When ATX1, AT¥V0 is set (default)
• Upon completion of connection, result
code is displayed in the following format:
CONNECT 
Text display example
: ATD*99***1#
CONNECT 460800
Number display example
: ATD*99***1# 1 21
Using Data Communication
• When ATX1, AT¥V1 is set*
• The code is displayed upon completion
of connection in the following format:
CONNECT PACKET /
/

Maximum 64kbps for sending and
maximum 384kbps for receiving
connection to mopera.ne.jp is displayed
as follows.
Text display example
: ATD*99***1#
CONNECT 460800
PACKET mopera.ne.jp /
64/ 384
Number display example
: ATD*99***1#
1 21 5
*:
440
When ATX1 and AT¥V1 are set at the
same time, it is likely that dial-up
connection will fail. Only use of AT¥V0
is recommended.
水曜日
午前７時５６分
00M1000EN.book
441 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Entering Characters
Character Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Entering Characters with Direct Input  . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Editing/Registering Fixed Phrases  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters  . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Registering Frequently Used Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Using Electronic Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Setting the Detail of Character Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Entering Characters with Indirect Input Method
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
441
00M1000EN.book
442 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Character Input
With FOMA handset, a character is entered by tapping a target character at a keyboard displayed
on the touch screen with the Stylus. Also, by switching the input method, a character can be
entered by a free draw. Since character input is needed in various situations of FOMA handset
operation, such as registering contacts, creating messages, and creating notes, it would be
convenient if you memorize the procedure beforehand.
Displaying Character Entry Screen
Tap the character input field where a character needs to be entered, and tap $$ on the Status bar
to display the character entry screen. Enter a target character by switching the input mode.
• Input mode 3 P467
• Input method 3 P466
• Switching input method 3 P467
In case of 50-character kana
syllabary keyboard
Input Method
There are following methods to enter characters with FOMA handset. Choose an input method
that suites you.
Entering Characters
Input method
Direct input
method
Indirect input
method
Description
Reference
50-character kana
syllabary keyboard
(Kana Keyboard)
From the keyboard arranged in the order of 50character kana syllabary, you can enter a character by
tapping a target character.
P469
Qwerty keyboard
From the keyboard arranged in alphabetical order, you
can enter a character by tapping a target character.
P471
Handwriting
A character is entered by writing a character on the
free draw input area, using the Stylus.
P478
Multi Tap
From the keyboard with two or more characters
assigned to one key, a character is entered by tapping
a key multiple times to switch the characters.
P496
From the keyboard with two or more characters
assigned to one key, a character is entered by Two
Tap operations
P500
Two Tap
442
00M1000EN.book
443 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Switching Input Method
Default setting
Kana keyboard
The input method used at the time of entering a character can be changed.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap "Handset" tab y
Text input and on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on
Text input setup screen, and tap Input method on Preferences
screen
• Tap $$ $$ at the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap $$ of input method you are setting y [Close] y [Done]
Input method is changed.
Input Mode
There are following input modes to enter a character. Entering text with a mixture of hiragana,
kanji, katakana, alphabet and numeric characters are performed by switching the input mode.
To switch the input mode, tap the keyboard for each input method, or tap the key to switch the
input mode in the free draw input screen.
Input mode
Key display
Description
[Hiragana]/[Kanji]/[Hira]/"あ / ア "
Hiragana, kanji, and double-byte
katakana can be entered.
Katakana
[Kata]/[Single-byte Kana]
Double-byte/single-byte katakana
can be entered.
Alphabet
[Ａｂｃ]/[Abc]/[Eng]/" 英数 "
Double-byte/single-byte alphabet
character can be entered.
Numeric
[Num]/[Eng]/[Ａｂｃ]/[Abc]/" 英数 "
Double-byte/single-byte numeric
character can be entered.
Symbol
[Mark]
Double-byte/single-byte symbols,
special characters or fixed phrases
can be selected.
Entering Characters
Hiragana/kanji
443
00M1000EN.book
444 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
• To switch the input mode, tap the corresponding key in the character input screen for each input method.
• When the character input screen is displayed, there are input modes that cannot be switched, depending on
the application running or what is to be entered.
Direct Input Method
Entering Characters with Direct Input
With FOMA handset, there are three direct input methods: "50-character kana syllabary
keyboard", "Qwerty keyboard" and "free draw input". By setting the input method in advance,
each input screen can be displayed at the time of a character input. 3 P492
50-character Kana Syllabary Keyboard
When the input method is set to Kana keyboard following keyboards will be displayed by tapping
$$ on the Status bar in the situation of entering characters.
Entering Characters
444
Hiragana/kanji input mode
Katakana input mode
Alphabet/numeric input mode
Numeric input mode
Item
Description
a Input method switch key
A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched.
b Number of characters
The number of confirmed characters/maximum number available for
character input are displayed.
c Move key
The keyboard is moved to the upper part/lower part of the touch screen.
d Dictionary key
A dictionary search is performed.
00M1000EN.book
445 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Item
Description
e Input field switch key
When two or more input field (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one
screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be
changed while the free draw input screen is displayed.
f Minimize key
Temporarily hides the keyboard.
g End key
Closes the free draw input screen.
h Convert key
Converts input characters.
i LF/CR key
Starts a new line.
j Space key
A space is entered.
k Clear key
Deletes a character entered.
l Double-byte key
Double-byte characters and numbers can be entered.
m caps/ ↑ key
Capital letters and small letters are switched.
n Date key
Current date can be entered.
o Time key
Current time can be entered.
• To switch the input mode, tap either [Hira]/[Alphabet]/[Kana]/[Numeric] key from each input mode keyboard.
• Tap [Symbol] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
• List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
• List of fixed phrases 3 P522
Kana keyboard
Entering Characters Using Kana Keyboard
With a kana keyboard, characters that can be entered are displayed on the keyboard. Tap a
target character directly to input, and if necessary, switch the input mode by tapping the input
mode key.

Tap Name filed in a contact y tap $$ on the Status bar
• How to operate 3 P99
• When an input mode is other than hiragana/kanji mode, tap [Hira].
Tap [ た ] y [ ろ ] y [ う ]
Conversion candidates
Entering Characters
From the conversion candidates, tap [ 太郎 ]
Input of " 太郎 " is set.
• When there are more than one candidate, display them by dragging the scroll bar.
445
00M1000EN.book
446 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to
follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
• Tap END key to end the entry.
• To continue entering characters, tap a key you are entering.
NOTE
• Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
• The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
Qwerty Keyboard
When the input method is set to "Qwerty keyboard", following keyboards will be displayed by
tapping $$ on the Status bar in the situation of entering characters.
Hiragana/kanji input mode
Entering Characters
446
Alphabet/numeric input mode
Numeric input mode
Item
Description
a Input method switch key
A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched.
b Number of characters
The number of confirmed characters/maximum number available for
character input are displayed.
c Move key
The keyboard is moved to the upper part/lower part of the touch screen.
d Dictionary key
A dictionary search is performed.
00M1000EN.book
447 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Item
Description
e Input filed switch key
When two or more input fields (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one
screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be
changed while the free draw input screen is displayed.
f Minimize key
Temporarily hides the keyboard.
g End key
Closes the free draw input screen.
h Convert key
Converts input characters.
i LF/CR key
Starts a new line.
j Space key
A space is entered.
k Clear key
Deletes a character entered.
l Double-byte key
Double-byte characters and numbers can be entered.
m caps/ ↑ key
Capital letters and small letters are switched.
n Date key
Current date can be entered. Tapping [caps]/[ ↑ ] will switch to Date key, and
current date can be entered.
• To switch the input mode, tap either [Kanji]/[Alphabet]/[Numeric] key from each input mode keyboard.
• Tap [Symbol] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
• List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
• List of fixed phrases 3 P522
Qwerty keyboard
Entering Characters Using Qwerty Keyboard
With a Qwerty keyboard, characters that can be entered are displayed on the keyboard. Tap
directly on a target character to input, and if necessary, switch the input mode by tapping the
input mode key. However, even if the input mode is switched to kanji, hiragana would not show on
the keyboard. When entering hiragana/kanji from the Qwerty keyboard, use the Roman character
entry method.
• The input method must be set to "Qwerty keyboard" beforehand. 3 P492

Tap Name field in a contact y tap $$ on the Status bar
Enter " たろう "
Roman character entry is used.
• To enter " た ": tap [t] 3 [a]
• To enter " ろ ": tap [r] 3 [o]
• To enter " う ": tap [u]
Entering Characters
• How to operate 3 P99
• When an input mode is other than hiragana/kanji mode, tap [Kanji].
Conversion candidates
From the conversion candidates, tap [ 太郎 ]
447
00M1000EN.book
448 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Input of " 太郎 " is set.
• When there are more than one candidate, display them by dragging the scroll bar.
• When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to
follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
• Tap END key to end the entry.
• To continue entering characters, tap a key you are entering.
NOTE
• Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
• The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
• List of Roman character entries 3 P523
Entering a Fixed Phrase
Fixed phrases can be entered by selecting from 5 categories.
• This can be used from all input methods.
While entering characters, tap [Mark]
Category names of fixed phrases
Entering Characters
Tap a category of a phrase you are entering
• Selections can be made from the categories of "General",
"Reply", "Business", "Private" and "English".
• Tap [Back] to go back to the screen for switching between
symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Tap a fixed phrase to enter
The phrase is entered.
• Tap $$ $$ to scroll up and down the list of fixed phrases.
448
00M1000EN.book
449 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
• List of fixed phrases3 P522
Entering a Symbol
Double-byte/single-byte symbols and special characters can be selected for entries.
• This can be used from all input methods.
While entering characters, tap [Mark]
Types of symbols
Tap the type of symbols
• A type of symbol can be selected from "Ｍａｒｋ", "Mark" and
Particular".
• Tap [All] to select from all double-byte/single-byte symbols,
special characters and kanji characters.
• Tap [Back] to go back to the screen for switching between
symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Tap a symbol to enter
NOTE
• List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
Entering Characters
A symbol is entered.
• Tap $$ $$ to scroll up and down the list of symbols.
Entering a Face Mark
A "Face mark" which expresses a face by using symbols and alphabet characters can be
entered.
• This can be used from all input methods.
While entering characters, enter " かお "
Face marks are displayed as for conversion candidates.
449
00M1000EN.book
450 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• The following face marks are displayed as for conversion candidates.
(-_-)
(-.-)
(+_+)
(*_*)
(-_-;)
(..)
(._.)
(._.)_
(;_;)
(>_<)
(@_@)
(T_T)
(^.^)
(^O_O^)
(^O^)
(^^)
(^^ゞ
(^_-)
(^_^)
(^_^;)
(^o^)
(^Ο^)
(＿ )
(~_~)
(~_~;)
(~o~)
)^O^(
>^_^<
^/^
^^;
^_^;
_(._.)_
m(＿ )m
Tap a face mark to enter
A face mark is entered.
Simple Entry of an Email Address
Strings of fixed form used for email or internet address, such as a domain name (that follows
after @) of an email address, can be entered.
• This can be used from all input methods.
While entering characters, tap [Mark]
Tap [Web] from the screen for switching between symbols, fixed
phrases and dictionary
• Tap [Back] to go back to the screen for switching between
symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Entering Characters
Tap a string to enter
The string is entered.
• Tap $$ $$ to scroll up and down the list of symbols.
NOTE
• List of fixed phrases3 P522
450
00M1000EN.book
451 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Entering Characters from Dictionary
A lemmatized search can be performed from a dictionary by selecting a string from the entered
text. It is convenient to check the meaning, a declensional kana ending, etc. of the selected
string. Furthermore, the searched contents can also be copied.
• This can be used from all input methods.
Dictionary Search while Entering Characters with Direct Input Method
After setting the character input method to "Kana keyboard", "Qwerty keyboard" or "handwriting",
a dictionary search is performed while entering characters.
Drag a string for a dictionary search from the entering text
The cursor hits the specified area.
Tap $$
Decided character display area
Direction word display area
Search result display area
Dictionary search key
Dictionary search screen
Tap a dictionary search key of a dictionary you are using
A search begins, and related direction words are displayed in direction word display area.
• A dictionary can be selected from "national language", "Japanese-English" or "EnglishJapanese".
Tap a target direction word from the direction word display area
Dictionary Search while Entering Characters with Indirect Input Method
Entering Characters
The explanation of the selected direction word is displayed in the search result display area.
• Tap [Copy] to copy the contents displayed in the search result display area. Drag a string
in the search result display area, and tap [Copy] to copy the specified string. Tap [Paste]
to paste the copied content in the decided character display area.
• Tap [Back] to end the dictionary search.
After setting the character input method to "Multi Tap" or "Two Tap", a dictionary search is
performed while entering characters.
Drag a string for a dictionary search from the entering text
The cursor hits the specified area.
451
00M1000EN.book
452 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [Mark]
The screen for switching between
symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary
Tap [Dictionary] y perform a dictionary search
Subsequent operations are the same as dictionary search for a direct input method.
• How to operate3 P475
Deleting Characters
Entered characters can be deleted one at a time or several at once. Also, a range for deletion can
be specified.
1When deleting one character a time
In the display area, tap the right side of a character you want to delete to bring the
cursor there, and tap [Clear]
Entering Characters
452
1When deleting all characters entered
• Tap the right side of the last character to bring the cursor there, and point [Clear]
for more than one second
00M1000EN.book
453 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Drag on entered characters, and tap [Clear]
1When deleting all characters beyond specified location
Tap the left side of the first character of the string you want to delete to bring the
cursor there, and point [Clear] for more than one second
1When deleting by specifying the area
Drag on the string you are deleting, and tap [Clear]
With handwriting, a character is entered in the free draw input screen by directly writing on the
touch screen with the Stylus.
Entering Characters
Entering Characters with Handwriting
• It is necessary to set the input method to "Handwriting" beforehand. 3 P492
453
00M1000EN.book
454 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Handwriting Input Screen
When the input method is set to "free draw input", following input screen will display by tapping
$$ on the Status bar in the situation of entering characters.
Item
Description
a Input method switch key
A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched.
b Number of characters
The number of confirmed characters/maximum number available for
character input are displayed.
c Move key
The free draw input screen is moved to the upper part/lower part of the touch
screen.
d Dictionary key
A dictionary search is performed.
e Input field switch key
When two or more input fields (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one
screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be
changed with having the free draw input screen displayed.
f Minimize key
Temporarily hides the keyboard.
g End key
Closes the free draw input screen.
h Recognition mode tab
Switches the mode which recognizes the type of character entered with free
draw.
i Help key
Displays the help for free draw input.
j Maximize/standard key
The size of free draw input area can be switched between enlarged size and
standard size.
Entering Characters
k Input area
A character is entered with free draw.
l Input area switch key
A continuation of the input area current entering is displayed.
m Symbol key
A screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary is
displayed.
n Convert key
Converts input characters.
o New-line key
A new line is started.
p Space key
A space is entered.
q Clear key
Deletes a character entered.
• Tap [Mark] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
• List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
• List of fixed phrases 3 P522
Entering Characters
The input method for entering characters with handwriting input is explained.
454
00M1000EN.book
455 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分

Tap Name field in a contact y tap $$ on the Status bar
• How to operate 3 P99
Write " たろう "in the input area
Conversion candidates
From the conversion candidates, tap [ 太郎 ]
Input of " 太郎 " is set.
• When there are more than one candidate, display them by dragging the scroll bar.
• When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to
follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
• Tap END key to end the entry.
• To continue entering characters, write a character in the input area.
1When changing the character which has not been recognized correctly
When a character is entered in the input area, the bottom right of the input area displays as
following, and by tapping it will display the candidates for the entered character.
• In the input area and for the candidates, the recognized characters are classified and displayed in the
following colors. When the character type currently displayed is unclear, it can also be judged by its color.
• Hiragana: Pink
• Kanji: Yellow
• Katakana: Purple
• Alphabet: Green
• Number: Light-blue
• Symbol: Orange
Entering Characters
If a target character exists in the candidates, tap the character for a conversion.
If a target character does not exist in the candidates, tap $$ and rewrite the character.
455
00M1000EN.book
456 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
• Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
• When a character entered in standard mode could not be recognized correctly, or is hard to recognize, we
recommend you to change the mode that corresponds to the character entered (kana mode or alphanumeric
mode).
• A character would be more easily recognized by writing it large within the frame.
• The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
Save Phrases
Editing/Registering Fixed Phrases
By registering frequently used greetings and phrases, they can be entered quickly by just
selecting a fixed phrase.
• When Master Clear is performed, the registered fixed phrases are all deleted, and it will return to the default
state.
Registering a New Fixed Phrase
A fixed phrase is registered.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector Bar, tap "Handset" tab y
Text input on the Control Panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Edit Template on Preferences screen
Category: Switches the category of fixed phrases.
Entering Characters
Fixed phrase edit screen
Tap the Category and select a category where you are registering
• Selections can be made from the categories of "General", "Reply", "Business", "Private"
"English" and "Internet".
• Maximum of 20 fixed phrases can be registered for each category.
456
00M1000EN.book
457 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [Add]
Sentence : Entered the phrase to be registered.
Enter a phrase y Tap [Settings]
The phrase is registered.
• Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be
entered is 32.
Editing the Default Fixed Phrases
A registered fixed phrase is edited.
Display the fixed phrase edit screen
• How to operate 3 P480
Tap the Category and select a category of the fixed phrase you are
making a change
• Selections can be made from the categories of "General", "Reply", "Business", "Private"
"English" and "Internet".
Tap the fixed phrase you are editing y tap [Change]
Edit the phrase y tap [Settings]
Deleting a Fixed Phrase
Registered fixed phrases can be deleted one at a time.
Entering Characters
The fixed phrase is edited.
• Up to 32 double-byte/single-byte characters can be entered is 32.
• Tap [Cancel] to stop editing the fixed phrase.
Display the fixed phrase edit screen
• How to operate 3 P480
Tap the Category and select a category of the fixed phrase you are
deleting
• Selections can be made from the categories of "General", "Reply", "Business", "Private"
"English" and "Internet".
457
00M1000EN.book
458 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap the fixed phrase you are deleting y tap [Delete]
Tap [Yes]
The fixed phrase will be deleted.
• Tap [No] to cancel the deletion.
Character copy
Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters
Characters and numbers such as from notes or messages can be copied or cut, and pasted on
another character input screen.
Copying/Cutting Characters
Specify the range of text to copy/cut in Notes etc., display the screen to paste and paste.
When a copy is performed, the original copied content remains and the same content is pasted
to the pasted location. Moreover, when a cut is performed, the original copied content is lost, and
the copied content is pasted to the pasted location.
Display the screen to perform Copy/Cut
Edit screen of Notes
Drag and specify the range of string to copy/cut
Entering Characters
The specified area will be highlighted.
Tap Edit on the Menu bar y tap Copy/Cut
Selected range will be copied/cut.
• Tap Copy to copy the selected range.
• Tap Cut to cut the selected range.
458
00M1000EN.book
459 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
• Depending on application, it is not necessary to specify the range to perform a copy/cut. For examples,
calculation result of a calculator and a phone number entered in the phone number entry screen are copied
as the way they are.
• Depending on application, the item names for Copy/Paste displayed on a menu bar may differ, or they may
be displayed at different place than the menu bar.
1Copy/Cut and Paste operations
For screens displayed such as when entering a keyword for a search, a menu can be
displayed from other than a menu bar to perform Copy/Cut and Paste.
Tap $$ beside the title to display the menu.
Search screen for Notes
Pasting a Character
A content copied/cut is pasted.
Display a screen to paste a copied/cut content
Tap on the place to specify the position to paste
Tap $$ beside the title to display the menu.
Entering Characters
The cursor moves to the location where the paste is performed.
Tap Edit on the Menu bar y tap Paste
A content copied/cut is pasted.
459
00M1000EN.book
460 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
NOTE
• Depending on application, it is not necessary to specify the range to perform a copy/cut. For examples,
calculation result of a calculator and a phone number entered in the phone number entry screen are copied
as the way they are.
• Depending on application, the item names for Paste displayed on a Menu bar may differ, or they may be
displayed at different place than the Menu bar.
Save word
Registering Frequently Used Words
By registering frequently used names and words in the user dictionary, they can be displayed as
conversion candidates at a character conversion, and can be entered quickly.
• When Master Clear is performed, the registered words are all deleted.
Registering a New Word
A word is registered in the user dictionary.
• Up to 100 words can be registered.
Entering Characters
Word edit screen
Tap [Add]
Reading
Word
460
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control Panel screen, and tap [Advanced] on
Text input setup screen
: A reading of the word to register is entered.
: A word to register is entered.
Tap Reading y Enter a reading
00M1000EN.book
461 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be
entered for the combination of Reading and Word is 11.
Tap Word y Enter a word
• Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be
entered for the combination of Reading and Word is 11.
Sap [Settings]
The word is registered.
• Tap [Cancel] to stop registering.
Editing a Registered Word
A word registered in the user dictionary is edited.
Display the word edit screen
• How to operate 3 P484
Tap the word you are editing y tap [Change]
Tap the field you want to edit y edit the Reading/Word
• Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be
entered for the combination of Reading and Word is 11.
Tap [Settings]
The word is edited.
Deleting a Registered Word
A word registered in the user dictionary is deleted one at a time.
Display a word edit screen
• How to operate 3 P484
Tap the word you are deleting y tap [Delete]
Tap [Yes]
The word is deleted.
• Tap [No] to cancel the deletion.
Entering Characters
461
00M1000EN.book
462 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Using Electronic Dictionary
Settings and registration for the dictionary installed in FOMA handset are performed.
Setting to Perform a Dictionary Search Automatically at a Conversion
You can set it so that when a character entered is converted, conversion candidates are
searched from the dictionary and displayed. Also, the type of dictionary used for the search can
be set.
Tap $$ y $$ at the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text
input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input
setup screen, and tap Dictionary search at conversion on
Preferences screen
Use dictionary search
: Sets so that a dictionary search is performed when a
character is converted.
National language dictionary
: National language dictionary is added to the dictionary
used for the search.
Japanese-English dictionary
: Japanese-English dictionary is added to the dictionary
used for the search.
• Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap $$ at the field of Use dictionary search
Tap $$ of the dictionary used for the search
Entering Characters
It is set so that a dictionary search is performed at conversion, and the dictionary used for
the search is selected.
Adding a Dictionary
Dictionaries installed to FOMA handset from the attached CD-ROM can be added as the
dictionaries used at a character conversion. Also, setting the priority for a dictionary search and
deleting added dictionaries can be performed.
• Up to 64 dictionaries can be registered.
462
00M1000EN.book
463 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Additional Dictionary tab on
Preferences screen
Dictionaries installed are displayed.
Tap in the order from $$ of the dictionary to add y [Add]
• Unless $$ of the dictionary is tapped, the installed dictionary
cannot be used.
Tap [Settings]
The dictionary is added.
Setting the Priority of Dictionary Search
If there are two or more dictionaries added, the priority for dictionary search can be set up.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Additional Dictionary tab on
Preferences screen
Entering Characters
463
00M1000EN.book
464 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [Priority]
Tap the dictionary moving the priority y tap [ ▲ ]/[ ▼ ]
Tap [Set]
The priority is set.
Deleting an Added Dictionary
A dictionary added for search at conversion is set not to be used.
• A dictionary installed will not be erased.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Additional Dictionary tab from
Preferences screen
Tap [Delete] y [Yes]
The dictionary is set not to be used.
Setting the Saving Method of User Dictionary and Learning Dictionary
Entering Characters
464
User dictionary and learning dictionary stored in FOMA handset can be set so that they are
automatically backed up in Trans Flash memory card.
00M1000EN.book
465 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Save Dictionary tab on Preferences
screen
Save automatically
: Sets whether or not to save the dictionary
automatically.
Saving cycle
Once a day : Saves when the first character input screen
displayed in a day is closed.
When closing keyboard
: Saves when the character input screen is
closed.
• Tap $$ $$ at the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap $$ at the field of Save automatically
Tap $$ of Once a day/When closing keyboard at field of Saving cycle
Returning the Learning Dictionary to the Default State
Learned information stored in the user dictionary can be reset to default state.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Learning tab on Preferences screen
• Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap [Clear learning information] y [Yes]
Entering Characters
The learned information will be deleted.
• Tap [No] to cancel the deletion of the learning information.
465
00M1000EN.book
466 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1Learning Information
A converted content of a character input by the user is stored in the user dictionary in FOMA
handset, and when the same character is entered and converted again, it will be displayed as
one of the conversion candidates.
Setting the Detail of Character Entry
The settings related to character input, such as the usage of predict conversion function and the
input mode when the character entry screen is activated are set.
Setting the Input System
Default setting
AWnn Japanese keyboard
The input system of FOMA handset can be changed to other input systems.
• Other input systems are not installed in the FOMA handset by default. This operation can be performed only
when other input system is installed.
Entering Characters
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Handset tab
y Text input on the Control panel screen
Tap Primary input method y select an input system
An input system is set.
• Tap [Default] to reset the input system back to the default state.
Setting Alternative Input Method
Default setting
The alternative input method for the FOMA handset can be changed.
• No other alternative input system is installed in the FOMA handset by default. This operation can be
performed only when another input system is installed.
466
None
00M1000EN.book
467 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, and tap Alternative on the
text input setup screen
Tap Alternative input method y select an alternative input system
An alternative input system is selected.
• Tap [Default] to reset the changed alternative input method back to the default state.
Using Predict Conversion Function
Default setting
Use predict conversion: $$
Whether to use the predict conversion function or not at the conversion of a character can be set.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Predict conversion tab on Preferences
screen
• Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap $$ at Use Predict conversion
Entering Characters
The Predict conversion function is set.
Setting the Input Mode at the Time of Activation
The input mode displayed when the text input screen is displayed can be set up beforehand.
467
00M1000EN.book
468 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] from
Text input setup screen, and tap Input mode at activation tab from
Preferences screen
Hiragana input : Sets hiragana as the input mode to be always
displayed.
Single-byte alphabet input
: Sets single-byte alphabet as the input mode to
be always displayed.
System setup : Sets so that the input mode corresponding to
the contents of an input may be displayed
automatically.
• Tap $$ $$ at the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
Tap $$ of the input mode you are using at At activation
The input mode at activation is set.
Setting the Display Format of Date and Time
The display format of a date and time inputted by tapping a specific key can be set for each input
mode beforehand.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Date and time tab on Preferences
screen
Entering Characters
Hiragana input : Sets the display format of a date and time at
hiragana input mode.
Single-byte kana input
: Sets the display format of a date and time at
single-byte kana input mode.
Double-byte alphabet input
: Sets the display format of a date and time at
double-byte alphabet input mode.
Single-byte alphabet input
: Sets the display format of a date and time at
single-byte alphabet input mode.
• Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display
between left and right.
468
00M1000EN.book
469 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ of the input mode you are setting y [Change]
Date : Selects the display format for Date.
Time : Selects the display format for Time.
Tap the field to set, and select a display format
Tap [Set]
The display formats of date and time for the selected input mode are set up.
NOTE
• Input method of Date and Time 3 P468, P470, P496, P500
Setting Details for Handwriting
The recognition speed of a free draw input, the width of the pen, and the color of the pen can be
set up. Also, My symbol that inputs a character string by just entering a simple sign can be set.
Registering My Symbol
A setting can be made for registering strings to be converted just by entering a Symbol, such as a
simple sign or mark.
• Up to 30 symbols can be registered.
• Tap $$ to display the help for handwriting.
Symbol field
Entering Characters
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, and tap Handwriting tab y [Handwriting
settings] on Preferences screen
Registration text field
Write a symbol at the symbol field
Drag and draw a symbol to register within the frame.
469
00M1000EN.book
470 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Tap [Clear] below the symbol field to delete and rewrite the symbol
Tap a registration text column y enter a text
• Tap [Clear] below the registration text field to delete a text.
Setting the Recognition Speed of Free Draw and Width/Color of Characters
The recognition speed of free draw can be set. Also thickness and color of characters entered
with free draw can be set.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y
Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text
input setup screen, tap Handwriting tab y [Handwriting settings]
from Preferences screen, and tap Others tab on Decuma Settings
screen
Recognition timeout
: Selects the drag speed that can be recognized.
Pen size
: Selects the width of the pen.
Pen color
: Selects the color of the pen.
Tap $$ of the speed you are setting at Recognition timeout
• By setting the recognition speed faster, characters entered by free draw with fast drag
operation can be recognized.
Entering Characters
Tap $$ of the width you are setting at size
Tap $$ of the color you are setting at Pen color
Tap [Done]
The recognition timeout, width and size/color of the pen are set.
Indirect input method
Entering Characters with Indirect Input Method
FOMA handset has two indirect input methods "Multi Tap" and "Two Tap". By setting up an input
method beforehand, each input screen (keyboard) can be displayed at the time of a character
input. 3 P492
470
00M1000EN.book
471 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Multi Tap/Two Tap Keyboard
When the input method is set as Multi Tap or Two Tap, following keyboard will display by tapping
$$ on the Status bar when a character is entered. For the procedure for Multi Tap and Two Tap,
please refer to each explanation. 3 P495, P500
Hiragana input mode
Item
Description
a Input method switch key
A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched.
b Name
The name of the character input field is displayed.
c Minimize key
Temporarily hides the keyboard.
d Input field switch key
When two or more input field (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one
screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be
changed with having the keyboard displayed.
e End key
Closes the keyboard.
f Display area
Characters entered/decided are displayed.
g Conversion candidate
area
Conversion candidates for characters entered are displayed.
h Scroll arrow
When conversion candidates cannot all fit in the display, tap the arrow to scroll
up and down to display the rest of the candidates.
i Number of characters
The number of decided characters/maximum available character input is
displayed.
• Tap [Mark] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
• List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
• List of fixed phrases 3 P522
Multi Tap
Entering a Character with Multi Tap
Entering Characters
• In order to switch an input mode, tap [Character] at the keyboard of each input mode, and from the screen
that switches input mode, tap one of the keys from [kanji]/[Kata]/[Ａｂｃ]/[Abc]/[Eng]/[Num].
With Multi Tap, a keyboard with two or more characters assigned to one key is displayed as a
character input screen. In order to enter a character, tap the key where a character is assigned
multiple times until that character is displayed.
• The input method needs to be set as Multi Tap beforehand. 3 P492
471
00M1000EN.book
472 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Keyboard Display and Character Assignments for Each Input Mode
Following are the keyboard display and character assignments for each input mode. Whenever a
key is tapped where the character entering is assigned, the character on the key changes.
1Input mode: hiragana
Keyboard
display
Characters assigned
あ
3 あ 3 い 3 う 3 え 3 お 3ぁ 3ぃ 3ぅ 3ぇ 3ぉ 3
か
3か3き3く3け3こ3
さ
3さ3し3す3せ3そ3
た
3 た 3 ち 3 つ 3 て 3 と 3っ 3
な
3な3に3ぬ3ね3の3
は
3は3ひ3ふ3へ3ほ3
ま
3ま3み3む3め3も3
や
3 や 3 ゆ 3 よ 3ゃ 3ゅ 3ょ 3
ら
3ら3り3る3れ3ろ3
わ
3 わ 3 を 3 ん 3ゎ 3
＊
3 、3 。3 − 3 ？ 3 ！ 3 ＆ 3 " 3 「 3 」3 ・ 3（ 3 ）3
# *1, *2
3 (double-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Convert
Converts a character entered.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
1Input mode: single-byte katakana
Keyboard
display
ｱ
Entering Characters
472
Characters assigned
3ｱ3ｲ3ｳ3ｴ3ｵ3ｧ3ｨ3ｩ3ｪ3ｫ3
ｶ
3ｶ3ｷ3ｸ3ｹ3ｺ3
ｻ
3ｻ3ｼ3ｽ3ｾ3ｿ3
ﾀ
3ﾀ3ﾁ3ﾂ3ﾃ3ﾄ3ｯ3
ﾅ
3ﾅ3ﾆ3ﾇ3ﾈ3ﾉ3
ﾊ
3ﾊ3ﾋ3ﾌ3ﾍ3ﾎ3
ﾏ
3ﾏ3ﾐ3ﾑ3ﾒ3ﾓ3
ﾔ
3ﾔ3ﾕ3ﾖ3ｬ3ｭ3ｮ3
ﾗ
3ﾗ3ﾘ3ﾙ3ﾚ3ﾛ3
ﾜ
3ﾜ3ｦ3ﾝ3
3､3｡3-3?3!3&3"3｢3｣3･3(3)3
#*2
3 ﾞ 3 ﾟ 3 (single-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
00M1000EN.book
473 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1Input mode: single-byte alphabet
Keyboard
display
Characters assigned
2ABC
3a3b3c3A3B3C32 3
3DEF
3d3e3f3D3E3F33 3
4GHI
3g3h3i3G3H3I34 3
5JKL
3j3k3l3J3K3L35 3
6MNO
3m3n3o3M3N3O363
7PQRS
3 P3q3r3s3 P3Q3R3S37 3
8TUV
3t3u3v3T3U3V383
9WXYZ
3w3x3y3z3W3X3Y3Z393
3.3@3_3-3/3?3!3&3'3"3:3;3~3
*2
3 (single-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3 .co.jp 3 .com 3 .net 3 .ne.jp 3 .or.jp 3
http:// 3 www. 3 @docomo.ne.jp 3
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
1Input mode: double-byte alphabet
Keyboard
display
１
Characters assigned
１
２ ＡＢＣ
3ａ3ｂ3ｃ3Ａ3Ｂ3Ｃ3 ２ 3
３ ＤＥＦ
3ｄ3ｅ3ｆ3Ｄ3Ｅ3Ｆ3 ３ 3
４ ＧＨＩ
3ｇ3ｈ3ｉ3Ｇ3Ｈ3Ｉ3 ４ 3
５ ＪＫＬ
3ｊ3ｋ3ｌ3Ｊ3Ｋ3Ｌ3 ５ 3
６ ＭＮＯ
3ｍ3ｎ3ｏ3Ｍ3Ｎ3Ｏ3 ６ 3
７ ＰＱＲＳ
3 P3ｑ3ｒ3ｓ3 P3Ｑ3Ｒ3Ｓ3 ７ 3
3ｔ3ｕ3ｖ3Ｔ3Ｕ3Ｖ3 ８ 3
3ｗ3ｘ3ｚ3Ｗ3Ｘ3Ｙ3Ｚ3 ９ 3
０
０
＊
3 ．3 ＠ 3 ＿ 3 ― 3 / 3 ？ 3 ！ 3 ＆ 3 ' 3 " 3 ： 3 ； 3 ~ 3
# *2
3 (double-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
Entering Characters
８ ＴＵＶ
９ ＷＸＹＺ
1Input mode: single-byte number
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
473
00M1000EN.book
474 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Others
3 (double-byte space) 3 (New-line) 3：3 / 3. 3,
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
*1:
*2:
*3:
Voiced sound and semi-voiced sound can be added (Only the characters that can add them). Each time
you tap, it will switch as: "3 ゛(voiced sound)3 ゜(semi-voiced sound) 3 none 3 ".
Will start a new line by pointing it for more than 1 second,
Date and Time can be entered by set display format. 3 P492
Entering a Character
The method to enter a character with Multi Tap is explained.

Tap in the order by Name in a contact y $$ at the Status bar
• How to operate 3 P99
Enter " たろう "
Entering Characters
• To enter " た " : Tap " た " once
• To enter " ろ " : Tap " ら " five times
• To enter " う " : Tap " あ " three times
From the conversion candidates, tap [ 太郎 ]
Input of " 太郎 " is set.
• When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to
follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
• Tap END key to end the entry.
474
00M1000EN.book
475 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• To continue entering characters, tap a key where the character you are entering is
assigned.
• For a character input, please refer to "Keyboard display and character assignments for
each input mode" 3 P496
NOTE
• Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
• The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
Determining the Characters Entered with Multi Tap Automatically
Default setting
Determine automatically $$:
You can setup for the cursor to move automatically to the next input position and wait for an input
after each character is entered by multi-taps. When entering a character assigned to the same
key continuously, the operation to tap the right side of the entered character to move the cursor
becomes unnecessary.
Tap $$ y $$ at the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text
input from the Control Panel screen, tap [Advanced] from Text
input setup screen, and tap Multi Tap tab from Preferences
screen
Determine automatically
: Sets to automatically determine entered characters.
Determining cycle
: Selects the speed to determine.
Tap $$ at the field of Determine automatically
Tap $$ of the speed to set for Determining cycle
Characters entered by Multi Tap are set to be determined automatically.
Entering Characters
Two Tap
Entering a Character with Two Tap
With Two Tap, a keyboard with two or more characters assigned to one key is displayed as a
character input screen. In order to enter a character, tap the key where a character to input is
assigned, display the selection screen for the assigned character, and tap the character to input.
• The input method needs to be set as Two Tap beforehand.3 P492
475
00M1000EN.book
476 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Keyboard Display and Character Assignments for Each Input Mode
Following are the keyboard display and character assignments for each input mode. Tap a key
where the character entering is assigned, and a selection screen for assigned character is
displayed.
1Input mode: hiragana
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
あ
あいうえおぁぃぅぇぉヴ
か
かきくけこがぎぐげご
さ
さしすせそざじずぜぞ
た
たちつてとだぢづでどっ
な
なにぬねの
は
はひふへほばびぶべぼぱぴぷぺぽ
ま
まみむめも
や
やゆよゃゅょ
ら
らりるれろ
わ
わをんゎ
＊
、。- ？ ＆ " 「 」・ ( )
$$(double-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Convert
Converts a character entered.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
1Input mode: single-byte katakana
Keyboard display
Entering Characters
476
Characters assigned
ｱ
ｱ ｲ ｳ ｴ ｵ ｧ ｨ ｩ ｪ ｫ ｳﾞ
ｶ
ｶ ｷ ｸ ｹ ｺ ｶﾞ ｷﾞ ｸﾞ ｹﾞ ｺﾞ
ｻ
ｻ ｼ ｽ ｾ ｿ ｻﾞ ｼﾞ ｽﾞ ｾﾞ ｿﾞ
ﾀ
ﾀ ﾁ ﾂ ﾃ ﾄ ﾀﾞ ﾁﾞ ﾂﾞ ﾃﾞ ﾄﾞ ｯ
ﾅ
ﾅﾆﾇﾈﾉ
ﾊ
ﾊ ﾋ ﾌ ﾍ ﾎ ﾊﾞ ﾋﾞ ﾌﾞ ﾍﾞ ﾎﾞ ﾊﾟ ﾋﾟ ﾌﾟ ﾍﾟ ﾎﾟ
ﾏ
ﾏﾐﾑﾒﾓ
ﾔ
ﾔﾕﾖｬｭｮ
ﾗ
ﾗﾘﾙﾚﾛ
ﾜ
ﾜｦﾝ
､｡-?!&"｢｣･()
$$(single-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
00M1000EN.book
477 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1Input mode: single-byte alphabet
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
2ABC
ABC2abc
3DEF
DEF3def
4GHI
GHI4ghi
5JKL
JKL5jkl
6MNO
MNO6mno
7PQRS
PQRS7pqrs
8TUV
TUV8tuv
9WXYZ
WXYZ9wxyz
. , ? ! - & ' " : ; @ ~ /
$$(single-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time .co.jp
.com .net .ne.jp .or.jp http:// www. @docomo.ne.jp
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
1Input mode: double-byte alphabet
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
１
１
２ ＡＢＣ
ＡＢＣ２ａｂｃ
３ ＤＥＦ
ＤＥＦ３ｄｅｆ
４ ＧＨＩ
ＧＨＩ４ｇｈｉ
５ ＪＫＬ
ＪＫＬ５ｊｋｌ
６ ＭＮＯ
ＭＮＯ６ｍｎｏ
７ ＰＱＲＳ
ＰＱＲＳ７ｐｑｒｓ
ＴＵＶ８ｔｕｖ
９ ＷＸＹＺ
ＷＸＹＺ９ｗｘｙｚ
０
０
＊
．，？ ！ ― ＆ ' " ： ； ＠ ∼ ／
$$(double-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
Entering Characters
８ ＴＵＶ
1Input mode: single-byte number
Keyboard display
Characters assigned
477
00M1000EN.book
478 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Keyboard display
Entering Characters
478
午前７時５６分
Characters assigned
Character
Displays the screen that switches the input mode.
Symbol
Displays the screen that switches between symbols,
fixed phrases and dictionary.
Others
$$(single-byte space) $$(New-line) : / . ,
Clear
Deletes a character entered.
00M1000EN.book
479 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Entering a Character
The method to enter a character with Two Tap is explained.

Tap the Name field in a contact y $$ at the Status bar
• How to operate 3 P99
Tap [ た ]
A selection screen with the characters assigned to [ た ] key is
displayed.
Tap [ た ]
" た " is entered. Enter " ろう " the same way.
• To enter " ろ ": Tap in the order by [ ら ] 3 [ ろ ]
• To enter " う ": Tap in the order by [ あ ] 3[ う ]
From the conversion candidates, tap [ 太郎 ]
Input of " 太郎 " is set.
• When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to
follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
• Tap END key to end the entry.
• To continue entering characters, tap a key where the character you are entering is
assigned.
• For a character input, please refer to "Keyboard display and character assignments for
each input mode" 3 P500
• Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
• The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
Entering Characters
NOTE
479
00M1000EN.book
480 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
00M1000EN.book
481 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Overseas Use
1International Roaming
"WORLD WING" International Roaming Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Services Available Outside Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Before Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
1Making/Answering Calls from Overseas
Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
1Settings for Overseas Use
Switching Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Setting Operations in Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
481
00M1000EN.book
482 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
"WORLD WING" International Roaming Service
International roaming is a service that makes telephone and other types of communications
available from overseas, which is outside of the FOMA network service area, by using affiliated
operators' networks.
The international roaming service allows subscribers to use their FOMA handsets to make
telephone communication including voice and video calls*2, and email, Short Message Service
(SMS) and packet communication in about 220*1 countries and regions around the world.
*1:
*2:
As of XX 2004
As of XX 2004, videophone communication is available when you and the other parties are using
DoCoMo (Japan), Hutchison 3G UK (United kingdom.) or Hutchison 3G HK (Hong Kong). For details,
visit the DoCoMo website.
• Use of the international roaming service requires a subscription to "WORLD WING," the international roaming
service provided by DoCoMo. In addition, a UIM (green) made available for WORLD WING must be attached
to the FOMA handset.
• A UIM (blue) must be switched with a UIM (green).
• When you purchase a subscription to WORLD WING at a DoCoMo information desk, the card will be
exchanged free of charge.
• Communication services and functions available depend on the network operator connected to. 3 P507
• The communication system in Overseas networks to be applied are W-CDMA or GSM/GPRS.
W-CDMA
3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project)* is a global standard. A 3G
mobile communication system is compliant to 3GPP.
*: A regional standardization organization founded for the
development of common technology specification relating to the
3G mobile communication system (IMT-2000).
GSM (Global System for Mobile
Communications)
The 2nd generation mobile communication system in digital mode is
most widely used around the world, especially in Europe and Asia.
GPRS (General Packet Radio
Service)
The 2.5 generation mobile communication system is the communication
method that enables high-speed packet communication through the
GPRS* by utilizing GSM
*: Packet communication with transmission speed of up to 115 kbps
is available.
• By default, network switching for overseas use automatically takes place. 3 P515
Overseas Use
482
00M1000EN.book
483 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Services Available Outside Japan
Services Available
The following services are available outside Japan:
Service
Description
Voice call
The phone number used in Japan can also be used for making and
answering domestic calls in the country of stay and making international
calls to Japan or other countries.
Video call
International videophone communication is available with subscribers of
specific overseas 3G mobile operators or FOMA handset users in Japan.
Email
The email address used in Japan can also be used for email exchange
from overseas.
Short Message Service (SMS)
The recipients' FOMA handset phone numbers can be used to exchange
Short Message Service (SMS) messages between FOMA handset users
from overseas.
Packet communication
Packet communication is available from overseas by connecting to PCs,
etc.
*:
Services that may be available depending on the network operator or network used.
Communication Systems and Services Available
Services and functions available differ between networks in Japan and overseas.
Different communication systems and services available are as described below:
Service
Voice call
Video call
Internet
Email
Packet
Short
communication Message
Service
(SMS)
○
○
○
○
○
○
GSM
○
×
×
×
×
○
○
×
○
○
○
○
GPRS
Overseas Use
Communication
system
W-CDMA
483
00M1000EN.book
484 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Before Use
Make sure of the following before leaving Japan, in the country of stay and after coming back to
Japan.
Before Leaving Japan
To use your FOMA handset outside Japan, make sure of the following before leaving Japan.
1Subscription
A subscription to WORLD WING is required.
• WORLD WING is an optional service that requires a separate subscription. No monthly charges apply.
• A UIM (green) made available for WORLD WING must be attached to the FOMA handset for overseas use.
1Battery charging
Check the power supply voltage available in the country or region of stay and use the FOMA
international AC adapter 01 (separately provided).
• The AC adapter that comes with the handset is for domestic use only (100 VAC). An AC adapter suited to
the voltage available in the place of stay is required.
• Notes on use of AC adapter 3 P24
• Charging the battery 3 P54
1Network services
Network services may not be set/checked depending on the overseas network operator used.
Some network services can be set/checked only in Japan. Whether network service
operations can be performed or not is as described below:
Name of service
Setting operation
Voicemail Service
Can be set.*
Call Waiting Service
Can be set.
Call Forwarding Service
Can be set.*
Nuisance Call Blocking Service
Can be set.*
Dual Network Service
Cannot be set.
Caller ID Display Request Service
Caller IDs may not be sent correctly.*
Overseas Use
English Announcement
Can be set.*
Caller ID Notification
Can be set.*
Drive Mode
Can be set but no voice guidance available.
English Announcement
Can be set.*
Roaming (roaming guidance)
Can be set.*
Roaming (incoming call barring when roaming)
Can be set.
*:
May not be set in some service areas.
• For details, see "Network Service Operation Guide".
• To perform voicemail or call forwarding operation from overseas, remote operation must be enabled in
Japan in advance. 3 P516
• Services that can be set may not be available depending on the network operator used or the region.
484
00M1000EN.book
485 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Viewing Information from Place of Stay
1Display view
An available network is automatically found and set, and available services such as voice or
video call can be checked with icons that indicate the status of the network.
Display
Description
$$ (Orange)
Voice data can be exchanged through roaming.
$$ (Orange)
Voice data and still images can be exchanged through
roaming.
$$ (Orange)
Voice data and images can be exchanged through
roaming.
NOTE
• The indications are in green when the handset is in FOMA network service area.
• The indications are in gray when the handset is outside of the area covered by the network.
• The network can be manually selected for use. 3 P515
1Inquiries
For inquiries about lost or stolen handsets, settlement of total charges or failure of handsets
outside Japan, contact DoCoMo at the numbers shown in "For Inquires about Lost or Stolen
Handsets or Settlement of Total Charges" or "About Failure" on the back cover of the manual.
• The contact numbers must be prefixed with the code as shown in "International Phone Code for Universal
Number (Table 1)" or "International Access Code (Table 2)" assigned to the place of stay. 3 P510
The codes to prefix the contact numbers are as shown in the tables below: "International
Phone Code for Universal Number (Table 1)" and "International Access Code (Table 2)."
International Phone Code for Universal Number (Table 1)
Area
00
Area
Luxemburg
International
phone code
00
Australia
0011
Malaysia
00
Austria
00
New Zealand
00
Belgium
00
Norway
00
Brazil
0021
Philippines
00
Canada
011
Singapore
001
China
00
South Korea
001
Columbia
009
Spain
00
Denmark
00
Sweden
00
France
00
Switzerland
00
Germany
00
Hong Kong
001
Taiwan
00
Thailand
001
Overseas Use
Argentina
International
phone code
485
00M1000EN.book
486 ページ
Area
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
International
phone code
Ireland
00
Israel
014
Italy
00
Area
International
phone code
U.K.
00
U.S.A.
011
Major International Access Codes (Table 2)
Area
International
phone code
Area
International
phone code
Australia
0011
Monaco
00
Belgium
00
Netherlands
00
Brazil
00
New Zealand
00
Canada
011
China
00
Norway
00
Philippines
00
Czech
00
Poland
00
Denmark
00
Portugal
00
Finland
00/990
Russia
810
France
00
Singapore
001
Germany
00
South Korea
001
Greece
00
Spain
00
Hong Kong
001
Sweden
00
Hungary
00
Switzerland
00
Taiwan
002
Thailand
001
India
00
Indonesia
001
Ireland
00
Italy
00
Turkey
00
U.A.E.
00
Luxemburg
00
U.K.
00
Macao
00
U.S.A.
011
Malaysia
00
Vietnam
00
After Coming Back to Japan
Overseas Use
486
After you come back to Japan, your handset will automatically select to use the FOMA network. If
your handset is set to use manual network selection, you must manually reset the handset to use
the FOMA network.
• The network can be manually selected for use. 3 P515
NOTE
• For overseas use, refer to "International Service Roaming Guide (XXX)" and "Network Service Operation
Guide" together with this manual.
• The Quick Reference Manual useful for referring to operations is provided on P000, which provides a
convenient reference for overseas use of your FOMA handset.
• Charges for overseas use will be added to the bill for monthly services. Be informed that the billing may be
delayed about one month for reasons of overseas network operators.
00M1000EN.book
487 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• If you have any problem about overseas use of your FOMA handset, see "Troubleshooting (for Overseas
Use)". 3 P53
Making Calls
Phone calls from overseas to Japan or to other countries are international calls to Japan, etc. To
make a call, prefix the phone number with "+" and the country code of the destination and enter
the other party's phone number. When entering the phone number, remove "0" at the beginning
of the area code.
Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar
The following operations can be performed:
[0]~[9], [*], [#] : Use these keys to enter the phone number.
[$$]
: Deletes a digit in the phone number from the
right. Pointing for 1+ seconds deletes all of the
phone number entered.
Enter the other party's phone number
The FOMA handset vibrates every time a key on the Enter phone number screen is tapped.
• Point to [0] for 1+ seconds to enter "+".
• Pause ("P"), Wait ("W"), "#" and "*" can be entered. 3 P73
1To call landline phones
+ Country code - Area code with 0 removed - City code - Number
• If the other party is a landline phone in Italy, "0" is required.
1To call mobile phones
+ Country code - 90 - XXXX - XXXX
+ Country code - 80 - XXXX - XXXX
1To call PHS phones
+ Country code - 70 - XXXX - XXXX
Tap [$$]
1If you hear a busy signal
The line is busy. Press e and try again at a later time.
Overseas Use
• Tap [$$] to make a video call. 3 P86
487
00M1000EN.book
488 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Talk on the phone
The call duration is displayed.
The following operations can be performed:
[Mute]/[Unmute]
: Tap this to switch between the mute and unmute
settings. When the mute setting is active, the
other party cannot hear your voice but you can
hear the other party's voice.
[$$]/[$$]
: Tap this to set/release the touch screen lock.
When the lock is active, all tapping operations
other than $$ are disabled.
[Hold]/[Resume]
: Tap this to place a call on/off hold. The mute/
unmute setting cannot be changed while a call
is on hold.
: Press to enable/disable the speakerphone
function.
Press e when you have finished your call
The line is cleared.
Overseas Use
488
00M1000EN.book
489 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Country code
Country codes are as shown below:
Country
Code
Australia
61
Austria
43
Belgium
32
Brazil
55
Canada
China
86
Czech
Denmark
Country
Malaysia
60
Monaco
377
Netherlands
31
New Zealand
64
Norway
47
Philippines
63
420
Poland
48
45
Portugal
351
Finland
358
France
33
Code
Russia
Singapore
65
Germany
49
South Korea
82
Greece
30
Spain
34
Hong Kong
852
Sweden
46
Hungary
36
Switzerland
41
India
91
Indonesia
62
Ireland
353
Italy
39
Japan
Taiwan
886
Thailand
66
Turkey
90
U.A.E.
971
81
U.K.
44
Luxemburg
352
U.S.A.
Macao
853
Vietnam
84
Making Calls within Country of Stay
To make a call to a party in the country of stay, enter the other party's phone number and call in
the same way as calls within Japan.
• If the other party is also using international roaming, make a call in the same way as calls from overseas, even
if the other party is in the same country.
• Storing phone numbers including the other parties' country codes, etc. in the contact list will simplify the
procedure of making international calls.
• The Enter phone number screen can also be displayed by pressing e in idle state.
• If your call did not get through, tap [$$Retry] on the screen to make another attempt to call the same number.
• The view of the Enter phone number screen fields can be changed. 3 P139
• The handset can be set not to show the call duration on the screen displayed while talking. 3 P135
• An audible timer to notify you of the elapsed call time is available. 3 P128
• The handset can be set not to answer incoming calls during international roaming. 3 P516
• The handset can be set to play to a party who has attempted to call you during international roaming a
message informing the caller that the call is being forwarded overseas 3 P517
• Caller IDs may not be sent correctly.
Overseas Use
NOTE
489
00M1000EN.book
490 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Some overseas network operators may charge you for calls that did not get through due to communication
conditions.
• Some overseas network operators may charge you for calls to toll-free numbers.
• When you use international videophone, the image of the other party displayed may be distorted or
connection may not be established depending on the other party's handset. For details, visit the DoCoMo
website.
Answering Calls
Answer incoming phone calls with your FOMA handset when you are outside Japan.
A call arrives
The ring tone sounds and the status LED flashes.
• The vibrator can be enabled instead of the ring tone. 3 P126
Tap [Answer]
The call is answered.
• If a video call arrives, tap [Answer] to answer the call with the camera image enabled. Tap
[Privacy] to answer the call with the camera image disabled.
• Tap [Reject] to hang up without answering the incoming call.
• Operations during conversation are the same as described in Step 4 of "Making calls."
Press e when you have finished your call
The line is cleared.
1To access your FOMA handset overseas from Japan
Entering your phone number in the same way as usual domestic calls allows a caller in Japan
to make a call to your handset outside Japan, which you can answer.
Enter "090-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key
Or
Enter "080-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key
1To access your FOMA handset overseas from countries other than Japan
Regardless of the place of stay, entering your phone number prefixed with "+" and "81"
(country code for Japan) and without the "0" at the beginning of the area code allows a caller
to make a call to your handset, in the same way as overseas calls to Japan.
Overseas Use
490
Enter "+81-90-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key
Or
Enter "+81-80-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key
NOTE
• In some countries, you may be charged for calls that arrive during international roaming.
• Calls that arrive while the line is busy can be automatically diverted to the Voicemail Service Center. 3 P375
• Calls that arrive during international roaming are forwarded from Japan, regardless of the places of origin.
The callers are charged for calls to Japan and the receivers for international forwarding.
00M1000EN.book
491 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Switching Networks
Default setting
Band: WCDMA
Registration preference: Auto
Search frequency: Medium
To use your FOMA handset overseas, it is necessary to switch to a network available in
the place of stay. By default, a network available will be automatically found and set. You
can also select a network manually.
• Network switching must take place in a country where you use your FOMA handset.
• Network cannot be switched while Self mode is active.
Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Network
on the Menu bar on the Phone number entry screen
Band
: Select a frequency band suited for the
country of stay.
Registration preference
: Set the network automatically or manually.
Search frequency : Set the frequency of searching for a
network.
Find new network : Starts a search for a new network.
Tap Band and select a frequency band
Tap Registration preference, and tap Auto/Manual
• If Auto has been tapped, the network found will be automatically set.
• If Manual has been tapped, select from the networks found to set the network.
Tap Search frequency and select the frequency of search
Tap [Find new network]
A network is found. If Registration preference is set to Auto, the network found will be
automatically registered.
1If Registration preference is set to Manual
The screen as shown below is displayed after a network has been found.
Tap the network to set, and tap [Register].
Tap [Done]
Overseas Use
The selected network will be registered.
Setting Operations in Roaming
Set operations for handling calls that arrive while you are using international roaming
outside Japan.
• For details about network services, see "Network Service Operation Guide".
491
00M1000EN.book
492 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Making available Remote Operation of Network Services during Roaming
Set your handset to allow remote operation of Voicemail and Call Forwarding Services from
overseas.
• This operation can be performed only by subscribers of Voicemail or Call Forwarding Service.
Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Roaming
in the Menu bar
Tap $$ in the Remote access control field, and tap [Yes]
Remote access is enabled.
• Tap $$ to disable remote access.
Avoiding Calls Arriving during Roaming
Your handset can be set to restrict incoming calls or data communications during roaming.
Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Roaming
in the Menu bar on the Phone number entry screen
Tap $$ in the Incoming call barring when roaming field, and enter the
network security code on the Enter network security code
screen
Incoming call barring is set.
• Tap $$ to remove incoming call barring when roaming.
Overseas Use
NOTE
• The operation cannot be performed outside the service area or in an area with no radio wave.
Enabling Guidance in Roaming
The handset can be set to play to a party who has attempted to call you during international
roaming a message informing the caller that you are in international roaming.
• If the guidance function is not set, a message "Connecting your call. Please hold." is played to the caller.
492
00M1000EN.book
493 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Even if you have not enabled the guidance, a message in a foreign language may play depending on the
conditions of the overseas network operator. The ringing tone may be different from that in Japan.
Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Roaming
on the Menu bar on the Contact entry screen
Tap $$ in the Roaming Guidance field on the Roaming screen
The guidance function is enabled. To a caller, a message "The receiver is in international
roaming. Please hold while your call is being connected." is played.
• Tap $$ to disable the guidance.
NOTE
• The operation cannot be performed outside the service area or in an area with no radio wave.
Overseas Use
493
00M1000EN.book
494 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
00M1000EN.book
495 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Appendix
Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
List of Symbols and Special Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
List of Fixed Phrases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
List of Roman Character Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Combination of Functions during Multiaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Services Available for FOMA Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Options and Related Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Desktop Suite and SyncML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
1When Troubled
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Error Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Warranty and After-sales Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Protecting the Handset from Data that can Cause Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
495
00M1000EN.book
496 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Menu List
Tap $$ (Application launcher) on Application Selector bar to display.
Application
Description
Reference
$$
Browse
Accesses Internet and a homepage can be
viewed.
P193
$$
Calculator
A calculator can be used.
P350
$$
Calendar
Displays a calendar, and schedules can be
registered.
P322
$$
Camera
Takes still images/videos.
P169
$$
Contacts
Registration of contacts and searching contacts
are performed.
P99
$$
Control panel
Certificate manager
Displays User certificates/CA certificates.
P220
Text input
Details of text input are set up.
P467, 480,
484, 486, 490,
499
Sound
Sound such as Ringers are set.
P126
Shortcut key
Sets the menu launched by a home/shortcut key.
Password
Sets a Security code and a Phone Lock.
Master Clear/Master Reset
Performs Master Clear/Master Reset.
Manner Mode
Sets the operation of the Manner Mode.
P129
Memory card
Formats a memory card, or changes its name.
P302
Memory manager
Displays application memory.
Handset tab
P345
P147, 154
P360
P306, 308,
310
Screen
Adjusts brightness and tap location of the screen.
P134
Settings for cars
Sets the operation for connecting FOMA handset
to a Carkit.
P75
Power
Sets the operation of the Power save mode and
Status LED.
P136
Handset information
Displays system information of the FOMA
handset.
P350
Connection tab
Appendix
496
Bluetooth
Sets the detail of Bluetooth.
P382
Desktop Suite
Sets the connection type of Desktop Suite.
P529
Internet account
Sets the necessary settings for connecting to an
internet.
P183
Messaging accounts
Sets messaging accounts.
P227
Byte Counter
Displays the amount of data transmitted.
P348
00M1000EN.book
497 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Application
$$
午前７時５６分
Description
Reference
Connection tab
Find Wireless LAN Access
Point
Searches an access point of a wireless LAN.
P398
General tab
Select Language
Changes the language displayed on the screen.
P142
International
Sets present country and currency unit.
P140
Ringtune Manager
Installation of ringtones and Vibrator Setting is
performed.
Time & date
P124, 127
Sets the date, time and display format.
P59
$$
Desktop Suite
Synchronizes PC and data.
P530
$$
Home
Displays the Home screen.
P57
$$
Message
Sends and receives messages.
P234
$$
Music
Plays music.
P285
$$
Notes
Registers texts and Free draw notes.
P351
$$
Handset
Displays a phone number entry screen.
P66
$$
Picsel Viewer
Displays various files.
P289
$$
Pictures
Manages pictures such as still pictures taken.
P274
$$
SyncML
Synchronizes data with a specific server with
wireless.
P530
$$
Time
Sets a display of time and alarm.
$$
To Do
Registers what needs to be done.
P336
$$
Video
Manages videos taken.
P280
P319, 358
$$
Voice
Records a speech with the voice recorder.
P313
$$
movianVPN
Connects with such as intranet, by utilizing VPN.
P400
$$
Virus scan
Checks for a virus in FOMA handset or Trans
Flash memory card.
P540
List of Symbols and Special Characters
• Entering symbols and special characters 3P473
Doublebyte
& '
｜
＊
‐
¥
Appendix
Singlebyte
497
00M1000EN.book
498 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Porticular
List of Fixed Phrases
• Entering fixed phrases 3 P472
Category
Greeting
Reply
Business
Private
English
Appendix
498
Fixed phrases
おはようございます
こんにちは
こんばんは
おやすみなさい
ありがとうございます
すいません
よろしくお願いします
お疲れ様です
ご無沙汰しております
おめでとう
OK
NG
賛成
反対
了解です
問題ありません
今やっています
すぐ行きます
もう少し待ってください
いつでも大丈夫です
電話ください。
至急、返事ください。
遅れます。
これから帰社します。
会議中です。
出張中です。
直行します。
直帰します。
お世話になっております。
後程ご連絡致します。
TELして
遊びに行こうよ
飲みに行かない？
今日、ヒマ？
今どこ？
今何してるの？
もうすぐ着くよ
じゃあ、後で！
今日はダメです
いいよ！
Thank you
Call me back!
I'm late.
Where are you now?
I'll be back soon.
Let's meet at
It sounds great!
Congratulations!
Good luck!
I love you.
00M1000EN.book
499 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Category
Internet
午前７時５６分
Fixed phrases
@docomo.ne.jp
.co.jp
.ne.jp
.or.jp
.ac.jp
.com
http://
https://
ftp://
www.
.org
.net
.jp
.html
List of Roman Character Entries
Hiragana/Kanji entry is performed by Roman character input, when the input method is
set to Qwerty Keyboard and input mode is set to kanji mode. 3P471
Line
あ line
Entering character
Keys to tap
あ
い
う
え
お
yi
wu
ぁ
ぃ
ぅ
ぇ
ぉ
la
xa
li
xi
lyi
xyi
lu
xu
le
xe
lye
xye
lo
xo
うぁ
うぃ
うぇ
うぉ
wha
whi
wi
whe
we
who
か
き
く
け
こ
ka
ca
ki
ku
cu
qu
ke
ko
co
が
ぎ
ぐ
げ
ご
ga
gi
gu
ge
go
きゃ
きぃ
きゅ
きぇ
きょ
kya
kyi
kyu
kye
kyo
ぎゃ
ぎぃ
ぎゅ
ぎぇ
ぎょ
gya
gyi
gyu
gye
gyo
くぁ
くぃ
くぅ
くぇ
くぉ
qwa
qa
kwa
qwi
qi
qyi
qwu
qwe
qe
qye
qwo
qo
くょ
qya
ye
ぃぇ
か line
くゃ
さ line
くゅ
qyu
qyo
ぐぃ
ぐぅ
ぐぇ
ぐぉ
gwa
gwi
gwu
gwe
gwo
し
す
せ
そ
sa
si
ci
shi
su
se
ce
so
ざ
じ
ず
ぜ
ぞ
za
zi
ji
zu
ze
zo
しゃ
しい
しゅ
しぇ
しょ
sya
sha
syi
syu
shu
sye
she
syo
sho
じゃ
じぃ
じゅ
じぇ
じょ
zya
ja
jya
zyi
jyi
zyu
ju
jyu
zye
je
jye
zyo
jo
jyo
すぁ
すぃ
すぅ
すぇ
すぉ
swa
swi
swu
swe
swo
Appendix
ぐぁ
さ
499
00M1000EN.book
500 ページ
Line
た line
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Entering character
Keys to tap
た
ち
つ
て
と
ta
ti
chi
tu
thu
te
to
ちゃ
ちぃ
ちゅ
ちぇ
ちょ
tya
cha
cya
tyi
tyu
chu
cyu
tye
che
cye
tyo
cho
cyo
つぇ
つぉ
tsa
tsi
tse
tso
cyi
つぁ
つぃ
てゃ
てぃ
てゅ
てぇ
てょ
tha
thi
thu
the
tho
とぁ
とぃ
とぅ
とぇ
とぉ
twa
twi
twu
twe
two
だ
ぢ
づ
で
ど
da
di
du
de
do
dyi
dyu
dye
dyo
ぢゃ
ぢぃ
ぢゅ
ぢぇ
ぢょ
dya
でゃ
でぃ
でゅ
でぇ
でょ
dha
dhi
dhu
dhe
dho
どぁ
どぃ
どぅ
どぇ
どぉ
dwa
dwi
dwu
dwe
dwo
itu
xtu
っ
な line
は line
な
に
ぬ
ね
の
na
ni
nu
ne
no
にゃ
にぃ
にゅ
にぇ
にょ
nya
nyi
nyu
nye
nyo
は
ひ
ふ
へ
ほ
ha
hi
hu
fu
he
ho
ひゃ
ひぃ
ひゅ
ひぇ
ひょ
hya
hyi
hyu
hye
hyo
ふぉ
fwa
fa
fwi
fi
fyi
fwu
fwe
fe
fye
fwo
fo
bi
bu
be
bo
ふぁ
ふぃ
や line
ら line
わ line
Appendix
500
ふぇ
ふょ
fya
ば
び
ぶ
べ
ぼ
ba
びゃ
びぃ
びゅ
びぇ
びょ
bya
byi
byu
bye
byo
vi
vu
ve
vo
ふゃ
ま line
ふぅ
ふゅ
fyu
fyo
ヴぁ
ヴぃ
ヴ
ヴぇ
ヴぉ
va
ヴゃ
ヴぃ
ヴゅ
ヴぇ
ヴょ
vya
vyi
vyu
vye
vyo
ぱ
ぴ
ぷ
ぺ
ぽ
pa
pi
pu
pe
po
ぴゃ
ぴぃ
ぴゅ
ぴぇ
ぴょ
pya
pyi
pyu
pye
pyo
mi
mu
me
mo
myi
myu
mye
myo
ま
み
む
め
も
ma
みゃ
みぃ
みゅ
みぇ
みょ
mya
や
ゆ
よ
ya
yu
yo
ゃ
ゅ
ょ
lya
xya
lyu
xyu
lyo
xyo
ら
り
る
れ
ろ
ra
ri
ru
re
りゃ
りぃ
りゅ
りぇ
りょ
rya
ryi
ryu
rye
ん
wa
わ
ゎ
を
iwa
xwa
wo
ro
ryo
nn
n'
xn
00M1000EN.book
501 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Combination of Functions during Multiaccess
The available combination of operations for Multiaccess is as shown below:
Operation to be
used
Making/
receiving a
voice call
Making/
receiving a
video call
Connecting to
Internet
Sending/
receiving a
message
Sending/
receiving SMS
While on a voice
call
○
×
○
While on a video
call
×
×
○
While
connected to
Internet
○
○
Current status
○
×
–
Available
Not available.
The combination is functionally not possible.
Internet connection not available via CSD in overseas.
Not available to send/receive messages via CSD in overseas.
A call cannot be made or received during an internet connection via CSD in overseas.
Services Available for FOMA Handset
Available service
Phone number
Collect call (reversed charge calls)
106 (no area code)
Directory assistance for general subscriber phones and DoCoMo's
mobile phones (charges apply).
(Unlisted phone numbers cannot be given.)
104 (no area code)
Telegrams (charges apply)
115 (no area code)
8 a.m. - 10 p.m.
Time (charges apply)
117 (no area code)
Weather report (charges apply)
Area code + 177
Police emergencies
110 (no area code)
Fire and ambulance
119 (no area code)
Marine emergencies and accident reports
118 (no area code)
Message Dial for a disaster (charges apply)
171 (no area code)
• If you use the collect call service (106), the call charge is billed to the receiver together with a commission
of 90 yen (94.5 yen with tax included) per call. (as of XX 2004)
• If you use the directory assistance service (104), a service charge of 100 yen (105 yen with tax included) is
billed together with the call charge. Note that this service is available without charge for those visually
impaired or physically disabled in the upper body. For further information, inquire at 116 (NTT sales center)
from a general subscriber phone. (as of XX 2004)
Appendix
NOTE
501
00M1000EN.book
502 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
• Note that calls to 110, 119 or 118 from the FOMA handset cannot be located. Since the police or fire
department authorities may call you to confirm, inform them that you are calling from a mobile phone, give
your number and detailed information of your whereabouts. To make sure that you are not cut off during the
call, stay in one place when you make the call and do not turn off the phone after the call, but keep it on for
about 10 minutes so that a call can be received.
• Depending on the area you are calling from you may not be connected to the local police or fire department.
Use a public payphone or general subscriber phone if you cannot get in touch with the local authorities.
• Customers who use "Call Forwarding" and "Voice Warp" from a general subscriber phone whose forwarding
destination is a mobile or carphone (mobile phone), may still hear the ring tone even when the mobile phone
is busy, is outside the service area or is turned OFF due to the setting of the general subscriber/mobile
phone.
• You may not be able to call 116 (NTT sales center), Dial Q2, Message Dial and make credit card calls. (Credit
card calls can be made from a general subscriber or a public phone to a FOMA handset.)
Appendix
502
00M1000EN.book
503 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Options and Related Devices
Combining the FOMA handset with optional devices supports a wide variety uses from
personal use to business use. Some products are unavailable depending on the region.
For details, contact our sales office. For details about the optional devices, refer to the
instruction manual for each device.
• AC adapter MXX
• Desktop holder MXX
• Battery pack MXX
• Rear cover MXX
• Carrying case MXX
• Stylus MXX
• USB cable MXX
• FOMA USB cable
• International FOMA AC adapter 01
• Earphone/microphone with flat switch P01/P02
• Flat type stereo earphone set P01
• Earphone/microphone with switch P001/P002*
• Stereo earphone set P001*
*:
Earphone jack converter adapter P001 is needed.
Desktop Suite and SyncML
FOMA handset has two types of software in order to synchronize data.
1Desktop suite
A FOMA handset connected to a personal computer with USB, or via Bluetooth, can transmit
and synchronize data such as Contacts, Calendar, To do list, and messages.
With Desktop suite, installation and transmission of applications and files to a FOMA handset
can be performed in addition to transmission and synchronization of data.
1SyncML
A FOMA handset connected to a personal computer via a wireless LAN, can transmit and
synchronize data such as Contacts, Calendar, and To do list.
Please see the following homepage or the help of Desktop suite/SyncML about details on
such as download method, data which can be transmitted/synchronized, a hardware
requirement, the operation method, and restrictions.
 http://www.XXXXXX
Hardware Requirements
Please use in the operational environments shown below.
Item
Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows 98SE
CPU
A processor with XX or higher performance is recommended.
Required memory*
XXMB or higher
Free hard disk space*
XXMB or higher
Display
High Color (16bit) or higher is recommended.
*:
Appendix
OS
Required environment
Required memory and hard disk space may vary depending on system environments.
503
00M1000EN.book
504 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Before Using

Please see the above homepage or the help of Desktop suite/SyncML about details on such as
download method, data which can be transmitted/synchronized, a hardware requirement, the
operation method, and restrictions.
For inquiries on Desktop suite and SyncML
XXXXSupport Center 0120-XXX-XXX
Office hours: Week days from XX:XX to XX:XX a.m. and XX:XX to XX:XX p.m.
(Saturdays, Sundays, public holidays, and predetermined holidays are excluded)
Using Desktop Suite
By using Desktop Suite, following operations can be performed between a personal computer
linked to a FOMA handset.
Installing Desktop Suite PC
Set the attached CD-ROM to a personal computer
Specify "The drive name of CD-ROM: \XXX\setup.exe" and click
[OK]
Click in the order of [ スタート ] (Start) menu y “ ファイル名を指定
して実行 ” (Execute by specifying a file name)
• From here on, please follow the instructions displayed on the
screen.
Starting Desktop Suite PC
Please connect a FOMA handset and a personal computer beforehand, after they are powered
on. 3 P416
Appendix
504
Select in the order of [ スタート ] (Start) menu y “ すべてのプログ
ラム ” (All Programs) ([Programs] for OS other than WindowsXP)
00M1000EN.book
505 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
y "Motorola Desktop Suite", and click on "Motorola Desktop
Suite"
Starting of Desktop Suite PC will display the above screen.
1About detailed operation method of Desktop Suite PC
Please refer to the help file. The display method is as follows:
Select in the order of [ スタート ] (Start) menu y “ すべてのプログラム ” (All Programs)
([Programs] for OS other than WindowsXP) y "Motorola Desktop Suite", and click on
"Motorola Desktop Help"
Uninstalling Desktop Suite PC
Uninstalls Desktop Suite PC
• Before uninstalling, please end Desktop Suite PC.
• The display on the screen differs when an OS other than Windows XP is used.
< Example: When uninstalling form Windows XP >
Click on the icons in the order of [ スタート ] (Start) menu y “ コン
トロールパネル ” (Control Panel) y “ プログラムの追加と削除 ”
(Add or Remove Programs)
The “ プログラムの追加と削除 ” (Add or Remove Programs) screen is displayed.
1For Windows 2000 Professional, Me
Click on [ スタート ] (Start) menu, and select in the order of [ 設定 ] (Setting) y “ コント
ロールパネル ” (Control Panel) and double click on “ アプリケーションの追加と削除 ”
(Add or Remove Programs)
“アプリケーションの追加と削除 ” (Add or Remove Programs) screen (for Windows Me,
“アプリケーションの追加と削除のプロパティ ” (Property of Add or Remove
Programs) ) is displayed.
• From here on, please follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
Appendix
Select "Motorola Desktop Suite" and click on “ 変更と削除 ”
(Change or Delete)
Setting the Connection Method of Desktop Suite
The method for connecting to Desktop Suite (USB cable connection/Bluetooth communication) is
set.
505
00M1000EN.book
506 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, tap Connect tab from
Control Panel screen y tap Desktop Suite
When the connection
method is USB
When the connection
method is Bluetooth
1Changing the precedence of apparatus when connection method is set to Bluetooth
Tap [Change]
Display
Device list
: Tap and select when displaying the Bluetooth
apparatus by types.
: The apparatus by which Bluetooth connection was
made (above the line), and the apparatus being
searched (below the line) are displayed.
• Tap [Update] to start a search for apparatus available for Bluetooth
connection starts.3P383
Tap Connection Drop Box, set connection method y tap [Done]
Operating Desktop Suite
Desktop Suite is operated and data is transmitted. The connection starts with the method set at
"Setting the connection method of Desktop Suite" (3 P529)
• When connecting via USB, this operation is performed after connecting a personal computer with a FOMA
handset with an USB cable beforehand. 3 P414
• When connecting via Bluetooth, it is recommended to register the connecting Bluetooth apparatus
beforehand. 3 P382
Appendix
506
00M1000EN.book
507 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar
When connecting via
USB
午前７時５６分
When connecting via
Bluetooth
Tap [Connect]
1When disconnecting
Tap [Disconnect]
Synchronizing a Personal Computer with a Data by Using SyncML
Setting up SyncML
Performs a server setup in order to use SyncML.
• Information necessary for the setting will be supplied by the provider of SyncML.
Tap $$ y $$ at the Application Selector bar
Tap in the order from Edit y Settings in the Menu bar
Server address
Username
Password
: Enter a server address.
: Enter a username.
: Enter a password.
Appendix
507
00M1000EN.book
508 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap a column to set up, and enter information
1When performing a setting for a transport login
• Please perform this when needed. Information necessary for the setting will be supplied
by the provider of SyncML.
a Tap Protocol tab
Transport protocol
: Transport protocol is displayed.
Use transport login
: Sets enable/disable of transport login.
Username : The user name for transport login is entered. This
can be entered only when transport login is
enabled.
Password : The password for transport login is entered. This
can be entered only when transport login is
enabled.
b Tap $$ at Use transport login column
• Tap $$ to disable Transport Login.
c Tap the Username column, and enter a user name
d Tap the Password column, and enter a password
Tap [Done]
The server is set.
Setting the Task to Synchronize
Sets the task to synchronize by SyncML.
Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar
The task to synchronize is displayed.
Appendix
508
00M1000EN.book
509 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap a task to set
Enable task
Task name
: Sets enable/disable of the task.
: The task name acquired beforehand is
displayed.
Server database
: The path to the server database acquired
beforehand is displayed.
Tap $$ of Enable task
• Tap $$ to disable the task.
Tap Task name column, and enter a task name
• Make a change as needed.
Tap Server database column and enter a path
• Make a change as needed.
Tap [Done]
The task is set.
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the task setting.
Synchronizing Data
Connects to the SyncML server, and synchronizes the data.
Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar
The task to synchronize is displayed.
The tasks with synchronization disabled are displayed 3 P532
Appendix
509
00M1000EN.book
510 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [Sync]
The progress of synchronization is displayed.
Condition of the task is displayed.
• Tap [Stop] to cancel the performing synchronization.
• Tap SyncML 3 Disconnect on the Menu bar to disconnect the
communication.
Synchronization
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Check
FOMA handset cannot be turned ON (the handset
cannot be used).
• Is the battery connected properly? 3 P52
• Is the battery depleted? 3 P55
• When the mova handset is ON in a dual network
service, the FOMA service is not available. Check
whether or not FOMA handset is ON. Please see
"Network Service Operation Guide" for further
information. 3 P373
A message "UIM selection failed" is displayed when
the FOMA handset is powered on.
• The UIM may not be properly attached or may be
damaged. Check to see if the UIM is properly
attached. 3 P49
Screen does not change when a key is pressed or the • Is All lock set? 3 P153
touch screen is tapped while the display is turned off.
Appendix
510
The display gets dark, and indication disappeared.
• Is the handset in power saving mode? 3 P42
"Battery Status: Very Low Recharge Battery" is
displayed, and alarm is heard.
• The battery is almost discharged. Charge the
battery. 3 P54
Calls cannot be made by entering a phone number.
• Is Self-mode set? 3 P155
After dialling a number, you hear a busy tone and
cannot establish your call.
• Have you dialed the area code? 3 P66
• Did you hear the dial tone before dialling? 3 P66
• Is "No service" indicated? 3 P41
Mail reception is announced by other than the set ring
tone.
• Is the mail from the partner whom you registered
the ringer tone in the phonebook? 3 P104
The image/melody set in each function does not
display/play, and operates in default setting.
• Is the same UIM as the one acquired the picture or
the melody attached? 3 P50
00M1000EN.book
511 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
The icon indicating the network state shows the
handset is out of network coverage, and you cannot
use the global roaming service.
• You are outside the service area of global roaming
service, or in an area with poor signal strength.
• Please check with "Network Service Operation
Guide" or the homepage of WORLD WING to see
whether the service area or the operator is the one
you can use.
• Please switch to a corresponding network. 3 P515
Neither a Video Call, a short message service (SMS),
nor a packet communication can be used.
• Please check with "Network Service Operation
Guide" or the homepage of WORLD WING to see
whether the service area or the operator is the one
you can use.
• Please switch to a corresponding network. 3 P515
Cannot receive either a voice call or a video call.
• Is Incoming call barring when roaming set? 3
P516
After returning from overseas, the icon indicating the
network state remains displaying no service.
• Is the network set for GSM/GPRS system? 3
P515
Error Message List
Displayed Messaget
Description
Reference
The application was not able to install, since the file is
corrupt.
P362
Application was not able to
install since there is
insufficient memory in the
handset. Please delete an
unnecessary file and try
again
There is insufficient memory for the specified installation.
Delete some files and restart the installation.
P363
Cannot find specified
memory card. Check if the
memory card is properly
inserted
Application was not able to uninstall due to an error.
P363
The download was aborted
due to an error
Was not able to download due to an error.
P211
Delete or move internal files
to the memory card
A photograph cannot be taken since the memory in the
FOMA handset is full. Please either move to the external
memory, or delete unnecessary picture/video.
P307, 308
Move or delete some files
A photograph cannot be taken since the memory in the
FOMA handset is full. Please either move to the external
memory, or delete unnecessary picture/video.
P307, 308
Captured file could not be
stored
The picture/video taken was not able to save due to an error. P169, 170
Folder changed to default
external folder
The specified folder was not correct, so the default external
folder is opened.
P303
Camera could not be
accessed. The application
will close
The camera application is closed due to an error.
P169
Appendix
This software cannot be
installed as the installation
file is corrupt
511
00M1000EN.book
512 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Displayed Messaget
Appendix
512
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Description
Reference
Not all contacts were
deleted successfully
Certain contacts were not able to delete.
P113
Not all contacts were copied
successfully
Certain contacts were not able to copy.
P115
Not all contacts were moved
successfully
Certain contacts were not able to move.
P115
Contact can't be saved.
Please enter name.
This message displays when you attempt to save a contact
without entering a name. Please try saving again after
entering a name.
P99
Illegal characters. Contact
was updated.
When you attempt to save a contact that includes characters
that cannot be saved to UIM, the data will be changed and
then saved.
P105
USB cable not connected.
Since the USB cable is not connected to the FOMA handset,
it cannot connect to a PC.
P414
Failed to connect to PC via
USB. Check the settings on
the PC.
FOMA handset cannot be connected to a PC via USB.
P417
Do you want to enable
Bluetooth?
This message is displayed when attempting to connect
FOMA handset with a PC using Bluetooth, and an available
device is not set.
Please tap [Yes], and set the available device.
P382
Your preferred device cannot
be found. Make sure it is
turned on and in-range.
Alternatively change your
preferred device.
This message is displayed when attempting to connect
FOMA handset with a PC using Bluetooth, and an available
device is not set. Please tap [Update], and you can select
another device from the list of available devices.
P382
Check Failed
The check on a short message (SMS) failed.
P263
A handset is trying to
connect in order to transfer
an entry.
Other handset is trying to connect to the FOMA handset in
order to transmit data. Tap [Accept] to receive the data with
Bluetooth.
P385
The file name already exists This message is displayed when you attempt to change a file
name to the one already exist. Please use other file name.
P304
Enter a name for the track
This message displays when you attempt to change a music
file name without entering anything. Please enter a file
name.
P304
This application's file is
damaged and has been
deleted
The dameaged data in notes is deleted.
TV Phone is not available
You are not in an area where a Video Call can be used. You
can make a voice call by tapping [Voice].
P89
Failed to connect
Video call cannot be made due to an error. You can make a
voice call by tapping [$$Voice].
P89
Video call cannot be dialed
in an active audio call
This message displays when attempting to make a video call
during a voice call. You can make a voice call by tapping
[$$Voice].
P89
Failed
A setup of network service failed due to an error.
Failure Network failure
Failed a network search for setting up a network, due to an
error.
00M1000EN.book
513 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
Displayed Messaget
午前７時５６分
Description
Reference
Failure Other Phone is Busy The other phone is busy when switching Dual Network.
P373
Failure Invalid Network
Password
The password for the network is incorrect.
P146
Network password incorrect
The password for the network is incorrect.
P146
Not Subscribed
The network service is not subscribed.
Failure Network already
exists
The network attempted to be registered already exists in the
preferred list.
List full Please delete an
entry first
The preferred list is full.
Failure Emergency only
Either network cannot be found, or manual network selection
is cancelled.
Failure No Service
The network cannot be used,
Incorrect password
PIN is not correct.
P147
Incorrect password PIN will
be blocked if next attempt
fails
Reentered PIN is not correct.
P147
PIN is blocked
PIN is locked.
P151
None of UIMs is selected
UIM is not selected.
UIM selection failed
An error occurred with the UIM.
Unknown document file type It is a file not supported.
P289
The document is faulty, and
could not be converted
An error occurred with the file.
P289
Image could not be loaded
Image could not be loaded due to an error.
Image is too large to operate The image is too large to display or edit.
Image could not be moved
Image could not be moved due to an error.
P275
Image could not be renamed Image could not be renamed due to an error.
Image could not be deleted
Image could not be deleted due to an error.
Unable to play clip.
Unable to play clip due to an error.
Enter a name for the clip.
This message displays when you attempt to change a clip
file name without entering anything. Please enter a file
name.
P304
Unable to update pattern
definitions.
Failed to update pattern definitions of virus scan due to an
error.
The total data amount
exceeds the specified
threshold.
The total packet data sent and received exceeded the
specified threshold.
P349
A certificate must be
selected.
A certificate needs to be selected.
P220
Client certificates are not
available. Network
authentication cannot be
configured.
Either a certificate does not exist, or the certificate has
expired, so it cannot be used.
P220
Appendix
Cannot use pattern scanner. Initialization of virus scan failed due to an error
513
00M1000EN.book
514 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
Displayed Messaget
Appendix
514
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Description
Reference
A problem occurred during
the automatic settings
update
Downloading quickstart failed due to an error.
Failure Device settings not
reset
Master Reset failed due to an error.
Failure User data not
cleared Device settings not
reset
Master Clear failed due to an error.
Bad name
It is a name that cannot be registered in TransFlash memory
card.
P302
Switch off light must be less
than or equal to the time to
Power down screen
It will be adjusted
accordingly
The time for Power down screen in power saving mode
cannot be set up shorter than the time for switch off light.
Please reset the time again.
P136
Battery Status: Very Low
Recharge Battery
Low battery. Please charge.
P54
You cannot delete the ……
folder because it still has
items in it.
The folder could not be deleted since it has data in it.
P303
Your handset is low on
memory. Do you want to
create some space now?
The memory capacity of FOMA handset is insufficient. Tap
[Yes] to display the screen for deleting unnecessary files, or
the memory manager.
P311
Disk is full
The memory is full. Delete unnecessary files.
P311
This file is damaged and
can't be used.
The file is damaged, so it cannot be used.
This application's file is
damaged and has been
deleted.
The file is damaged, so it has been deleted.
Failed to read the user
dictionary. Are you sure you
want to initialize?
Failed to read the user dictionary. Tap [OK] to initialize and
activate.
P484
Failed to read the learning
dictionary. Are you sure you
want to initialize?
Failed to read the learning dictionary. Tap [OK] to initialize
and activate.
P490
Invalid Battery Unable to
Charge Battery
An invalid battery pack is used. Please use an appropriate
battery pack.
P52
No viewer can be found on
your device to open this file.
It is a file type that cannot be supported. Tap [Save] to be
saved in FOMA handset.
P250
00M1000EN.book
515 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Warranty and After-sales Service
Warranty
• A written warranty is provided with every FOMA handset; make sure that you receive it. Store the warranty in
a safe place when you have read it and checked that it contains the "shop name/date" you purchased it. If it
does not contain the necessary information, contact the shop where you bought it. The warranty is valid for
a period of one year from the date of purchase.
• This product and all accessories are subject to change, in part or whole, for the sake of improvement without
prior notice.
After-sales Service
When Problems Occur
Before requesting service, read the section "Troubleshooting".
If the problem still persists, contact one of the numbers described in "Contacts" at the back cover
of this manual.
If the Result of Inquiries Indicates that a Repair is Required
Take your FOMA handset to a service center designated by DoCoMo. Be sure to check the
opening hours of the service center. Note that you must present the warranty.
1In the warranty period
• The FOMA handset will be repaired at no charge subject to the conditions of the warranty.
• The warranty must be presented to receive warranty service. The subscriber will be charged for the repair
of items not covered in the warranty or repairs of defects resulting from misuse, accident or neglect even
during the warranty period.
• The subscriber is charged even during the warranty period for the repair of failures caused by the use of
devices or consumable items that are not DoCoMo-specified.
1Repairs may not be possible in the following cases:
• Repair is not possible when corrosion due exposure to moisture, condensation or perspiration is detected
in a moisture seal reaction or test, or if any of the internal boards are damaged or deformed. Since these
conditions are outside the scope of the warranty, a repair, if at all possible, will be charged.
1After expiration of the warranty
• All repairs that are requested are charged.
1Replacement parts
Appendix
• Replacement parts (parts required to maintain product function) will be kept in stock for at least 6 years
after termination of production. The product can be repaired during this period. Depending on the nature
of the required repair, it may still be possible to repair your phone even after this period, so please contact
one of the numbers described in "Contacts" at the back cover of this manual.
Notes
• Do not modify the FOMA handset, the UIM or its accessories.
515
00M1000EN.book
516 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
- Fire, injury or damage may result.
- In order to prevent interference of radio waves or network breakdown, the FOMA handset and UIM are
manufactured according to technical standards stipulated by law. Do not use FOMA handsets or UIMs that
do not meet these standards.
- If the FOMA handset is modified (part replacement, modification, painting, etc.) it will be repaired only after
the modified parts have been restored to the condition at the time of purchase. However, repair may be
refused depending on the nature of modification.
- Repair of failures or damage caused by modification are charged even during the warranty period.
• Do not remove any inscription stickers attached to the FOMA handset. The inscription stickers certify that the
FOMA handset satisfies specific technical standards. Note that if stickers are removed intentionally or are
reattached in such a way that confirmation of the sticker's contents is impossible, repair or servicing may be
refused because confirmation of whether or not the phone conforms to relevant technical standards cannot
be made.
• The ON/OFF function settings and stored data may be cleared (reset) by failure, repair or handling processes.
Should this happen, set up the functions again.
• Magnetic components are used in the earpiece and speaker of the FOMA handset. Do not allow cash cards
or other devices that are vulnerable to magnetism to come into contact with the phone.
• If the handset becomes wet or moist, turn the power off and remove the battery pack immediately and bring
the handset to our repair office as soon as possible. However, repair may not be possible depending on the
condition of the handset.
Phonebook, Downloaded Data and IC Card Data
• Maintain a separate record of the data you register in your FOMA handset. DoCoMo will not accept any
liability and responsibility whatsoever for changes of information or loss of information.
• Data created, imported or downloaded by the subscriber may be lost or become corrupted when changing
the model or repairing mobile phone or carphone. DoCoMo may, at its option, repair a mobile carphone by
replacing it. In such an event, it will not be possible, to transfer the data (except some data) to the new
handset. DoCoMo will not accept any responsibility.
Scan Function
Protecting the Handset from Data that can Cause Damage
By using the Scan Function, FOMA handset can perform a virus scan in FOMA handset or a
TransFlash memory card. When it is found infected from a result of a virus scan, the virus can be
cleansed immediately.
• The scan cannot be performed when another application is in use.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar
Last Scan
Last Update
Appendix
516
: Displays the date of the last scan.
: Displays the date of the last update of the
pattern file.
00M1000EN.book
517 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [$$Start scanning]
All media
: Scans both FOMA handset and TransFlash
memory card.
Internal memory
: Scans FOMA handset.
Card name
: Scans TransFlash memory card.
• When a TransFlash memory card is not attached, the selection
screen for the media would not be displayed. It will skip to
Step 4.
Tap $$ y [OK] of the media you are scanning
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the start of scanning.
Tap [OK]
The scan starts, and the result is displayed when the scan completes.
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the start of scanning.
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the scan during a scan.
Updating the Virus Pattern File
Virus scan uses the virus pattern file in order to distinguish viruses. By updating the virus pattern
file, it would make it possible to scan new viruses.
Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap [Update]
from the virus scan screen
Appendix
517
00M1000EN.book
518 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [OK]
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the update.
Tap [OK]
The phone ID is transmitted, and the update starts.
• Tap [Cancel] to cancel the transmission of the phone ID.
• Tap [Cancel] y [OK] to cancel the update.
Tap [OK]
The update completes.
NOTE
• When the pattern data is updated, SSL communication is performed to the server (the site of our company).
Please enable the SSL certificate. 3P195
• When the pattern data is updated, the unique information (model, serial number, etc.) of your handset is
automatically transmitted to our server (the server that our company manages for the scanning function). We
do not use the transmitted information for any purposes other than the scanning function.
• Please set the date (year, month, and day) of your FOMA handset correctly.
• In case an update of a virus pattern file fails, please redo the update from the beginning.
• If the virus pattern file in the handset is the latest one, a message is displayed indicating that the pattern file
is the newest.
Appendix
518
00M1000EN.book
519 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
1Functions and data that can be scanned
• [Since the specification is not decided yet, detail is omitted.]
1When infected with a virus
If a virus is detected during a scan, the confirmation screen for deleting the virus will be
displayed.
• Tap [Delete] or [OK] to delete the detected virus, and to resume the scan.
• Tap [Skip] to resume the scan without deleting the detected virus.
1When the scan completes
When the scan completes, a screen with the result of the scan is displayed.
No virus
Virus deleted
Virus not deleted
Appendix
519
00M1000EN.book
520 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
Tap [Details] in the result screen shown at virus detection to display details on the scan.
$$ : The virus has been deleted.
$$ : The virus has not been deleted.
• Select a file name and tap [Details] to notify the infected file, name
of the virus, and the status of the virus (deleted/deleted or not) .
The name of infected file
Checking the Version of the Virus Pattern File
The detailed information on virus scan application is displayed, and the version of a virus pattern
file can be checked.
Tap in the sequence of $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar,
and tap Virus Scan on the Menu bar y About Virus Scan
Application name and the version of the virus pattern file are
displayed.
Appendix
520
00M1000EN.book
522 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
00M1000EN.book
523 ページ
２００４年１１月２４日
水曜日
午前７時５６分
About Proper Telephone Etiquette
Do not disturb people around you when using your FOMA handset.
Always turn OFF your FOMA handset in the following situations:
1In a location where use of handsets is prohibited
There are places where you cannot use a handset. Always turn OFF your FOMA handset when:
• In an airplane
• In a hospital
Be aware that patients use electronic medical equipment in many areas in hospitals. Your
FOMA handset must be switched off even in lobbies or waiting rooms.
1While driving
Using your FOMA handset while driving could affect safe driving and cause danger.
Stop your car in a safe place before using your FOMA handset or use Drive Mode.
1While in a crowded train where there may be a person who uses an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or cardioverter defibrillator near you.
1Use of the handset could adversely affect the operation of an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or cardioverter defibrillator.
1While in public places such as a concert hall, movie theater or art museum
Using your FOMA handset in quiet public places will likely bother other people.
Match the volume of your voice and your FOMA handset's ring tone to
your location
1In a quiet location like a restaurant or hotel lobby, pay attention to the volume of your
voice and ring tones, etc. when using your FOMA handset.
1In town areas, while using your FOMA handset, be sure not to block foot or vehicular
traffic.
Consider privacy
Give consideration to privacy before shooting or sending images with a mobile phone
with a built-in camera.
"Silent" functions designed for public use
Your FOMA handset has a number of useful "silent" functions designed for public use, such
as a setting that instructs your handset not to answer incoming calls and the ability to set the
handset for silent operation.
2Manner Mode
Mutes all sounds your FOMA handset makes, such as keypad sound and ring tones.
3P160
2Drive Mode
Plays a guidance to notify that you cannot answer the call because you are driving a car,
then disconnects the call. This mode ensures your safety while driving because no ring
tone sounds when a call is received. 3P79
2Vibrator
Vibrates when there is an incoming call. 3P155
2Voice message
Allows the caller to leave a message when you cannot answer the phone. 3P81
In addition to the above functions, optional services such as Voice Mail Service and Call
Forwarding Service are also available. 3P483, P488
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 135
Language                        : EN-US
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:30df8962-b0ab-417a-8d94-f0ffd60537f0
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Company                         : Micron Electronics, Inc.
Source Modified                 : D:20041217200624
Headline                        : 
Create Date                     : 2004:12:17 14:06:49-06:00
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 6.0 for Word
Modify Date                     : 2004:12:17 14:33:10-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:12:17 14:33:10-06:00
Document ID                     : uuid:8555d3df-4afe-44bd-b122-6a61391aa035
Version ID                      : 2
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : The following is a draft copy of the instruction manual
Creator                         : Rob Bero
Subject                         : 
Tagged PDF                      : No
Author                          : Rob Bero
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: IHDT6EY1

Navigation menu